Solicitation For - pcschicago.com Full Facility...01 45 01.10 06 USACE Quality Control System (QCS), for Army Reserve Centers ... September 2010 Version 01 03 00 ... 1.3.7 The design

Solicitation For Philip H. Sheridan Reserve Center Fort Sheridan, IL Specifications Volume 1B Certified Final P2 336980 04 August 2011 W912QR-11-R-0072

SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISIONS 00-01

FOR THE

FORT SHERIDAN, ILLINOIS

PHILIP H. SHERIDAN ARMY RESERVE CENTER

FULL FACILITY RESTORATION

P2# 336980

W912QR-11-R-0072

CERTIFIED FINAL DESIGN SUBMITTAL

4 AUGUST 2011

VOLUME 1B

RSP Project Number

6066.106.00-14 (9)

***SAFETY PAYS***

Full Facility Restoration Certified Final D/B RFP Submittal Army Reserve Center W912QR-11-R-0072 Fort Sheridan, IL

TOC - 1

DESIGN/BUILD REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL

Table of Contents

Volume 1a

Division 00 – Introductory, Bidding and Contract Requirements

SF 1442 Solicitation, Offer and Award

00010 Price Breakout Schedule

00010 Solicitation Contract Form

00100 Instructions to Bidders

00114 Procedures for Submittal of Offers and Proposal Evaluation Criteria

00600 Representations and Certifications

00700 Contract Clauses

00 80 00.00 06 Special Clauses

00 80 00.01 06 Attachments (Special Clauses)

Division 01 – General Requirements

01 02 00.00 48 Statement of Work

Volume 1b

01 03 00.00 48 Design Submission Requirements After Award

01 04 00.00 48 The Design/Build Process

01 32 01.00 06 Project Schedule

01 33 00 Submittal Procedures

01 33 00.01 Submittal Register

01 33 29.00 06 LEED Certification

01 33 29.01 06 LEED (Submittals)

01 35 26.00 06 Government Safety Requirements

01 35 26.01 06 Attachments (Government Safety Requirements)

01 42 00 Sources for Reference Publications

01 45 01.10 06 USACE Quality Control System (QCS), for Army Reserve Centers (ARCs)

01 45 04.10 06 Contractor Quality Control

01 46 00.00 06 Commissioning of Building Energy Systems

01 50 00 Temporary Construction Facilities and Controls

01 57 20.00 10 Environmental Protection

01 57 23 Temporary Storm Water Pollution Control

01 62 35 Recycled / Recovered Materials

01 74 19 Construction and Demolition Waste Management

01 78 23 Operations and Maintenance Data

Division 02 – Not Used

Volume 2

Divisions 03 – 41 RFP Outline Technical Specifications

***SAFETY PAYS*** Full Facility Restoration Certified Final D/B RFP Submittal Army Reserve Center W912QR-11-R-0072 Fort Sheridan, IL

September 2010 Version 01 03 00.00 48 - 1 of 25

SECTION 01 03 00.00 48

DESIGN SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS AFTER AWARD

09/09

1.1 INTRODUCTION

This section contains information needed after the successful Offeror has been selected. The

information contained in this section applies to the design required for the Full Facility

Restoration of the Army Reserve Center at Fort Sheridan, Illinois.

1.2 DESIGNERS OF RECORD

1.2.1 The Design/Build Contractor shall identify, for Government Acceptance, the Designer of

Record for each area of work. One Designer of Record may be responsible for no more than two

disciplines. All Designers of Record shall be registered Professional Engineers or Architects as

required by Section 00 80 00.00 06, Clause “Registration of Designers”.

1.2.2 In addition to these requirements, the design firm shall have a Design Project Manager

(PM), see Section 01 45 04.10 06 for Design PM qualifications.

1.2.3 Provide the services of a Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) to

design the telecommunications system in compliance with the Army Reserve IT Manual.

1.2.4 Fire protection system Designer of Record is required to be a Registered Fire Protection

Engineer. Designer of Record shall perform preliminary calculations and provide the

requirements for the fire protection system on the contract drawings/specifications. The fire

protection system shop drawings and hydraulic calculations shall be done by a NICET Level III

or IV certified fire protection specialist or a Registered Fire Protection Engineer. Sufficient

hydraulic calculation sets which will fully define the entire system sizing shall be provided.

1.2.5 The Furniture, Finishes and Equipment (FF&E) design shall be developed by the Interior

Designer, who shall be a registered NCIDQ certified designer and have a minimum of two years

experience in space planning, and contract furniture & panel systems specifications.

1.2.6 The D/B Contractor is required to have a LEED Accredited Professional (LEED AP) for

both design and construction involved with the project and responsible for ensuring correct

interpretation of LEED credit requirements, tracking overall LEED accomplishments, providing

documentation, and monitoring construction aspects of each LEED credit.

1.2.7 The Designers of Record shall stamp, sign, and date each design drawing under their

responsible discipline for Certified Final design documentation stage. Designers of Record shall be

a Prime Contractor employee, be contracted directly by the Prime Contractor, or be an employee of



a design firm that is contracted directly by the Prime Contractor. The Designer of Record shall not

be an owner, employee, agent, or consultant of a construction sub-contractor hired for this project.

1.2.8 The designer of the new electrical service and distribution system shall be a registered

Professional Engineer with a minimum of five years of verifiable experience designing mission

critical facilities, at least two of which shall be in compliance with Tier III performance standards as

defined by The Uptime Institute. The cited designs shall incorporate a minimum of 150 kVA of

uninterruptible and generator power. The designer of the new electrical service and distribution

system shall be a registered Professional Engineer with a minimum of five years of verifiable

experience designing mission critical facilities, at least two of which shall be in compliance with

Tier III performance standards as defined by The Uptime Institute. The cited designs shall

incorporate a minimum of 150 kVA of uninterruptible and generator power.

1.2.9 Provide the services of a Registered Roof Observer (RRO) to review the design documents

and observe the installation of the roofing.

1.2.10 Designers of Record are required to make critical site visits during construction. The

Architect shall make at least 4 site visits, Civil Designer shall make at least 2 site visits; the

Structural Designer – 2 visits, Mechanical, Electrical Designers shall make at least 3 site visits; the

Registered Roof Observer shall make daily site visits during the roof installation, and the Fire

Protection and Communication Designers shall make at least 2 site visits.

1.3 CONTRACTOR DESIGN REQUIREMENTS AFTER AWARD

1.3.1 The Contractor must submit for Government Acceptance, a Design Quality Control Plan

as required in Section 01 45 04.10 06, before design may proceed. The Design Quality Control

Plan must indicate the designer’s integral role throughout design and construction. Resumes of

each designer of record shall be included to demonstrate compliance with the RFP requirements.

A list of designers, checkers, and independent reviewers must be included to demonstrate

professional registration and three separate individuals working per discipline.

1.3.2 The Contractor must shall conduct Independent Technical Reviews, in accordance with

requirements in Section 01 45 04.10 06.

1.3.3 After Award, the contractor shall provide the energy conservation strategies considered

through the energy and life cycle cost analyses, and the guidelines of ASHRAE Standard 90.1.

(See Section 01 02 00.00 48, Part 12.)

1.3.4 The Contractor shall design and detail a complete and usable facility before construction

begins. Fast track design and construction will be permitted on this project. Fast-tracking

includes site work, ordering long-lead materials, and mobilization. Fast-tracking is further

discussed in Section 00 80 00.00 06, clause Sequence of Design/Construction (Fast Track). The

Contractor shall design and construct the facility in Imperial (English) units.

1.3.4.1 Fast-track design and construction on this project is limited to sitework, the additions to

the south side of the building and long-lead items. During the fast-track portion of the



construction work, site and building security systems shall be maintained at all times, including

fencing and gates. If Contractor wishes to fast track the Electrical Room addition to the building,

contractor shall propose a strategy to the Government which maintains the security requirements

of the SCIF, for review by the Defense Intelligence Agency. Acceptance of such a proposal is

not guaranteed.

1.3.5 The design shall consist of six submittals, as described in the Army Reserve Design

Process and Submittal Requirements Manual (Attachment in this RFP). These submittals are:

1. the Charrette Design,

2. the Revised Charrette Design,

3. the Interim Design,

4. the Final Design,

5. the Corrected Final Design,

6. and the Certified Final Design.

1.3.6 The Certified Final Design shall be submitted only when ALL review comments have

been addressed, incorporated into the design, and the final design has been accepted, and is ready

for construction. It shall include signatures on each sheet and professional stamps from each

Designer of Record.

1.3.7 The design submittals shall include specifications, drawings, design analysis, CID

(FF&E, SID), permit applications, confirmation notices and submittal registers. The government

will assist the contractor in finalizing the final draft DD1354, however, it is the Contractor's

responsibility to provide. The complete requirements for each submittal are described in the

Army Reserve Design Process and Submittal Requirements Manual- PART C -- Design

Build -- Design Submittal Requirements After Award. This is referred to below as "DPSR

Manual Part C".

1.3.8 The design shall be completed in accordance with the applicable criteria itemized in this

RFP.

1.3.9 A sample design schedule is provided in Section 01 04 00.00 48.

1.3.10 Access to the site and existing building, and particularly the SCIF portion of the building,

is restricted. Should designers require access during the design phase, access shall be coordinated

with the Site Security Officer (SSO), Mr. Golat, a minimum of fourteen days in advance.

Designers visiting the SCIF will require Government escorts which will be arranged by the SSO.

No personal electronic devices, computers, photographic devices, or similar electronic

communication or storage items are allowed in the SCIF. Any photography of the site or existing

building shall be cleared with the SSO.

1.4 SUBMISSION OF DESIGN DOCUMENTS

1.4.1 The Contractor shall submit design documents with cover letter by overnight mail in

accordance with the requirements of this section. The letter shall indicate the project name, and



due date for comments provided in Dr. Checks. All drawings shall be half-size, unless otherwise

noted. Specifications, submittal register, design analysis and other technical information shall be

bound. The CID (FF&E, SID) shall be submitted in separate binders as indicated in the CID

(FF&E, SID) Submittal Requirements attached to this specification.

1.4.2 The Predesign Meeting, Partnering Meetings, the Charrette, and each Design

Review Meeting shall be held at the Reserve Center. The Design Charrette may be held at

the A/E’s office if it is in the project vicinity and the firm’s conference room can

accommodate 40 people. Design review meetings will be held to discuss review comments on

the Charrette, Interim, and Final submittals. The Design Project Manager is responsible for

preparing and distributing meeting minutes for all meetings and conference calls during design.

The meeting minutes will be distributed to the entire project delivery team within 10 days of a

meeting and within 5 days of a conference call.

1.4.3 The Designers of Record are also required to hold individual meetings with the Users on

their respective areas of responsibility. The Architect and Interior Designer shall hold a furniture

meeting with the Users on site after the Charrette. They shall discuss each room and the furniture

requirements involved. The discussions from this meeting shall be reflected in the FF&E and

SID submittals. Meeting minutes will be provided to the entire project delivery team. The

Communication/Electrical Designer is required to hold a separate meeting with the Users and

personnel from the Army Reserve IT office. They shall discuss the IT requirements of the

project. The discussions from this meeting shall be reflected in the Interim Design Submittal.

Meeting minutes will be provided to the entire project delivery team. Any design issues which

arise that are not addressed in the RFP shall be identified to the USACE Project Manager and the

Project Engineer/Architect. A response will be furnished by USACE, and if necessary, a change

order will be issued.

1.4.4 Design Reviews shall not be taken as an approval and do not relieve the Contractor's

responsibility for compliance with the RFP solicitation, codes, regulations, or other applicable

criteria. Design reviews are considered Quality Assurance reviews, and may be performed by the A-

E team which developed the RFP Solicitation package.

1.4.5 Once the Government has reviewed and accepted the contractor's final design, Contractor

shall make no further changes to the accepted design without the written approval of the

Contracting Officer's Representative. All costs for submitted variances, after Final Design

Acceptance, shall be borne by the Contractor at no cost to the Government. For all requested

design changes, complete submittals to all parties listed will be required for an additional review,

in accordance with the procedures for original submittals stated above.

1.5 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

1.5.1 The Contractor is required to independently prepare and submit for Government

Acceptance a complete Design. The Contractor's Design Professionals shall independently

confirm and be responsible for the technical accuracy and adequacy of all aspects of the project

design.



1.5.2 The project design process shall include the submittals listed in paragraph 1.3.

1.5.3 Document quantities and delivery addresses are specified at the end of this Section.

Quantities and addresses apply for each submittal.

1.5.4 CADD Requirements

1.5.4.1 Prepare drawings and as-builts using MicroStation XM.

1.5.4.2 The drawings shall comply with the AEC CAD Standards. The Design Quality

Control Plan shall assure all files appear identical and are error-free. Maintain the use of

referencing, and do not create a single file with all of the graphics for one sheet in one

file.

1.5.4.3 Not Used.

1.5.4.4 Not used.

1.5.4.5 Provide a set of Native CADD files. This set will typically use reference files for

floor plans, borders, etc. Unless specifically approved, all projects must provide for all

files to be placed in one directory. All unnecessary reference files shall be detached, and

all files attached for 'designer information' shall be labeled as such in the description

field. Where a particularly complex project makes managing all CADD files in a single

directory unmanageable, the designer may request permission for use of a more complex

directory structure. The designer shall propose the structure, and identify how each

individual directory will be used. Where this may result in mapping reference files across

directories, the design shall indicate the method for controlling this mapping to prevent

loss of files because of remote attachments. It is mandatory that when such a setup is

used that mapped directory paths not be used for attachments. Variables shall be used so

that project configurations can be created or system variables created for future users to

properly view the files. A description of each variable and mapping shall be provided

with electronic file submittals.

1.5.4.6 Provide in addition a set of drawing files in PDF format that may be viewed

without using CADD software. PDFs shall display for viewing in landscape format.

PDF format drawings files shall include a reference or Table of Contents file, which

indexes all drawings so each drawing may be accessed from the one file. The reference

file shall have bookmarks to each drawings sheet. Drawings shall be to full scale, and

arranged to print to a correct scale, or on 11 by 17 paper.

1.5.4.7 Index: Provide a list of all drawings in the set of project drawings together with

the name of the electronic file that contains the data for each drawing.

1.5.4.8 Submitted hard copy drawings must be plotted directly from the electronic PDF

file.



1.5.5 Specifications and Reports. Provide project specifications in 3-Part CSI format. The

complete specification including title sheet, table of contents, and all specification sections; must

be assembled into a single electronic document in PDF format. Provide reports in Microsoft

Word (version 2000 or later).

1.5.5.1 Provide independent page numbering for each specification section. The page

number shall incorporate the specification section number (e.g. 08 11 13.00 06-1).

1.5.5.2 Submitted hard copy documents must be printed directly from the electronic file.

1.5.5.3 Provide submittal checklist and other report documents also in PDF format.

1.5.5.4 Division 00 and Division 01specifications shall not be edited or reproduced and

shall not be included with the technical specifications. Divisions 00 and 01 are contract

requirements; therefore, can only be changed by contract modification

1.5.6 Electronic Data

1.5.6.1 Electronic data of all design documents must be provided at each submittal stage.

Data shall be on CD ROM.

1.5.6.2 Interior signage is to be provided in Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.

1.5.6.3 Furnishings' data is to be submitted in the Government required USAR

Comprehensive Interior Design Furniture Access Program.

1.5.7 Submittal Register: The contractor will be required to prepare a Submittal Register

Engineering Form 4288 identifying all construction submittals. Each submittal item shall be

identified and coded in accordance with Section 01 33 00. A completed Engineering Form 4288,

accepted by the Contracting Officer, will be required prior to commencement of construction.

The designers are required to provide a Submittal Register that is compatible with Construction

Division's QCS system.

1.5.8 LEED Project Requirements:

1.5.8.1 LEED Project Registration. All projects are required to be registered with the

United States Green Building Counsel (USGBC), and the Government has obtained the

registration. After contract award, the LEED registration will be transferred to the

Contractor. The Contractor’s Designer of Record (DOR) shall utilize the online LEED

Letter Templates and develop the LEED Project Checklist for project documentation.

The DOR shall provide additional documentation required by the LEED 3.0

Documentation Requirements and Submittal Checklist attached to Section 01 33 29.10

06. The additional documentation shall be uploaded in LEED Online with the applicable

LEED Letter Templates. The DOR shall maintain the Project Administrator Role

throughout project design and construction.



1.5.8.2 LEED Accredited Professional. A LEED Accredited Professional shall be

required on the project team, and will ensure project design is in compliance with

USGBC LEED requirements for the project, and be involved in the project throughout

design and construction.

1.5.8.3 The DOR is responsible for editing and including LEED Documentation required

by Section 01 33 29.10 06 in the design submittals. This will include a completed LEED

Project Checklist, and Appendix B – LEED 2.2 Documentation Requirements (available

at http://en.sas.usace.army.mil ). The DOR will be involved in any changes to the LEED

Project Checklist during the construction.

1.5.8.4 Project designs (including multiple building projects and renovations) shall meet

USACE Army LEED Implementation Guide paragraphs 1-4, 6, and 8. USACE Army

LEED Implementation Guide

https://eko.usace.army.mil/_kd/go.cfm?destination=ShowItem&Item_ID=47308.

1.5.8.5 Meetings: The following meetings will be held to ensure LEED Compliance:

The Preconstruction Meeting (possibly discussed at the Partnering meeting instead)

The Implementation Plan Meeting

The Precloseout (Redzone) Meeting

The LEED Validation Meeting

1.5.8.6 At the Precon (or Partnering) Meeting, the DOR and LEED AP will provide a

presentation to the Corps, Contractor, and Users about the requirements of the LEED

Documentation Specification, and review the LEED Project Checklist the contractor is

required to follow.

1.5.8.7 At the Implementation Plan Meeting, the Corps, Contractor and LEED AP shall

meet to discuss the content of the Plan, to ensure compliance with the LEED

requirements. The DOR shall participate by conference call.

1.5.8.8 At the Precloseout (Redzone) Meeting, all LEED credits and the LEED rating

shall be discussed, and establish a plan to meet the final remaining credits. The DOR

(PM and Architect) and AE LEED AP shall attend.

1.5.8.9 At the LEED Validation Meeting, the Corps, Contractor, and LEED AP shall

meet to discuss any remaining LEED credits.

1.5.9 LEED/Energy Requirements: LEED NC (New Construction)Version 3.0: The LEED

Minimum Energy performance prerequisite is met when the minimum requirements of ASHRAE

90.1 are met. Therefore, meeting the Energy Policy Act 2005 requirements automatically causes

the LEED prerequisite to be met. The analysis used to meet the requirements for the Energy

Policy Act 2005 may be used to satisfy the requirements for LEED Optimize Energy Performance

credit. For compliance with the Energy Policy Act 2005, the percent energy reduction shall be

calculated by subtracting the process and plug loads from the total energy usages for both the

baseline and proposed buildings. The formula shall be as follows: (Baseline energy usage –

http://en.sas.usace.army.mil/

https://eko.usace.army.mil/_kd/go.cfm?destination=ShowItem&Item_ID=47308



Proposed energy usage)/(Baseline energy usage – (process + plug loads)). For determining

LEED Optimize Energy Performance credit points, the percent energy reduction shall be

calculated by applying the appropriate energy costs to the total energy usage for both the baseline

and proposed buildings. The formula shall be as follows: (Baseline energy cost – Proposed

energy cost)/(Baseline energy cost).

1.5.9.1 Summary Analysis: Provide a summary of the Energy Conservation analysis.

The summary shall include the completed LEED Letter Template for LEED Optimize

Energy Performance credit.

1.6 ADDITIONAL DESIGN AND INVESTIGATION REQUIREMENTS

1.6.1 Geotechnical Requirements and Responsibilities

1.6.1.1 The Contractor’s team shall include a licensed professional geotechnical engineer

to interpret the subsurface conditions and develop earthwork and foundation requirements

and design parameters on which to base the Contractor’s proposal. Subsequent to award,

the Contractor is required to perform and provide a complete geotechnical exploration of

the proposed site to develop the final design.

1.6.1.2 The geotechnical exploration shall be performed under the direction of a licensed

professional engineer with at least 10 years experience specializing in geotechnical

engineering. This exploration shall be the full responsibility of the Contractor and

detailed requirements are outlined below. It is possible that site specific subsurface

conditions encountered by the Contractor will differ from those appended herein.

Therefore, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to conduct a meeting with the COR

subsequent to completion and evaluation of his site specific geotechnical exploration to

enumerate any differences encountered that are not consistent with the information

provided herein. Should those differences require changes in the foundation type,

pavement and earthwork requirements proposed with the bid that result in more cost,

those changes shall be clearly outlined for the meeting.

1.6.1.3 Geotechnical Report – General - The Contractor’s geotechnical report shall

summarize the subsurface conditions and provide requirements for the design of

appropriate foundations, floor slabs, retaining walls, embankments, and pavements. The

report shall recommend the type of foundation system to be used, lateral load resistance

capacities for foundation systems, allowable bearing elevations for footings, grade

beams, slabs, etc. An assessment of post-construction settlement potential including total

and differential shall be provided. Recommendations regarding lateral earth pressures

(active, at-rest, passive) to be used in the design of retaining walls shall be provided. The

report shall include the recommended spectral accelerations and Site Class for seismic

design along with an evaluation of any seismic hazards and requirements for mitigation,

if necessary. Calculations shall be included to support the recommendations for bearing

capacity, settlement, and pavement sections. Supporting documentation shall be included

for all design parameters such as Site Class, shear strength, earth pressure coefficients,

friction factors, subgrade modulus, California Bearing Ratio (CBR), and pH tests, salinity

tests, resistivity measurements, etc., required to design corrosion control and grounding



systems. In addition, the report shall provide earthwork requirements, expected frost

penetration, expected groundwater levels, requirements for dewatering and groundwater

control, possible presence of any surface or subsurface features that may affect the

construction of the project such as sinkholes, boulders, shallow rock, old fill, old

structures, soft areas, or unusual soil conditions. Information shall be offered on the types

of base course materials available in the area and design strengths. Also, the Contractor's

geotechnical engineer shall recommend designs to account for site specific soil

conditions including, but not limited to: expansive soils, shrinking soils, sinkholes,

variable groundwater, seismic activity, and chemically or radiologically active soils.

1.6.1.3.1 The final geotechnical evaluation report shall be prepared by the

Contractor’s licensed geotechnical engineer and submitted along with the first

foundation design submittal. Requirements for the report are noted in Part 3 of

Section 01 02 00.00 48. If fast track design is used, the geotechnical report shall

be submitted as part of the first fast track submittal.

1.6.1.3.2 Certification: The Contractor and its professional geotechnical

engineer consultant shall certify in writing that the design of the project has been

developed consistent with the Contractor’s final geotechnical report. The

certification shall be stamped by the consulting professional geotechnical

engineer and shall be submitted with the first design submission. If revisions are

made to the initial design submission, a new certification shall be provided with

the final design submission.

1.6.1.4 Geotechnical Report – Refer to RFP specification Section 01 02 00.00 48

paragraph 3.5.

1.6.2 Roof Design Requirements Not Used.

1.6.3 Lighting design - Provide emergency/egress lighting calcs which indicate minimum,

average, and uniformity values for all applicable areas, to assure compliance with NFPA 101.

1.6.4 Exterior Wall Design

1.6.4.1 Exterior masonry veneer walls shall have corrugated weeps installed directly

above base flashing and at the top exterior course to allow thermal venting. Exterior

cavity walls shall have through-wall flashing installed at all rake to high wall

intersections.

1.6.5 Energy Conservation Submittals – Refer to RFP Specification Section 01 02 00.00 48

Part 12.

1.7 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

1.7.1 Design Phase: All design submission requirements are defined in the Army Reserve

Design Process and Submittal Requirements Manual, PART C -- Design Build -- Design



Submittal Requirements After Award. This is referred to below as "DPSR Manual Part C".

Each discipline is provided the requirements for the Charrette, Interim, Final, Corrected Final

Design, and Certified Final Design Submittals. All aspects will be followed. Design the project

in MicroStation matching the version of the project CD provided by the government. If no CD is

provided, use the latest version of MicroStation.

1.7.2 The Pre-Work (Pre-Design) Meeting is an opportunity for the Government Project

Engineer/Architect and the D/B Work design team to review the project requirements. A review

of Sections 01 02 00. 00 48, 01 03 00.00 48, and 01 04 00.00 48 would assure the designers

understand the requirements and expectations of the design process. This is also an opportunity

for the contractor, Corps construction personnel, and the Project Manager to meet and go over

project requirements. The design schedule should be discussed and the first few meeting dates

need to be established.

1.7.3 The Charrette Design is defined in DPSR Manual Part C. The deliverables for this

phase are also described in the Manual, and also include a Design Analysis. The Charrette

is an opportunity to improve the design proposal documents at no increased cost. There are

areas in the building that could be rotated/shifted/move walls, which would greatly improve

the functionality of the facility. The designer should provide attention to detail regarding

the building entrance, lobby, restrooms, and command suite(s).

Capture the outcome of the Charrette Meeting in a Charrette Report

consisting of minutes, revised drawings, and updated narrative and submit

for the record in the time frame called for in the schedule.

A conference call will be scheduled approximately five days after the

Charrette Report to discuss the Report. A direction to proceed with

subsequent design based on the agreed charrette report will be provided after

the conference call.

Provide a Revised Charrette Document to all parties.

The decisions from the Revised Charrette Conference Call will be

incorporated into the Interim Design Submittal.

The Army Reserve Design Process and Submittal Requirements Manual Part C is

on the Louisville District web site at

http://www.lrl.usace.army.mil/ed2/article.asp?id=243&MyCategory=212

The Army Reserve Customers page is also on the Louisville District website.

http://www.lrl.usace.army.mil/ed2/default.asp?mycategory=212

1.7.4 The Interim Design Phases is defined in the DPSR Manual Part C. The deliverables for

this phase are also described in the Manual. This submittal shall incorporate the review

comments from the charrette design phase. Interim Design Phase will include:

Interim ("50%") Design for architecture, structural, interior design, civil,

mechanical and electrical systems.

http://www.lrl.usace.army.mil/ed2/article.asp?id=243&MyCategory=212

http://www.lrl.usace.army.mil/ed2/default.asp?mycategory=212



For projects employing fast-track provide (100%) design for building site

design to include: building/area site layout, final grade elevations, site

electrical, mechanical and civil utilities, permits,

Design Analyses

Provide a list of required permits for the project; including requirements and

process for obtaining each permit, associated costs, and status of permit

acquisition.

1.7.5 Final Design Phase

1.7.5.1 The Final Design Phases is defined in the DPSR Manual Part C. The

deliverables for this phase are also described in the Manual. This submittal shall

designate what equipment manufacturers the contractor plans to use for all pieces of

equipment. This submittal shall incorporate the review comments from the Interim

Design phase.

1.7.5.2 The Final Design Phase will include:

Corrected Final (100%) Design for building site design to include:

building/area site layout, final grade elevations, utility locations, revised

complex entrance, parking, and associated roadways.

Final (100%) Design for all remaining architecture, structural, interior

design, civil, mechanical and electrical systems.

Provide a list of required permits for the project; including requirements and

process for obtaining each permit, associated costs, and status of permit

acquisition.

1.7.6 The Corrected Final Design Phase is defined in the DPSR Manual Part C, The

deliverables for this phase are also described in the Manual. This submittal shall incorporate

the review comments from the Final Design phase.

1.7.6.1 For the "Civil/Site Work" Corrected Final: The designer is responsible to

respond to all comments and incorporate all appropriate comments (as determined by the

LRL Project Engineer), generated as a result of the final review meeting. As part of the

Backcheck, the designer shall mark three sets in red, with the reviewer's name and

comment number, indicating the corrections have been made as a result of the review

comment. The Louisville District Office, the RFP preparer/reviewer, and the

Construction Resident Office will perform a backcheck of comments on these red-lined

sets. Once all comments are satisfactorily resolved, the Certified Final Design may be

distributed.

1.7.6.2 The Corrected Final design phase will include:



Corrected Final (100%) Design for all remaining architecture, structural, interior

design, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

1.7.6.3 The Corrected Final Design Phase is defined in the DPSR Manual Part C. The

deliverables for this phase are also described in the Manual. This shall be considered

a formal submittal to reviewers. This submittal shall incorporate the review comments in

the submittal and become the final product for construction.

1.7.7 Certified Final - For the "Building" Certified Final: The designer is responsible to

respond to all comments and incorporate all appropriate comments (as determined by the LRL

Project Engineer), generated as a result of the final review meeting. As part of the Backcheck,

the designer shall mark three sets in red, with the reviewer's name and comment number,

indicating the corrections have been made as a result of the review comment. The Louisville

District Office, the RFP preparer, and the Construction Resident Office will perform a backcheck

of comments on these red-lined sets. Once all comments are satisfactorily resolved, the Certified

Final Design may be distributed. If the project has been reviewed by an A-E firm (normally the

A-E firm which developed the RFP), then the designer shall provide a copy of each reviewer's

backcheck corrected final drawings and specifications, demonstrating the comments have been

incorporated. This can be accomplished in hard copy or on CD with PDF files of the changes.

1.7.8 Comprehensive Interior Design (CID) Submittals – CID is defined in the DPSR Manual

Part C, The deliverables are also described in the Manual.

1.7.8.1 See Attachment A following this specification section for specific furniture

product specifications.

1.7.8.2 Note: The furniture will be GFGI (government furnished-government

installed). The contractor will be responsible for all power, data, and voice

hookups.

1.7.8.3 The furniture layouts provided in the RFP are notional layouts. A complete

FF&E and SID are required as part of the design. It is required for the Interior Designer

and the Architect to hold a separate meeting with the Users to determine actual furniture

requirements. It is recommended that the selected Contractor's Interior Designer contact

Barbara Pfister (502-315-6899) of the Louisville Corps of Engineers, after contract award

but prior to beginning development of the FF&E, to coordinate FF&E submission

requirements. Past performance illustrates such coordination will minimize Contractor

effort required to develop the FF&E.

1.7.8.4 The Interior Designer will be required to make minor changes to the FF&E

around six months before furniture procurement, so Barbara Pfister has accurate and

current information. Any problems with the furniture layouts (placement in front of

windows, panel sizes, etc.) will be corrected at this time before the furniture order is

placed. The interior designer will provide 4 sets of any corrections.

1.8 DESIGN REVIEW



1.8.1 Government review comments will be input into a web based system called DR

CHECKS. The Contractor will be given access to this system and will be required to respond to

all comments in the program. Comment responses shall be entered before each review meeting,

so the Project Team can discuss open issues and non-concur comments – not each individual

comment. The Contractor shall print and distribute review sets as shown on the attached list and

be prepared to discuss the comments and preliminary responses at the review meeting for each

part of the design. The Contractor will keep the minutes of the meetings and forward the minutes

and annotated comments to all reviewers within 14 days of the meeting. The annotations will be

detailed enough to indicate exactly what the Contractor will do to comply with the comments.

The contractor shall assemble the comments received into a complete package. The complete

package of comments and responses shall be transmitted to all offices that received the design

submitted.

1.8.1.1 The Government's review is not to be considered a quality control review; the

contractor shall provide his own internal quality control as required by contractor Design

Quality Controls Plan before the design is submitted to the Government. It is very

important the Contractor's entire team agrees with the design before it is submitted to the

Government. The Government's review or acceptance does not relieve the contractor of

his responsibility to provide a safe, functional project in accordance with the terms of the

contract. All final drawings shall be signed and sealed by the Design Professional.

Quality control procedures shall consist of design and/or checking by registered

professionals and a review completed by a separate professional. Complete names of

designers, checkers, and reviewers shall appear in the drawing title block. The

Contractor shall submit the Design Quality Checklist from the Louisville District AE

Design Guide with their Final Design Phase submissions.

1.8.1.2 The Government's review will likely result in a significant number of comments.

The Contractor shall respond to each comment with a response that clearly indicates what

action will be taken in Dr. Checks. Comments that, in the Contractor's opinion, require

effort outside the scope of the contract will be clearly indicated as such by the Contractor.

The Contractor shall not proceed with work outside the contract until a modification to

the contract is properly executed.

1.8.1.3 The Defense Intelligence Agency (DIA) must review and approve the

Corrected Final Design documents; their review will be coordinated by Mr. Lance

Golat. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the DIA address from

Mr. Golat, and sending one or more of Mr. Golat’s review sets to DIA.

1.9 CONSTRUCTION PHASE

1.9.1 The construction phase will begin with a Letter of Design Completion, and release for

construction will be issued upon completion and acceptance of the corrected final design

submittal. This will provide authorization begin onsite construction efforts.

1.9.2 The first item of work during the construction phase, the Contractor shall furnish to the

Government 15 half-size sets and 5 full size sets of the certified final drawings, 15 sets of the

accepted specifications, and 20 CDs for its use during construction. The PE/A will finalize this

list and provide the actual list of personnel to receive this material when it is time to be

reproduced. The Construction CD's will include 5 file folders – one folder containing native



MicroStation drawing files, one folder containing native specification section files, one folder

containing PDF drawing files, one folder containing one large PDF file of the specifications, and

one folder containing one large PDF file of the Design Analysis.

1.9.3 No construction will be allowed on work for which the design has not been reviewed and

accepted.



LIST OF ADDRESSES FOR REVIEWS

ORGANIZATION ABBREVIATION COPIES

(1) FF&E SID

Army Corps of Engr, Louisville

ATTN: Spencer Pifer, ED-MR

600 Dr. M. L. King Jr. Place

Louisville, KY 40202

CELRL-ED-MR 6 1 – 2

at cert

final

1 - 2 at

cert

final

ACSIM-AR

ATTN: Walter Kilmer

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

DAIM-ODR (TB3E22)

2530 CRYSTAL DRIVE

ARLINGTON, VA 22202

ACSIM-AR 1

CD

only

0 0

Al Frye or Lyle Bonham

(address provided by Project Engineer

After award)

ACSIM-AR 1

CD

only

0 0

88th RSC

NAME:

88th RSC DPW,

ATTN: Scott Naeseth, General Engineer

MAILING ADDRESS: 60 South O Street

Fort McCoy, WI 54656 (to be verified after

award)

88th RSC 4 1 1

NAME: Lance

Golat______________________

ORGANIZATION: ARISC

MAILING ADDRESS: to be verified after

award

Ft. Sheridan, IL

______________________________

Unit(s) 4 1 1

U.S. Army Corps of Engineers

Resident Office

ATTN: CELRL-CD-I, Don Peterson

MAILING ADDRESS:

COE IL Resident Office

Rock Island Arsenal

Clock Tower Building

Rock Island, IL 61204

Unit(s) 3 1 1

_______________________________

Name: Brian Saintonge CE-___________ 2 0 0



POSITION: Const District PM

ORGANIZATION:


award

Chicago, IL

RFP Preparer performing Compliance

Review

ORGANIZATION:

MAILING ADDRESS: ____________

________________________________

A/E Firm

8

1

1

NAME: Bill Walters, 88th Facility

Operation Specialist

ORGANIZATION: 88th RSC


award, Ft. Sheridan, IL

Installation 4

0 0

NAME: Lisa Gulbranson

POSITION: Environmental Specialist

ORGANIZATION: 88th RSC

(Address to be provided by Project/Engineer

after award), Minneapolis, MN

88th RSC 1

CD

only

0 0

NAME:

ORGANIZATION: U.S. Army Reserve

Command

ATTN: _______, G2/G6 Office

1401 Deshler Street SW

Fort McPherson, GA 30330-2000

______________________________

G6 1

0 0

NAME: George Gaffney

ORGANIZATION: U.S. Army Information

Systems Engineering Command

Fort Detrick Engineering Directorate

ATTN: AMSEL-IE-DE-IN-CO

(GAFFNEY)

1435 Porter Street, Suite 200

Fort Detrick, MD 21702-5047

ISEC 1

0 0

1. All addressees shall receive the following documents:

Charrette Design Submittal, Revised Charrette Documents (drawings only), Interim Design

Submittal, and Final Design Submittal. All document sets shall be printed plans, specifications,

and design analyses; and electronic files of the complete submittal also provided on CD in the

quantity identified. Each document set shall include



(a) A CD with all design files. (Specs in one PDF file, DA in one PDF file, and drawings

in a third file in full-size PDF format). The beginning of each section of the DA shall be

bookmarked. The start of each spec section shall be bookmarked. Each drawing sheet shall be

bookmarked.

(b) Printed half size plans.

(c) For Corrected Final Design submittal, Mr. Golat shall also be provided 4 hard copies

each of the DA and Specs

2. The original certified final will be submitted to Louisville District, with signatures and stamps,

as required. Copies as indicated in Part 3 paragraph "SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS" ,

subparagraph "Construction Phase" above will be distributed to the government design team and

field office, by overnight mail.



Project:

For Design/Build Projects

Final Design and Certified Final Design Checklist

(Edit as needed)

1. GENERAL:

a. Have all documents been prepared in accordance with the Design QC Plan?

b. Have drawings and specifications been coordinated between engineering

disciplines?

c. Have drawings and specifications been checked; and have drawings been initialed

by reviewer and designer?

d. Have drawings and specifications been reviewed by a qualified engineer to assure

fire protection engineering is in conformance with applicable portions of NFPA

regulations and national, state, and local building codes?

e. Are drawings, design analyses, etc., signed and dated?

f. Are Government review comments on the charrette and interim design submittals

annotated and incorporated into final drawings and specifications?

g. Are annotated review comments included in each design analysis package

h. ITR certification sheets signed and included?

i. Have the energy conservation strategies considered through the energy and life

cycle cost analyses been provided in the design analysis (spec 010300.0048, par.

3.1.3)? (Applies to building design only)

2. DRAWINGS:

a. Has CADD quality been checked to assure legible reproduction?

b. Does location plan include location of borrow pits, disposal areas, areas for

contractor's office and storage, haul routes, location of Resident/Area Engineer and

DEH office?

c. Have signature blocks been properly prepared?

d. Has Quality Control Procedures been performed to assure that translated files are

fully useable, complete and represent the design

3. SPECIFICATIONS:

a. Were latest guide specifications used?

b. Are specifications prepared in accordance with the RFP?



c. Name of person supervising specifications preparation:

____________________________________

4. MISCELLANEOUS:

a. Have construction permits been applied for as required by the Clean Air Act and

Clean Water Act Amendments?

b. Has the Certified Final submittal been made in accordance with every requirement

of the RFP?

(If not, explain deviations on a separate sheet attached to this form.)

c. Has the CID/SID been completed? Were full size drawings and the required

native CADD files provided with the binders? (Applies to building design only)

_______________________________

SIGNATURE AND DATE



ATTACHMENT A

COMPREHENSIVE INTERIOR DESIGN (CID)

FURNITURE, FIXTURES & EQUIPMENT (FF&E)

14 NOVEMBER 2008

FURNITURE PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

All furniture is Government Furnished, Government Installed (GFGI) for the Army

Reserve projects. At the beginning of the project, the main furniture manufacturer is

determined to establish quality, color and product information to coordinate with all

disciplines concerning furniture layout and power/data hook-ups. The project panel

system workstations, and private and shared office metal desking units are designed

according to FPI/UNICOR or Knoll, Incorporated with specific product specifications

listed below. Refer to PART 6 Architectural and Interior Design, 6.6 Furniture and

Equipment for specific manufacturer to be specified for this project. Louisville District

performs the furniture market research for all furniture procured through the Louisville

District at the time of the furniture procurement.

1. FPI/UNICOR Designated Furniture Project

The following guidance is being provided for projects being designed for procurement

from FPI/UNICOR. It is not necessary that the Designer of record specify a complete

Bill of Material for the UNICOR Classic XXI Systems or the Bravo metal desking units.

The Designer is responsible for the fit of furniture, life safety, selection of all finishes and

fabrics, panel and componentry sizes, power/data locations, and panel location

dimensions. No COM fabric is to be specified.

a. UNICOR Classic XXI 8-Wire Systems furniture will be specified for all Unit

Common office areas. Specifying only circuits 1, 2 and 3.

All systems furniture workstations are to be panel hung in lieu of

wall hung.

Extended Raceway Acoustical Panels (ERP) are to be specified for

all applications.

Lateral and vertical files, bookcases, and storage cabinets are to be

specified from the UNICOR Opus catalog.

Unit Common area part-time workstation typical panel heights are to

be 36" high except along the spine where the tackboard is placed the

panel height should be 52" high. All full-time workstation typical

panel heights are to be 66” high.

Three duplex outlets per part-time workstation and four duplex

outlets per full-time workstation.



b. UNICOR Bravo metal desking furniture will be used for private and shared

offices, including matching Opus bookcases, lateral files and storage cabinets.

Specify the "D" top for all "U" shaped Bravo metal desking units with keyboard,

center drawer, overheads, shelf dividers, and electronic ballast tasklight. Specify

full modesty panels for all "L" shaped Bravo metal desking units when the desk

unit is not placed against the wall. Privacy screens/tackboards are to be specified

to fill the space between the desk top and the overhead only. Lateral and vertical

files, bookcases, wardrobes and storage cabinets are to be specified from the

UNICOR Opus catalog.

c. Specify the 18" deep bookcase when placed next to any lateral files in private

and shared offices, and in the open offices areas with panel systems if bookcases

are required, 15" deep bookcases may be specified when used in stand alone

areas.

d. UNICOR Legacy I task chairs, mid and high backs, and the Chorale sled base

with flared arms side chairs will be the standard office seating products. The

UNICOR Minuet series is to be specified for sofas and lounge seating. No COM

fabrics are to be specified. Task chair upholstery selections shall have a

minimum Wyzenbeck rating of 100,000 double rubs.

2. KNOLL Designated Furniture Project

The following guidance is being provided for projects being designed for procurement

from Knoll. It is not necessary that the Designer of record specify a complete Bill of

Material for the Knoll Morrison Panel Systems or the Morrison Network metal desking

units. The Designer is responsible for the fit of furniture, life safety, selection of all

finishes and fabrics, panel and componentry sizes, power/data locations, and panel

location dimensions. No COM fabric is to be specified.

a. Knoll Morrison 3+3 ten-wire Systems furniture will be specified for all Unit

Commons office areas. Specifying only circuits A, B and C.

All systems furniture workstations are to be panel hung in lieu of

wall hung.

Lateral and vertical files, bookcases, and storage cabinets are to be

specified from the Calibre catalog.

Unit Common area workstation typical panel heights are to be 30"

high except along the spine where the tackboard is placed the panel

height should be 48" high. All full-time workstation typical panel

heights are to be 64” high.

Three duplex outlets per part-time workstation and four duplex

outlets per full-time workstation.

b. Knoll Morrison Network metal desking furniture will be used for private and

shared offices, including matching Calibre bookcases, lateral files and storage

cabinets. Specify the "D" top for all "U" shaped Network metal desking units



with keyboard, center drawer, overheads, shelf dividers, and electronic ballast

tasklight. Specify full modesty panels for all "L" shaped Network metal desking

units when the desk unit is not placed against the wall. Privacy

screens/tackboards are to be specified to fill the space between the desk top and

the Reuter overhead only. Calibre lateral files, bookcases, storage cabinets and

wardrobe units should be specified with metallic paint finish.

c. Specify the 18" deep bookcase when placed next to any lateral files in private

and shared offices, and in the open offices areas with panel systems if bookcases

are required. Calibre 15" deep bookcases may be specified when used in stand

alone areas.

d. UNICOR Legacy I task chairs, mid and high backs, and the Chorale sled base

with flared arms side chairs will be the standard office seating products. The

UNICOR Minuet series is to be specified for sofas and lounge seating. No COM

fabrics are to be specified.

3. General Electrical/Communication Installation for Panel Systems Furniture

Workstations

Panel system furniture workstations in common office areas shall have all power and

communications outlets located in the base of the acoustic panels. All electrical and

communications utilities are to be fed from either flush floor boxes, poke through boxes

or wall boxes with the exception of renovation projects that may be fed from overhead

(power poles). The communications cables shall be fed in conduit and boxes separate

from electrical power.

a. Electrical Requirements

A minimum of one twenty amp circuit is to be provided for every

two panel system furniture workstations.

A maximum of three twenty amp circuits are to be provided for each

panel system furniture electrical infeed.

A multi-pole breaker shall be utilized to protect all circuits supplying

power to each individual infeed. This will insure that all circuits are

de-energized when servicing the electrical system components within

the panel system furniture workstations.

A 5-wire electrical system using a three pole/20 amp circuit breaker,

3-#12 AWG wires (L1-L2-L3), 1-#10 AWG neutral wire and 1-12

AWG ground wire shall be specified for the typical six workstation

cluster. Single pole and two pole circuit breakers are to be specified

for two workstation and four workstation clusters respectively. Wire

sizes are minimum requirements, but may be increased as necessary

to compensate for voltage drop.

Power is to be fed from a dedicated electric panel supplied by a clean

power “K” rated transformer of adequate size for the anticipated

harmonic load.



The designer is to specify three duplex receptacles for each part-time

workstation and four duplex receptacles for each full-time

workstation. Receptacles shall not be located behind drawer

pedestals.

Base feeds are to be used to power all panel system furniture

workstations in new construction. Top feeds (power poles) may be

used on renovation projects for workstations that cannot be fed from

junction boxes located in walls or columns.

The general contractor is to cut the Government furnished electrical

base feed whip to the appropriate length and connect to the building's

power per the furniture manufacturer's wiring schematic. (Knoll

Morrison circuits A, B and C. UNICOR/FPI Classic XXI and

Kimball Cetra circuits 1, 2 and 3.) The general contractor is to

provide liquid-tight flexible metal conduit fittings, electrical

connectors and cover plate necessary to complete the connection to

the power source.

All panel system furniture electrical components installed as part of

the Government Furnished Government Installed (GFGI) furniture

package include; power infeeds and rails, connectors, jumpers,

receptacles and raceway covers.

b. Communications Requirements

The general contractor shall provide, terminate and test all telephone

and data cables within the raceways provided at the base of the panel

system furniture acoustic panels.

The general contractor shall provide a minimum of one 1-1/4”

conduit from the floor or wall box to an accessible ceiling space

adjacent to the communications cable tray for each group of up to six

workstations.

The general contractor is to provide 1-1/4” liquid-tight flexible metal

conduit and fittings necessary to connect each floor box or wall box

to the acoustic panel raceway

One RJ-45 telephone jack and one RJ-45 data jack are to be provided

for each panel system furniture workstation.

The general contractor shall provide and install all conduit, fittings,

cables, faceplates and jacks necessary to complete the

communications system installation within the panel system furniture

workstations. Upon completion of the communications system

installation, all cable, connections and jacks are to be tested and, if

necessary, repaired to assure satisfactory service to the customer.

The Government Furnished Government Installed (GFGI) furniture

package will only provide communication raceways at the base of

each acoustic panel for routing communications cables and raceway

covers to accept communication jacks and faceplates furnished by

the general contractor.



Connection Photos

4. Miscellaneous Furniture Products

Manufacturers referenced below are intended to establish quality, color and

finish only, and are not intended to limit selections from other manufacturers.

a. Display cases – Peter Pepper Products

b. Lecterns – Peter Pepper Products

c. Audiovisual carts and cabinets - Bretford Manufacturing

d. Computer and printer stands – Bretford Manufacturing

e. Various magazine and pamphlet racks - Peter Pepper Products

f. Mobile folding cafeteria tables – KI Uniframe Tables

g. Training/Conference tables – KI Furniture Barron Lightweight Folding Tables

h. Workbenches - Lyon Workspace Products

i. Drawing tables and plan files - Mayline Company

j. Wood Traditional Commander's Furniture – Kimball President Series, Muirfield

Desk Chair, Collage Guest Chair, Stature Conference Room Chair

k. Trash Receptacles - Rubbermaid

l. Plastic Stack Chair - American Seating Acton Stacker Plastic Shell with arms in

Break Rooms and Assembly, if chairs are required. American Seating Acton

Stacker Upholstered Plastic Shell with arms in Classrooms and Training Rooms.

Classroom and Training Room chair upholstery selections shall have a minimum

Wyzenbeck rating of 100,000 double rubs.



m. Treadmill, Elliptical Crosstrainer, Stair Climber, Recumbent Cycle – Precor

USA, Inc

n. Multi-Station Gym, Benches, Racks w/Dumbbells, Power Cage – Cybex

International, Inc

o. Gym Floor Mats – FlagHouse, Inc

If any additional information or assistance is required regarding the specification of the furniture

for the Army Reserve program, please contact Barbara Pfister @ 502-315-6899 or Bob Harris @

502-315-6850.


01 04 00.00 48 - 1 of 4

SECTION 01 04 00.00 48

THE DESIGN/BUILD PROCESS

09/09

1.1 DESIGN/BUILD (DB) PROCESS The facility shall be designed and built by a single firm or team of firms (referred to as the Contractor or Design-Build Contractor) that has registered Architects and Engineers employed by or subcontracted to their organization.

1.2 PROPOSAL PHASE The Proposal Phase includes the period from the time of issuance of the Request for Proposal (RFP) through the selection process and the final award of the contract to the successful Offeror. Schedules below begin at the point of contract award.

1.3 DESIGN PHASE During the Design Phase, the Contractor shall develop and submit for review and acceptance the Charette, Revised Charrette Document, Interim, Final, Corrected Final, and Certified Final Design Submittals. Once the Certified Final has been received and accepted by the Government for the civil/site work portion of the project, the Contractor will be given acceptance to start construction on the civil/site work to fast-track construction. See Clause “Sequence of Design/Construction (Fast Track)” in Section 00 80 00.00 06, Special Clauses.

1.4 CONSTRUCTION PHASE A letter of authorization will initiate the Construction Phase, which should normally occur within two weeks of Design Phase acceptance. With the correct documentation in place, the Contractor may be released for demolition (if any) before the fast-track certified drawing submittal is completed.


01 04 00.00 48 - 2 of 4

1.5 SAMPLE DESIGN PHASE SCHEDULE The sample schedule and sequence of work shown below was prepared by the Government for the Contractor‟s use in its schedule preparation. The schedule demonstrates a satisfactory two step fast tracked approach. This schedule is not intended to be the actual awarded design-build schedule. Upon receipt of the Notice to Proceed, the selected Contractor will be required to submit its proposed design and construction schedule in accordance with Section 01 32 01.00 06, Project Schedule, based on their resources and approach for this project. Government performance and review periods can not be reduced from those noted below in the Contractor‟s proposed schedule which will be submitted for government review and acceptance. A Pre-work Conference is required for this contract, see Clause “Design Conferences” in Section 00 80 00.00 06, Special Clauses. The Defense Intelligence Agency (DIA) must review and approve the Corrected Final Design documents. The Contractor‟s schedule shall provide a minimum of 45 days for DIA review and comment.

SAMPLE PROJECT DESIGN SCHEDULE FOR 490 DAY CONTRACT DURATION

PROJECT SCHEDULE: Duration Calendar Days

Notice to Proceed Approx 30 days

after Award

Design Quality Control Plan submitted 10 10 days after NTP

Pre-Work Conference, 2 days 10 10 days from NTP

Charette Design Submittal Due 10 20 days from NTP

2 to 3-Day Charette Meeting 05 25 days from NTP

Revised Charette Design Submittal Due 10 35 days from NTP

Revised Charette Design Conference Call 05 40 days from NTP

Interim & Fast Track Design Submittal 28 68 days from NTP

Interim & Fast Track Review Meeting 14 82 days from NTP (2-day meeting, with Partnering) Red-Lined Corrected Final for

Fast Track Design Due 14 96 days from NTP


01 04 00.00 48 - 3 of 4

Corps performs Backcheck on Fast-Track 14 110 days from NTP

A/E makes final Fast Track corrections &

All Dr. Checks comments closed 07 117 days from NTP A/E submits signed & sealed Fast Track Hard Copy

Plans & Specs – Ready for Construction 07 124 days from NTP

Corps Construction Office sends letter 05 129 days from NTP for Fast-Track Release for Construction

Final Design Submittal Due

(60 days from Interim Review Meeting) 60 142 days from NTP

Final Design Submittal Review Meeting 25 167 days from NTP (one day meeting)

Red-Lined Corrected Final for

Final Design Due 15 182 days from NTP

Corps performs Backcheck on Final 15 197 days from NTP

A/E makes final corrections &

All Dr. Checks comments closed 10 207 days from NTP A/E submits signed & sealed Certified Final Hard Copy

Plans & Specs – Ready for Construction 08 215 days from NTP

Corps Construction Office sends letter 05 220 days from NTP for Final Design release for construction Construction Completion **See Section 00 80 00.00 06

SPECIAL CLAUSES


01 04 00.00 48 - 4 of 4

All days are in calendar days. The Design Charette may be held at the A/E„s office, if the firm can accommodate 40 people. Otherwise, it shall be held at the Project Location or Facility. All other design review meetings, conferences, and partnering sessions will be held at the ARC Fort Sheridan, IL All construction meetings will be held at the project site.

Philip H. Sheridan ARC ***Safety Pays*** Certified FinalFort Sheridan, IL W912QR-11-R-0072

SECTION 01 32 01.00 06

PROJECT SCHEDULE01/10

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.

U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)

ECB 2005-10 (2005) Scheduling Requirements for Testing of Mechanical Systems in Construction

ER 1-1-11 (1995) Progress, Schedules, and Network Analysis Systems

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with LRL Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals

Preliminary Project Schedule; G

Project Schedule; G

Two copies of the schedules showing codes, dates, durations, categories, etc., as required.

SD-05 Design Data

Narrative Report

Schedule Reports

Two copies of the reports showing activity numbers, descriptions, dates float, starts, finishes, durations, sequences, etc., as required.

Periodic Schedule Updates; G

Two copies of the schedules showing dates, float, starts, finishes, etc., as required.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Designate an authorized representative to be responsible for the preparation of the schedule and all required updating (activity status) and

SECTION 01 32 01.00 06 Page 1


preparation of reports. The authorized representative shall have previously developed, created, and maintained at least 2 electronic schedules for projects similar in nature and complexity to this project and shall be experienced in the use of the scheduling software that meets the requirements of this specification.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Prepare for approval a Project Schedule, as specified herein, pursuant to the Contract Clause, SCHEDULE FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS. Show in the schedule the sequence in which the Contractor proposes to perform the work and dates on which the Contractor contemplates starting and completing all schedule activities. The scheduling of the entire project, including the design, if applicable, and construction sequences, is required. The scheduling of design and construction is the responsibility of the Contractor. Contractor management personnel shall actively participate in its development. Designers, Subcontractors and suppliers working on the project shall also contribute in developing and maintaining an accurate Project Schedule. Provide a schedule that is a forward planning as well as a project monitoring tool.

3.1.1 Approved Project Schedule

Use the approved Project Schedule to measure the progress of the work and to aid in evaluating time extensions. Make the schedule cost loaded and activity coded. The schedule will provide the basis for all progress payments. If the Contractor fails to submit any schedule within the time prescribed, the Contracting Officer may withhold approval of progress payments until the Contractor submits the required schedule.

3.1.2 Schedule Status Reports

Status the schedule and provide a Schedule Status Report on at least a monthly basis. If, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, the Contractor falls behind the approved schedule, the Contractor shall take steps necessary to improve its progress including those that may be required by the Contracting Officer, without additional cost to the Government. In this circumstance, the Contracting Officer may require the Contractor to increase the number of shifts, overtime operations, days of work, and/or the amount of construction plant, and to submit for approval any supplementary schedule or schedules as the Contracting Officer deems necessary to demonstrate how the approved rate of progress will be regained.

3.1.3 Default Terms

Failure of the Contractor to comply with the requirements of the Contracting Officer shall be grounds for a determination, by the Contracting Officer, that the Contractor is not prosecuting the work with sufficient diligence to ensure completion within the time specified in the contract. Upon making this determination, the Contracting Officer may terminate the Contractor's right to proceed with the work, or any separable part of it, in accordance with the default terms of the contract.

SECTION 01 32 01.00 06 Page 2


3.2 BASIS FOR PAYMENT AND COST LOADING

The schedule shall be the basis for determining contract earnings during each update period and therefore the amount of each progress payment. Lack of an approved schedule update, or qualified scheduling personnel, will result in the inability of the Contracting Officer to evaluate contract earned value for the purposes of payment. Failure of the Contractor to provide all required information will result in the disapproval of the entire project schedule submission and the inability of the Contracting Officer to evaluate Contractor progress for payment purposes. In the absence of an approved schedule, the Contracting Officer may withhold approval of requests for progress payments. In the case where project schedule revisions are directed by the Contracting Officer and those revisions have not been included in subsequent revisions or updates, the Contracting Officer may hold retainage up to the maximum allowed by contract, each payment period, until such revisions to the Project Schedule have been made. Activity cost loading shall be reasonable, as determined by the Contracting Officer. The aggregate value of all activities coded to a contract CLIN shall equal the value of the CLIN on the Schedule.

3.3 PROJECT SCHEDULE DETAILED REQUIREMENTS

The computer software system utilized by the Contractor to produce and update the Project Schedule shall be capable of meeting all requirements of this specification. Failure of the Contractor to meet the requirements of this specification will result in the disapproval of the schedule. Scheduling software that meets the activity coding structure defined in the Standard Data Exchange Format (SDEF) in ER 1-1-11 are Primavera Enterprise products P5.0 or P6 (and subsequent versions). Will accept Primavera 3.1. Other project software of manual methods used to produce any required information shall require approval by the Contracting Officer.

3.3.1 Critical Path Method

The Critical Path Method (CPM) of network calculation shall be used to generate the Project Schedule. Prepare the Project Schedule using the Precedence Diagram Method (PDM).

3.3.2 Level of Detail Required

Develop the Project Schedule to an appropriate level of detail. Failure to develop the Project Schedule to an appropriate level of detail, as determined by the Contracting Officer, will result in its disapproval. The Contracting Officer will consider, but is not limited to, the following characteristics and requirements to determine appropriate level of detail:

3.3.2.1 Activity Durations

Contractor submissions shall follow the direction of the Contracting Officer regarding reasonable activity durations. Reasonable activity durations are those that allow the progress of ongoing activities to be accurately determined between update periods. Less than 2 percent of all non-procurement activities shall have Original Durations (OD) greater than 20 work days or 30 calendar days. Procurement activities are defined herein.

3.3.2.2 Design and Permit Activities

Design and permit activities, including necessary conferences and follow-up

SECTION 01 32 01.00 06 Page 3


actions and design package submission dates, shall be integrated into the schedule. The Contractor shall include the design schedule in the project schedule, showing the sequence of events involved in carrying out the project design tasks within the specific contract period. This shall be at a detailed level of scheduling sufficient to identify all major design tasks, including those that control the flow of work. The schedule shall include review and correction periods associated with each item.

3.3.2.3 Procurement Activities

The schedule must include separate activities associated with the submittal, approval, procurement, fabrication and delivery of long lead materials, equipment, fabricated assemblies and supplies. Long lead procurement activities are those with an anticipated procurement sequence of over 90 calendar days. A typical procurement sequence includes, but is not limited to, the string of activities: submit, approve, procure, fabricate, and deliver.

3.3.2.4 Mandatory Tasks

The following tasks must be included and listed as separate line activities. Furthermore, the preparation of submittals are to be separate activities from the review/approval/acceptance activities, with the government review/approval/acceptance having appropriate durations as specified in submittal procedures and properly scheduled:

a. Submission, review and acceptance of design packages (for design build projects).

b. Submission of mechanical/electrical/information systems layout drawings.

c. Submission and approval of O & M manuals.

d. Submission and approval of as-built drawings.

e. Submission and approval of 1354 data and installed equipment lists.

f. Submission and approval of testing and air balance (TAB).

g. Submission of TAB specialist design review report.

h. Submission and approval of fire protection specialist.

i. Submission and approval of testing and balancing of HVAC plus commissioning plans and data. Develop the schedule logic associated with testing and commissioning of mechanical systems to a level of detail consistent with ECB 2005-10.

j. Air and water balancing.

k. HVAC commissioning.

l. Controls testing plan submission.

m. Controls testing.

n. Performance Verification testing.

SECTION 01 32 01.00 06 Page 4


o. Other systems testing, if required.

p. Contractor's pre-final inspection.

q. Correction of punchlist from Contractor's pre-final inspection.

r. Government's pre-final inspection.

s. Correction of punch list from Government's pre-final inspection.

t. Final inspection.

3.3.2.5 Government Activities

Show Government and other agency activities that could impact progress. These activities include, but are not limited to: approvals/acceptance, design reviews, environmental permit approvals by State regulators, inspections, utility tie-in, Government Furnished Equipment (GFE) and Notice to Proceed (NTP) for phasing requirements.

3.3.2.6 Activity Responsibility Coding (RESP)

All activities shall be identified in the project schedule by the party responsible to perform the work. Responsibility includes, but is not limited to, the subcontracting firm, contractor, or government agency performing a given task. Activities coded with a Government Responsibility code include, but are not limited to: Government approvals, Government design reviews, environmental permit approvals by State regulators, Government Furnished Equipment (GFE) and Notice to Proceed (NTP) for phasing requirements. Code all activities not coded with a Government Responsibility Code to the Prime Contractor or Subcontractor responsible to perform the work. Activities shall not have more than one Responsibility Code. Examples of acceptable activity code values are: DOR (for the designer of record); ELEC (for the electrical subcontractor); MECH (for the mechanical subcontractor); and GOVT (for USACE). Unacceptable code values are abbreviations of the names of subcontractors.

3.3.2.7 Activity Work Area Coding (AREA)

Assign Work Area code to activities based upon the work area in which the activity occurs. Define work areas based on resource constraints or space constraints that would preclude a resource, such as a particular trade or craft work crew, from working in more than one work area at a time due to restraints on resources or space. Examples of Work Area Coding include different areas within a floor of a building, different floors within a building, and different buildings within a complex of buildings. Activities shall not have more than one Work Area Code. Not all activities are required to be Work Area coded. A lack of Work Area coding will indicate the activity is not resource or space constrained.

3.3.2.8 Contract Changes/Requests for Equitable Adjustment (REA) Coding (MODF)

Assign an Activity code to any activity or sequence of activities added to the schedule as a result of a Contract Modification, when approved by the Contracting Officer, with a Contract Changes/REA Code. Key all Code values to the Government's modification numbering system. Any activity or sequence of activities added to the schedule as a result of alleged constructive changes made by the Government may be added to a copy of the

SECTION 01 32 01.00 06 Page 5


current schedule, subject to the approval of the Contracting Officer. Assign Activity codes for these activities with a Contract Changes/REA Code. Key the code values to the Contractor's numbering system. Approval to add these activities does not necessarily mean the Government accepts responsibility and, therefore, liability for such activities and any associated impacts to the schedule, but rather the Government recognizes such activities are appropriately added to the schedule for the purposes of maintaining a realistic and meaningful schedule. Such activities shall not be Responsibility Coded to the Government unless approved. An activity shall not have more than one Contract Changes/REA Code.

3.3.2.9 Contract Line Item (CLIN) Coding (BIDI)

Code all activities to the CLIN on the Contract Line Item Schedule to which the activity belongs. An activity shall not contain more than one CLIN Item Code. CLIN Item code all activities, even when an activity is not cost loaded.

3.3.2.10 Phase of Work Coding (PHAS)

Assign Phase of Work Code to all activities based upon the phase of work in which the activity occurs. Code activities to either a Design Phase or a Construction Phase. Code fast track design and constructionphases proposed by the Contractor to allow filtering and organizing the schedule by fast track design and construction packages. If the contract specifies construction phasing with separately defined performance periods, identify a Construction Phase Code to allow filtering and organizing the schedule accordingly. Each activity shall be identified with a single project phase and have only one Phase of Work code.

3.3.2.11 Category of Work Coding (CATW)

Assign Category of Work Code to all activities according to the category of work to which best describes the activity. Category of Work Code shall include, but is not limited to: design, design submittal, design reviews, review conferences, permits, construction submittals,approvals, acceptance, procurement, fabrication, delivery, weather sensitive installation, non-weather sensitive installation, start-up, test and turnover. Assign a Category of Work Code to each activity. Each activity shall have only one Category of Work Code.

3.3.2.12 Definable Features of Work Coding (FOW1, FOW2, FOW3)

Assign a Definable Feature of Work Code to appropriate activities based on the definable feature of work to which the activity belongs. Definable Feature of Work is defined in LRL Section 01 45 04.10 06 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL. An activity shall not have more than one Definable Feature of Work Code. Not all activities are required to be Definable Feature of Work Coded.

3.3.3 Scheduled Project Completion and Activity Calendars

The schedule interval shall extend from NTP date to the required contract completion date. The contract completion activity (End Project) shall finish based on the required contract duration in the accepted contract proposal, as adjusted for any approved contract time extensions. The first scheduled work period shall be the day after NTP is acknowledged by the Contractor. Schedule activities on a calendar to which the activity logically belongs. Activities may be assigned to a 7 day calendar when the

SECTION 01 32 01.00 06 Page 6


contract assigns calendar day durations for the activity such as a Government Acceptance activity. If the Contractor intends to perform physical work less than seven days per week, schedule the associated activities on a calendar with non-work periods identified including weekends and holidays. Assign the Category of Work Code - Weather Sensitive Installation to those activities that are weather sensitive. Original durations must account for anticipated normal adverse weather. The Government will interpret all work periods not identified as non-work periods on each calendar as meaning the Contractor intends to perform work during those periods.

3.3.3.1 Project Start Date

The schedule shall start no earlier than the date on which the NTP was acknowledged. Include as the first activity in the project schedule an activity called "Start Project" or NTP. The "Start Project" activity shall have an "ES" constraint date equal to the date that the NTP was acknowledged, and a zero day duration.

3.3.3.2 Schedule Constraints and Open Ended Logic

Completion of the last activity in the schedule shall be constrained by the contract completion date. Schedule calculations shall result in a negative float when the calculated early finish date of the last activity is later than the contract completion date. The Contractor shall include as the last activity in the project schedule an activity called "End Project". The "End Project" activity shall have an "LF" constraint date equal to the contract completion date for the project, and with a zero day duration or by using the "project must finish by" date in the scheduling software. The schedule shall have no constrained dates other than those specified in the contract. The use of artificial float constraints such as "zero free float" or "zero total float" are typically prohibited. There shall only be 2 open ended activities: Start Project (or NTP) with no predecessor logic and End Project with no successor logic.

3.3.3.3 Early Project Completion

The last activity shall have a late finish constraint equal to the contract required completion date so that the schedule calculation will result in positive float if the project schedule projects a completion date prior to the contract required completion date. In the event the project schedule calculates an early completion date of the last activity prior to the contract have been accelerated and/or those activities that are scheduled in parallel to support the Contractor's "early" completion. The Contractor shall specifically address each of those activities in the narrative report and at every project schedule update period to assist the Contracting Officer in evaluating the Contractor's ability to actually complete prior to the contract period. The Government will not approve an early completion schedule with zero float on the longest path. The Government is under no obligation to accelerate activities for which it is responsible to support a proposed early contract completion.

3.3.4 Interim Completion Dates

Contractually specified interim completion dates shall be constrained to show negative float if the calculated early finish date of the last activity in that phase is later than the specified interim completion date.

SECTION 01 32 01.00 06 Page 7


3.3.4.1 Start Phase

The Contractor shall include as the first activity for a project phase an activity called "Start Phase X" where "X" refers to the phase of work and the activity will have a zero day duration.

3.3.4.2 End Phase

The Contractor shall include as the last activity for a project phase an activity called "End Phase X" where "X" refers to the phase of work and the activity will have a zero day duration.

3.3.4.3 Phase "X" Hammock

The Contractor shall include a hammock type activity for each project phase called "Phase X" where "X" refers to the phase of work. The "Phase X" hammock activity shall be logically tied to the earliest and latest activities in the phase.

3.3.5 Default Progress Data Disallowed

Actual Start and Finish dates shall not be automatically updated by default mechanisms that may be included in the scheduling software. Activity Actual Start (AS) and Actual Finish (AF) dates assigned during the updating process shall match those dates provided from Contractor Quality Control Reports. Failure of the Contractor to document the AS and AF dates on the Daily Quality Control report for every in-progress or completed activity, and failure to ensure that the data contained on the Daily Quality Control reports shall result in the disapproval of the Contractor's updated schedule and the inability of the Contracting Officer to evaluate Contractor progress for payment purposes. Updating of the percent complete and the remaining duration of any activity shall be independent functions. Disable program features which calculate one of these parameters from the other.

3.3.6 Out-of-Sequence Progress

Activities that have progressed before all preceding logic has been satisfied (Out-of-Sequence Progress) will be allowed only on a case-by-case basis subject to approval by the Contracting Officer. Propose logic corrections to eliminate all out of sequence progress or justify not changing the sequencing for approval prior to submitting an updated project schedule. Correct out of sequence progress that continues for more than two update cycles by logic revision, as approved by the Contracting Officer.

3.3.7 Negative Lags and Start to Finish Relationships

Lag durations contained in the project schedule shall not have a negative value. Do not use Start to Finish (SF) relationships.

3.3.8 Calculation Mode

Schedule calculations shall retain the logic between predecessors and successors even when the successor activity starts and the predecessor activity has not finished. Software features that in effect sever the tie between predecessor and successor activities when the successor has started and the predecessor logic is not satisfied ("progress override") will not be allowed.

SECTION 01 32 01.00 06 Page 8


3.3.9 Milestones

The schedule must include milestone activities for each significant project event including but not limited to: milestone activities for each fast track design package released for construction; design complete; foundation/substructure construction complete; superstructure construction complete; building dry-in or enclosure complete to allow the initiation of finish activities; permanent power complete; and building systems commissioning complete.

3.4 PROJECT SCHEDULE SUBMISSIONS

The Contractor shall provide the submissions as described below. The data CD, reports, and network diagrams required for each submission are contained in paragraph SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS. When design/build requirements are not within the project scope of work, all design submittals are not applicable

3.4.1 Preliminary Project Schedule Submission

The Preliminary Project Schedule shall be submitted for approval within 30 calendar days after the NTP is acknowledged. It shall consist of a detailed design phase schedule and a rough draft construction schedule. The approved preliminary schedule shall be used for payment purposes through the Contractor's design phase of the project."

3.4.2 Initial Project Schedule Submission

Submit the Initial Project Schedule shall be submitted with the Certified Final Design submission, or with each Certified Final Design submission if multiple design/construction packages are proposed. The schedule shall demonstrate a reasonable and realistic sequence of activities which represent all work through the entire contract performance period. The Initial Schedule shall be at a reasonable level of detail as determined by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall participate in a review and evaluation of the proposed schedule and analysis by the Contracting Officer. Include in the design-build schedule detailed design and permitting activities, including but not limited to identification of individual design packages, design submission, reviews and conferences; permit submissions and any required Government actions; and long lead item acquisition prior to design completion. Also cover in the initial design-build schedule the entire construction effort with as much detail as is known at the time but, as a minimum, include all construction start and completion milestones, and detailed construction activities through the dry-in milestone,including all activity coding and cost loading. Include the remaining construction, including cost loading, but it may be scheduled summary in nature. As the design proceeds and design packages are developed, fully detail the remaining construction activities concurrent with the monthly schedule updating process. Constrain construction activities by Government acceptance of associated designs. When the design is complete, incorporate into the then approved schedule update all remaining detailed construction activities that are planned to occur after the dry-in milestone.

3.4.3 Design Package Schedule Submission

With each design package submitted to the Government, submit a frag-net schedule extracted from the then current Preliminary, Initial or Updated schedule which covers the activities associated with that Design Package

SECTION 01 32 01.00 06 Page 9


including construction, procurement and permitting activities.

3.4.4 Periodic Schedule Updates

Based on the result of the meeting, specified in PERIODIC SCHEDULE UPDATE MEETINGS, submit periodic schedule updates. These submissions will enable the Contracting Officer to assess Contractor's progress. If the Contractor fails or refuses to furnish the information and project schedule data, which in the judgment of the Contracting Officer or authorized representative is necessary for verifying the Contractor's progress, the Contractor shall be deemed not to have provided an estimate upon which progress payment may be made. Update the schedule to include detailed, lower WBS level construction activities as the design progresses, but not later than the submission of the final, un-reviewed design submission for each separate design package. The Contracting Officer may require submission of detailed schedule activities for any distinct construction that is started prior to submission of a final design submission, if such activity is authorized.

3.4.5 Standard Activity Coding Dictionary

Use the activity coding structure defined in the Standard Data Exchange Format (SDEF) in ER 1-1-11, Appendix A. This exact structure is mandatory, even if some fields are not used. A template SDEF compatible schedule backup file (sdef.prx) is available on the QCS website: www.rmssupport.com. The SDEF format is as follows:

Field Activity Code Length Description

1 WRKP 3 Workers per Day 2 RESP 4 Responsible Party (e.g. GC, subcontractor, USACE) 3 AREA 4 Area of Work 4 MODF 6 Modification or REA number 5 BIDI 6 Bid Item (CLIN) 6 PHAS 2 Phase of Work 7 CATW 1 Category of Work 8 FOW1 10 Feature of Work (up to 10 characters in length) 9 FOW2 10 Feature of Work (up to 20 characters in length)10 FOW3 10 Feature of Work (up to 30 characters in length)

3.5 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

Submit the following items for the Preliminary Schedule, Initial Schedule, and every Periodic Schedule Update throughout the life of the project in addition to the requirements for submission of schedules and reports in paragraphs 1.2 "SUBMITTALS":

3.5.1 Data CD's

Provide two sets of data CD's containing the project schedule in the backup format. Each CD shall also contain all previous update backup files. File medium shall be CD. Label each CD indicating the type of schedule (Preliminary, Initial, Update), full contract number, Data Date and file name. Each schedule file submitted shall have a unique file name as determined by the Contractor and acceptable to the Government.

SECTION 01 32 01.00 06 Page 10


3.5.2 Narrative Report

A Narrative Report shall be provided with the Preliminary, Initial, and each Periodic Update of the project schedule, as the basis of the progress payment request. The Narrative Report shall include: a description of activities along the 2 most critical paths where the total float is less than or equal to 20 work days, a description of current and anticipated problem areas or delaying factors and their impact, and an explanation of corrective actions taken or required to be taken. The narrative report is expected to communicate to the Government, the Contractor's thorough analysis of the schedule output and its plans to compensate for any problems, either current or potential, which are revealed through that analysis. Identify and explain why any activities that, based their calculated late dates, should have either started or finished during the update period but did not.

3.5.3 Approved Changes Verification

Only those project schedule changes that have been previously approved by the Contracting Officer shall be included in the schedule submission. The Narrative Report shall specifically reference, on an activity by activity basis, all changes made since the previous period and relate each change to documented, approved schedule changes.

3.5.4 Schedule Reports

The format, filtering, organizing and sorting for each schedule report shall be as directed by the Contracting Officer. Typically reports shall contain: Activity Numbers, Activity Description, Original Duration, Actual Duration, Remaining Duration, Early Start Date, Early Finish Date, Late Start Date, Late Finish Date, Total Float, Actual Start Date, Actual Finish Date, and Percent Complete. The following lists typical reports that will be requested. One or all of these reports may be requested for each schedule submission.

3.5.4.1 Activity Report

A list of all activities sorted according to activity number.

3.5.4.2 Logic Report

A list of detailed predecessor and successor activities for every activity in ascending order by activity number.

3.5.4.3 Total Float Report

A list of all incomplete activities sorted in ascending order of total float. Activities which have the same amount of total float shall be listed in ascending order of Early Start Dates. Completed activities shall not be shown on this report.

3.5.4.4 Earnings Report by CLIN

A compilation of the Contractor's Total Earnings on the project from the NTP to the data date. This report shall reflect the earnings of specific activities based on the agreements made in the schedule update meeting defined herein. Provided that the Contractor has furnished a complete schedule update, this report shall serve as the basis of determining progress payments. Group activities by CLIN item number and sort by

SECTION 01 32 01.00 06 Page 11


activity number. This report shall: sum all activities coded to a particular CLIN and provide a CLIN item percent earned value; and complete and sum CLIN items to provide a total project percent complete. The printed report shall contain, for each activity: the Activity Number, Activity Description, Original Budgeted Amount, Total Quantity, Quantity to Date, Percent Complete (based on cost), and Earnings to Date.

3.5.5 Network Diagram

The network diagram is required for the Preliminary, Initial and Periodic Updates. The network diagram shall depict and display the order and interdependence of activities and the sequence in which the work is to be accomplished. The Contracting Officer will use, but is not limited to, the following conditions to review compliance with this paragraph:

3.5.5.1 Continuous Flow

Diagrams shall show a continuous flow from left to right with no arrows from right to left. The activity number, description, duration, and estimated earned value shall be shown on the diagram.

3.5.5.2 Project Milestone Dates

Dates shall be shown on the diagram for start of project, any contract required interim completion dates, and contract completion dates.

3.5.5.3 Critical Path

The critical path shall be clearly shown.

3.5.5.4 Banding

Organize activities as directed to assist in the understanding of the activity sequence. Typically, this flow will group activities by category of work, work area and/or responsibility.

3.5.5.5 S-Curves

Earnings curves showing projected early and late earnings and earnings to date.

3.6 PERIODIC SCHEDULE UPDATE MEETINGS

Conduct periodic schedule update meetings for the purposes of reviewing the Contractor's proposed out of sequence corrections, determining causes for delay, correcting logic, maintaining schedule accuracy and determining earned value. Meetings shall occur at least monthly within five days of the proposed schedule data date and after the Contractor has updated the schedule with Government concurrence respecting actual start dates, actual finish dates, remaining durations and percent complete for each activity it intend to status. Provide a computer with the scheduling software loaded and a projector during the meeting which allows all meeting participants to view the proposed schedule update during the meeting. The meeting and resultant approvable schedule update shall be a condition precedent to a formal submission of the update as described in SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS and to the submission of an invoice for payment. The meeting will be a working interactive exchange which will allow the Government and the Contractor the opportunity to review the updated schedule on a real time and interactive basis. The Contractor's authorized scheduling representative will

SECTION 01 32 01.00 06 Page 12


organize, sort, filter and schedule the update as requested by the Government. The meeting will last no longer than 8 hours. A rough draft of the proposed activity logic corrections and narrative report shall be provided to the Government 48 hours in advance of the meeting. The Contractor's Project Manager and Authorized Scheduler shall attend the meeting with the Authorized Representative of the Contracting Officer.

3.6.1 Update Submission Following Progress Meeting

Submit a complete update of the project schedule containing all approved progress, revisions, and adjustments, pursuant to paragraph SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS not later than 4 working days after the periodic schedule update meeting, reflecting only those changes made during the previous update meeting.

3.6.2 Status of Activities

Update information, including Actual Start Dates (AS), Actual Finish Dates (AF), Remaining Durations (RD), and Percent Complete shall be subject to the approval of the Government prior to the meeting. As a minimum, address the following items on an activity by activity basis during each progress meeting.

3.6.2.1 Start and Finish Dates

Accurately show the status of the AS and/or AF dates for each activity currently in-progress or completed since the last update. The Government may allow an AF date to be assigned with the percent complete less than 100% to account for the value of work remaining but not restraining successor activities. Only assign AS dates when actual progress occurs on an activity.

3.6.2.2 Remaining Duration

Update the estimated RD for all incomplete activities independent of Percent Complete. Remaining Durations may exceed the activity OD or may exceed the activity's prior update RD if the Government considers the current OD or RD to be understated based on current progress, insufficient work crews actually manning the job, unrealistic OD or deficiencies that must be corrected that restrain successor activities.

3.6.2.3 Percent Complete

Update the percent complete for each activity started, based on the realistic assessment of earned value. Activities which are complete but for remaining minor punch list work and which do not restrain the initiation of successor activities may be declared 100 percent complete. To allow for proper schedule management, cost load the correction of punch list from Government pre-final inspection activity(ies) not less than 1 percent of the total contract value, which activity(ies) may be declared 100 percent complete upon completion and correction of all punch list work identified during Government pre-final inspection(s).

3.6.2.4 Logic Changes

Specifically identify and discuss all logic changes pertaining to NTP on change orders, change orders to be incorporated into the schedule, Contractor proposed changes in work sequence, corrections to schedule logic for out-of-sequence progress, and other changes that have been made

SECTION 01 32 01.00 06 Page 13


pursuant to contract provisions. The Government will only approve logic revisions for the purpose of keeping the schedule valid in terms of its usefulness in calculating a realistic completion date, correcting erroneous logic ties, and accurately sequencing the work.

3.6.2.5 Other Changes

Other changes required due to delays in completion of any activity or group of activities include: 1) delays beyond the Contractor's control, such as strikes and unusual weather. 2) delays encountered due to submittals, Government Activities, deliveries or work stoppages which make re-planning the work necessary. 3) Changes required to correct a schedule that does not represent the actual or planned prosecution and progress of the work.

3.7 REQUESTS FOR TIME EXTENSIONS

In the event the Contractor believes it is entitled to an extension of the contract performance period, completion date, or any interim milestone date, furnish the following for a determination by the Contracting Officer: justification, project schedule data, and supporting evidence as the Contracting Officer may deem necessary. Submission of proof of excusable delay, based on revised activity logic, duration, and costs (updated to the specific date that the delay occurred) is a condition precedent to any approvals by the Government. In response to each Request For Proposal issued by the Government, the Contractor shall submit a schedule impact analysis demonstrating whether or not the change contemplated by the Government impacts the critical path.

3.7.1 Justification of Delay

The project schedule shall clearly display that the Contractor has used, in full, all the float time available for the work involved with this request. The Contracting Officer's determination as to the number of allowable days of contract extension shall be based upon the project schedule updates in effect for the time period in question, and other factual information. Actual delays that are found to be caused by the Contractor's own actions, which result in a calculated schedule delay, will not be a cause for an extension to the performance period, completion date, or any interim milestone date.

3.7.2 Submission Requirements

Submit a justification for each request for a change in the contract completion date of less than 2 weeks based upon the most recent schedule update at the time of the NTP or constructive direction issued for the change. Such a request shall be in accordance with the requirements of other appropriate Contract Clauses and shall include, as a minimum:

a. A list of affected activities, with their associated project schedule activity number.

b. A brief explanation of the causes of the change.

c. An analysis of the overall impact of the changes proposed.

d. A sub-network of the affected area.

Identify activities impacted in each justification for change by a unique activity code contained in the required data file.

SECTION 01 32 01.00 06 Page 14


3.7.3 Additional Submission Requirements

The Contracting Officer may request an interim update with revised activities for any requested time extension of over 2 weeks. Provide this disk within 4 days of the Contracting Officer's request.

3.8 DIRECTED CHANGES

If the NTP is issued for changes prior to settlement of price and/or time, submit proposed schedule revisions to the Contracting Officer within 2 weeks of the NTP being issued. The Contracting Officer will approve proposed revisions to the schedule prior to inclusion of those changes within the project schedule. If the Contractor fails to submit the proposed revisions, the Contracting Officer may furnish the Contractor with suggested revisions to the project schedule. The Contractor shall include these revisions in the project schedule until revisions are submitted, and final changes and impacts have been negotiated. If the Contractor has any objections to the revisions furnished by the Contracting Officer, advise the Contracting Officer within 2 weeks of receipt of the revisions. Regardless of the objections, the Contractor shall continue to update the schedule with the Contracting Officer's revisions until a mutual agreement in the revisions is reached. If the Contractor fails to submit alternative revisions within 2 weeks of receipt of the Contracting Officer's proposed revisions, the Contractor will be deemed to have concurred with the Contracting Officer's proposed revisions. The proposed revisions will then be the basis for an equitable adjustment for performance of the work.

3.9 WEEKLY PROGRESS MEETINGS

a. The Government and the Contractor shall meet weekly (or as otherwise mutually agreed to) between the meetings described in paragraph PERIODIC SCHEDULE UPDATE MEETINGS for the purpose of jointly reviewing the actual progress of the project as compared to the as planned progress and to review planned activities for the upcoming two weeks. The then current and approved schedule update shall be used for the purposes of this meeting and for the production and review of reports. The Contractor's Project Manager and the Authorized Representative of the Contracting Officer shall attend. The weekly progress meeting will address the status of RFI's, RFP's and Submittals.

b. Provide a bar chart produced by the scheduling software, organized by Total Float and Sorted by Early Start Date, and a two week "look-ahead" schedule by filtering all schedule activities to show only current ongoing activities and activities scheduled to start during the upcoming two weeks, organized by Work Area Code (AREA) and sorted by Early Start Date.

c. The Government and the Contractor shall jointly review the reports. If it appears that activities on the longest path(s) which are currently driving the calculated completion date (driving activities), are not progressing satisfactorily and therefore could jeopardize timely project completion, corrective action must be taken immediately. Corrective action includes but is not limited to: increasing the number of work crews; increasing the number of work shifts; increasing the number of hours worked per shift; and determining if Government responsibility coded activities require Government corrective action.

SECTION 01 32 01.00 06 Page 15


3.10 OWNERSHIP OF FLOAT

Float available in the schedule, at any time, shall not be considered for the exclusive use of either the Government or the Contractor.

3.11 TRANSFER OF SCHEDULE DATA INTO RMS/QCS

The Contractor shall download and upload the schedule data into the Resident Management System (RMS) prior to RMS databases being transferred to the Government and is considered to be additional supporting data in a form and detail required by the Contracting Officer pursuant to FAR 52.232-5 - Payments under Fixed-Price Construction Contracts. The receipt of a proper payment request pursuant to FAR 52.232-27 - Prompt Payment for Construction Contracts is contingent upon the Government receiving both acceptable and approvable hard copies and electronic export from QCS of the application for progress payment.

-- End of Section --

SECTION 01 32 01.00 06 Page 16


SECTION 01 33 00

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES09/09

PART 1 GENERAL

This is an Army Reserve Design/Build Project.

1.1 DEFINITIONS

1.1.1 Submittal

Contract Clauses "FAR 52.236-5, Material and Workmanship," paragraph (b) and "FAR 52.236-21, Specifications and Drawings for Construction - Alternate I," paragraphs (d), (e), and (f) apply to all "submittals."

1.1.2 Submittal Descriptions (SD)

Submittal requirements are specified in the technical sections. Submittals required are identified by SD numbers and titles as follows:


A document, required of the Contractor, or through the Contractor, from a supplier, installer, manufacturer, or other lower tier Contractor, the purpose of which is to confirm the quality or orderly progression of a portion of the work by documenting procedures, acceptability of methods or personnel, qualifications, or other verifications of quality.

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Submittals which graphically show relationship of various components of the work, schematic diagrams of systems, details of fabrication, layouts of particular elements, connections, and other relational aspects of the work.

SD-04 Samples

Samples, including both fabricated and un-fabricated physical examples of materials, products, and units of work as complete units or as portions of units of work.

SD-05 Design Data

Submittals, which provide calculations, descriptions, or documentation regarding the work.

SD-06 Test Reports

Reports of inspections or tests, including analysis and interpretation of test results.

SD-07 Certificates

SECTION 01 33 00 Page 1


Statement signed by an official authorized to certify on behalf of the manufacturer of a product, system or material, attesting that the product, system or material meets specified requirements. The statement must be dated after the award of the contract, must state the Contractor's name and address, must name the project and location, and must list the specific requirements, which are being certified.

SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

Data, which forms a part of an operation and maintenance manual.

SD-11 Closeout Submittals

All data, documentations, information, and drawings to achieve contract closeout.

1.1.3 Approving/Acceptance Authority

Office or designated person authorized to approve/accept the submittal.

1.1.4 Work

As used in this section, on- and off-site construction required by contract documents, including labor necessary to produce submittals, construction, materials, products, equipment, and systems incorporated or to be incorporated in such construction.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Government approval/acceptance is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only (FIO) or as otherwise designated. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:


Submittal register; G

1.3 SUBMITTAL CLASSIFICATION

Submittals are classified as follows:

1.3.1 Designer of Record (DOR) Approved

DOR applies to individuals who have professional accountability and design responsibility for certain features of a project involving one or more engineering and design disciplines, such as architectural, structural, mechanical, or electrical. DOR approval is required for all required project design submittals as identified in Specification Section 01 03 00.00 48, DESIGN SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS AFTER AWARD, extensions of design, critical materials, any deviations from the solicitation, the accepted proposal, or the completed design, equipment whose compatibility with the entire system must be checked, and other items as designated by the Contracting Officer. Included in this category of submittals are structural steel connections, critical fire protection and life safety items, and commissioning of HVAC equipment whose compatibility with the entire system must be checked. Within the terms of Section 00700 CONTRACT



CLAUSES, paragraph "Specifications and Drawings for Construction," such submittals are considered to be "shop drawings". The Contractor shall provide the Government the number of copies, designated hereinafter, of all Designer of Record approved submittals. The Government may review any or all Designer of Record approved submittals for conformance to the Solicitation and Accepted Proposal.

1.3.2 Government Reviewed Design or Extension of Design

Administrative Contracting Officer review is required for all design. Government review will be for conformance with the technical requirements of the solicitation and shall take place on all design submittals. Section 01 03 00.00 48 DESIGN SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS AFTER AWARD covers the design submittal and review process in detail.

Government reviewed submittals (not to be confused with Government approved submittals) include structural connections, life safety/fire protection and other extension of design construction submittals, and HVAC equipment commissioning where additional detail is being provided to define contract conformity. Review is not required for submittals that offer no additional details beyond that which is already shown on the construction documents. Construction documents were already reviewed and accepted in accordance with Section 01 03 00.00 48 DESIGN SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS AFTER AWARD. Government review shall not remove or replace DOR design responsibility.

1.3.3 Government Approved

Administrative Contracting Officer approval is required for any deviations from the solicitation, accepted proposal, or the accepted final design and other items as designated by the Contracting Officer's Representative. Within the terms of Section CONTRACT CLAUSES, paragraph "Specifications and Drawings for Construction," they are considered to be "shop drawings".

1.3.4 Information Only

All submittals not requiring Designer of Record approval will be for information only. They are not considered to be "shop drawings" within the terms of the Contract Clause refereed to above.

1.3.5 Designer of Record (DOR) Approved

DOR applies to individuals who have professional accountability and design responsibility for certain features of a project involving one or more engineering and design disciplines, such as architectural, structural, mechanical, or electrical. DOR approval is required for all required project design submittals as identified in Specification Section 01 03 00.00 48, DESIGN SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS AFTER AWARD, extensions of design, critical materials, any deviations from the solicitation, the accepted proposal, or the completed design, equipment whose compatibility with the entire system must be checked, and other items as designated by the Contracting Officer. Included in this category of submittals are structural steel connections, critical fire protection and life safety items, and commissioning of HVAC equipment whose compatibility with the entire system must be checked. Within the terms of Section 00700 CONTRACT CLAUSES, paragraph "Specifications and Drawings for Construction," such submittals are considered to be "shop drawings". The Contractor shall provide the Government the number of copies, designated in Section 00700 CONTRACT CLAUSES, paragraph "Submittal Procedure", of all Designer of Record approved submittals. The Government may review any or all Designer



of Record approved submittals for conformance to the Solicitation and Accepted Proposal.

1.3.6 Government Reviewed Design or Extension of Design

Administrative Contracting Officer review is required for all design. Government review will be for conformance with the technical requirements of the solicitation and shall take place on all design submittals. Section 01 03 00.00 48 DESIGN SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS AFTER AWARD covers the design submittal and review process in detail.

Government reviewed submittals (not to be confused with Government approved submittals) include structural connections, life safety/fire protection and other extension of design construction submittals, and HVAC equipment commissioning where additional detail is being provided to define contract conformity. Review is not required for submittals that offer no additional details beyond that which is already shown on the construction documents. Construction documents were already reviewed and accepted in accordance with Section 01 03 00.00 48 DESIGN SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS AFTER AWARD. Government review shall not remove or replace DOR design responsibility.

1.3.7 Government Approved Deviations

Administrative Contracting Officer approval is required for any deviations from the solicitation, accepted proposal, or the accepted final design and other items as designated by the Contracting Officer's Representative. Within the terms of Section CONTRACT CLAUSES, paragraph "Specifications and Drawings for Construction," they are considered to be "shop drawings". The Government does not intend to approve any shop drawings except as required above.

1.3.8 Information Only

All submittals not requiring Designer of Record approval will be for information only. They are not considered to be "shop drawings" within the terms of the Contract Clause refereed to above.

1.4 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY FOR GOVERNMENT REVIEWED OR GOVERNMENT APPROVED SUBMITTALS

The Contracting Officer's conformance review or approval/acceptance of submittals shall not be construed as a complete check, but will indicate only that the general method of construction, materials, detailing and other information are satisfactory. Approval/acceptance will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for any error which may exist, as the Contractor under the Contractor Quality Control (CQC) requirements of this contract is responsible for dimensions, the design of adequate connections and details, and the satisfactory construction of all work. After submittals have been approved/accepted by the Contracting Officer, no resubmittal for the purpose of substituting materials or equipment will be considered unless accompanied by an explanation of why a substitution is necessary.

1.5 DISAPPROVED/NON-ACCEPTED/NON-ACCEPTED SUBMITTALS

The Contractor shall make all corrections required by the Contracting Officer and promptly furnish a corrected submittal in the form and number of copies specified for the initial submittal. If the Contractor considers any correction indicated on the submittals to constitute a change to the



contract, a notice in accordance with the Contract Clause "Changes" shall be given promptly to the Contracting Officer.

1.6 WITHHOLDING OF PAYMENT

Payment for materials incorporated in the work will not be made if required approvals/non-acceptance have not been obtained.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not used)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 DESIGN SUBMITTALS

The Contractor shall provide design documents submittals in accordance with Section 01 03 00.00 06 DESIGN SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS AFTER AWARD.

3.1.1 SUBMITTAL REGISTER (ENG Form 4288)

The Designer of Record shall develop a complete list of submittals duringdesign. The Designer of Record shall identify required submittals in the specifications, and use the list to prepare the Submittal Register. The list may not be all inclusive and additional submittals may be required by other parts of the contract. The Government must provide a blank or sample Form 4288 in the RFP and require that the Contractor prepare the submittal register in that format. The Contractor is required to complete the submittal register and submit it to the Contracting Officer for approval within 30 calendar days after Notice to Proceed. The approved/accepted submittal register will serve as a scheduling document for submittals and will be used to control submittal actions throughout the contract period. The submit dates and need dates used in the submittal register shall be coordinated with dates in the Contractor prepared progress schedule. Updates to the submittal register showing the Contractor action codes and actual dates with Government action codes and actual dates shall be submitted monthly or until all submittals have been satisfactorily completed. When the progress schedule is revised, the submittal register shall also be revised and both submitted for approval.

3.1.2 Real Property Record Draft 1354

a. The DD Form 1354 Data Sheets contain a summary of project information used to transfer the facility to the owner agency. The data sheet is divided into two parts; Facility and Features within the 5 foot line and Features outside the 5 foot line. The Contractor shall meet with Government representatives (Construction Office Representative and installation representative) at the start of design to get direction and example documents, on the format and content of the Draft DD Form 1354. The draft form will be prepared as part of the final design documents and reviewed by the Government. The Contractor will then revise the draft form to reflect the comments received. At time of construction completion, the final draft DD Form 1354 will be updated by the Contractor to reflect as-constructed information, including equipment data, manufacturer's names and model numbers. The final draft form is then submitted to the Government. Reference UFC-1-300-08, Appendix B for blank DD Form 1354.

b. The Contractor shall promptly furnish and shall cause any sub-contractor or supplier to furnish, in like manner, unit prices and descriptive data required by the Government for Property Record



purposes of fixtures and equipment furnished and/or installed by the Contractor or sub-contractor, expect prices do not need to be provided for Government-Furnished Property. This information shall be listed in RMS CQC Module furnished by the Government. See example forms at the end of the Special Contractor Requirements. Reference UFC 1-300-08, Appendix B for blank DD Form 1354.

3.2 DESIGN SUBMITTALS

The Contractor shall provide design documents submittals in accordance with Section 01 03 00.00 48 DESIGN SUBMISSIONS AFTER AWARD.

3.2.1 SUBMITTAL REGISTER (ENG Form 4288)

The Contractor shall develop a complete list of pre-construction and construction submittals. Contractor shall identify required submittals of the RFP, including Division Zero and One Specifications as well as those required in the Outline Technical Specifications, and use the list to prepare the Submittal Register. The list may not be all inclusive and additional submittals may be required by other parts of the contract. The Contractor must prepare a Submittal Register listing all submittals, in the format of Form 4288. A preliminary Register for Divisions Zero and One is attached to the end of this section; the Designer of Record shall verify its completeness, and make any corrections or additions required. The Submittal Register shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer for acceptance in accordance with the schedule below. Once accepted by the Government, the Contractor shall input the Submittal Register into an Excel spreadsheet suitable for upload into RMS and PROJNET SUBMITTAL REGISTER for use by the Contractor and Government. An Excel spreadsheet version of the format, suitable for input into RMS is available at http://www.rmssupport.com/qcs/guides.aspx under the "User's Guide" tab. Directions for conversion to PROJNET SUBMITTAL REGISTER format will be provided by the Government. The approved/accepted Submittal Register will serve as a scheduling document for submittals and will be used to control submittal actions throughout the contract period. The submit dates and need dates used in the submittal register shall be coordinated with dates in the Contractor prepared progress schedule. Updates to the Submittal Register showing the Contractor action codes and actual dates with Government action codes and actual dates shall be submitted monthly or until all submittals have been satisfactorily completed. When the progress schedule is revised, the submittal register shall also be revised and both submitted for approval.

Pre-design submittals - Submit by numbered letter when required

Initial Submittal Register - Submit within 30 days of NTP, with Preliminary Project Schedule

If project involves fast-track portion(s), Submittal Register with all submittals required for fast-track portion of work added - Submit with Certified Final Design for fast track.

Full Submittal Register - submit with Certified Final design for full project.

3.2.2 Real Property Record Draft 1354

a. The DD Form 1354 Data Sheets contain a summary of project information used to transfer the facility to the owner agency. The



data sheet is divided into two parts; Facility and Features within the 5 foot line and Features outside the 5 foot line. The Contractor shall meet with Government representatives (Construction Office Representative and installation representative) at the start of design to get direction and example documents, on the format and content of the Draft DD Form 1354. The draft form will be prepared as part of the final design documents and reviewed by the Government. The Contractor will then revise the draft form to reflect the comments received. At time of construction completion, the final draft DD Form 1354 will be updated by the Contractor to reflect as-constructed information, including equipment data, manufacturer's names and model numbers. The final draft form is then submitted to the Government. Reference UFC 1-300-08, Appendix B for blank DD Form 1354.

b. The Contractor shall promptly furnish and shall cause any sub-contractor or supplier to furnish, in like manner, unit prices and descriptive data required by the Government for Property Record purposes of fixtures and equipment furnished and/or installed by the Contractor or sub-contractor, expect prices do not need to be provided for Government-Furnished Property. This information shall be listed in RMS CQC Module furnished by the Government. See example forms at the end of the Special Contractor Requirements.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS

3.3.1 GENERAL

The Contractor shall make submittals as required by the specifications. The Contracting Officer may request submittals in addition to those specified when deemed necessary to adequately describe the work covered in the respective sections. Submittals will be made electronically utilizing PROJNET SUBMITTAL REGISTER. Units of weights and measures used on all submittals shall be the same as those used on the contract drawings, or required per the contract documents. Each submittal shall be complete and in sufficient detail to allow ready determination of compliance with contract requirements. See SECTION 00 80 00.00 06, Paragraph "As-Built Documents for Design Build Projects", for electronic submittal requirements for some shop drawings and other submittals. Prior to submittal, all items shall be checked and approved by the Contractor's Quality Control (CQC) System Manager and each item shall be stamped, signed, and dated by the Contractor's Quality Control CQC System Manager indicating action taken. Proposed deviations from the contract requirements shall be clearly identified. Submittals shall include items such as: Contractor's, manufacturer's, or fabricator's drawings; descriptive literature including (but not limited to) catalog cuts, diagrams, operating charts or curves; test reports; test cylinders; samples; O&M manuals (including parts list); certifications; warranties; and other such required submittals. Submittals requiring Government approval shall be scheduled and made prior to the acquisition of the material or equipment covered thereby. Samples remaining upon completion of the work shall be picked up and disposed of in accordance with manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and in compliance with existing laws and regulations.

3.4 SCHEDULING

Submittals covering component items forming a system or items that are interrelated shall be scheduled to be coordinated and submitted concurrently. Certifications to be submitted with the pertinent drawings shall be so scheduled. Adequate time (a minimum of 30 calendar days



exclusive of mailing time, if applicable) shall be allowed and shown on the submittal register for review and approval/acceptance. No delay damages or time extensions will be allowed for time lost in late submittals.

3.5 TRANSMITTAL FORM (ENG FORM 4025)

The sample transmittal form (ENG Form 4025) attached at the end of Section 00 80 00.00 06 shall be used for submitting both Government approved/acceptance and information only submittals in accordance with the instructions on the reverse side of the form. Form 4025 are included in the QCS software that the Contractor is required to use for this contractare included in the QCS software that the Contractor is required to use for this contract. Form 4025 shall be properly completed by filling out all the heading blank spaces and identifying each item submitted. Special care shall be exercised to ensure proper listing of the specification paragraph and/or sheet number of the contract drawings pertinent to the data submitted for each item.

3.6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE

Submittals shall be made as follows:

3.6.1 Procedures

The Contractor shall submit to the Contracting Officer six (6) copies of all submittals of items requiring shop inspection and two (2) copies of all other submittals as called for under the various headings of these specifications.The Contractor shall input submittals electronically into a web based system called PROJNET SUBMITTAL REGISTER. The Contractor will be granted access to this system and will be required to submit and respond on submittals in the program. The Contractor shall participate in a minimum of two training sessions on the use of PROJNET SUBMITTAL REGISTER.

Provide three full size hard copies of the submittals, in addition to electronic submittals required above, of all submittals requiring full size submittals, such as items requiring shop inspection.

3.6.2 Deviations

For submittals which include proposed deviations requested by the Contractor, the column field "variation" of PROJNET SUBMITTAL REGISTER and ENG Form 4025 shall be checked. The Contractor shall set forth in writing the reason for any deviations and annotate such deviations on the submittal. As stated above, the Contractor's Designer of Record's approval is required for any proposed deviation. The Government reserves the right to rescind inadvertent approval of submittals containing unnoted deviations or any Designer of Record approved submittal that deviates from the solicitation, accepted proposal, or accepted final design.

3.7 CONTROL OF SUBMITTALS

The Contractor shall carefully control his procurement operations to ensure that each individual submittal is made on or before the Contractor scheduled submittal date shown on the approved "Submittal Register."

3.8 GOVERNMENT CONFORMANCE REVIEW AND ACCEPTANCE SUBMITTALS

If the Government performs a conformance review of other Designer of Record



approved submittals, the submittals will be so identified and returned, as described above.Upon completion of review of submittals requiring Government approval, the submittals will be identified as having received approval by being so stamped and dated. One copy of the submittal will be retained by the Contracting Officer and two copies of the submittal will be returned to the Contractor.Upon completion of review of submittals requiring Government approval, the submittals will be approved utilizing PROJNET SUBMITTAL REGISTER. Upon approval, the Contractor is responsible for providing a hard copy to the Government for historical record keeping purposes. If the Government performs a conformance review of other Designer of Record approved submittals, the submittals will be so identified and submitted and approved as described above.

3.9 INFORMATION ONLY SUBMITTALS

The Contractor is responsible for preparing and retaining two copies of all FIO submittals in a pair of "Government" files at the Contractor's field office. One copy of the FIO submittals will be used for historical record and transferred to the customer upon completion of the project. The second copy will be used for Quality Assurance reviews, but may be retained at the Government's field office at the discretion of the Quality Assurance Representative. Both files shall be maintained in good order and filed by specification section.The Contractor is responsible for preparing and retaining two copies of all FIO submittals in a pair of "Government" files at the Contractor's field office. One copy of the FIO submittals will be used for historical record and transferred to the customer upon completion of the project. The second copy will be used for Quality Assurance reviews, but may be retained at the Government's field office at the discretion of the Quality Assurance Representative. Both files shall be maintained in good order and filed by specification section.

A minimum of 30 days in advance of the Approval Needed By date (Submittal Register, ENG Form 4288, Contractor Schedule Dates, Item "t") the Contractor shall submit only the transmittal form (ENG Form 4025-R) to the Government FIO submittals to PROJNET SUBMITTAL REGISTER for Government acknowledgment. The required submittal information shall be complete and available for review at the Contractor's field office. Government personnel will perform discretionary Quality Assurance reviews of the submittals as necessary to satisfy the Government that the Contractor's Quality Control system is providing the specified level of quality. Submittals that contain both Government Approval and Information Only items shall be processed as Government Approved Submittals. Submittals that do not meet the contract requirements will be assigned an "FX" action code by the Contracting Officer, and the submittal deficiencies will be forwarded to the Contractor. The Contractor shall resubmit for Government Approval and in accordance with Paragraph "Disapproved Submittals".

Normally submittals for information only will not be returned. Approval of the Contracting Officer is not required on information only submittals. The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to resubmit any item found not to comply with the contract. This does not relieve the Contractor from the obligation to furnish material conforming to the plans and specifications; will not prevent the Contracting Officer from requiring removal and replacement of nonconforming material incorporated in the work; and does not relieve the Contractor of the requirement to furnish samples for testing by the Government laboratory or for check testing by the Government in those instances where the technical specifications so prescribe.



3.10 STAMPS

Stamps used by the Contractor's Designer of Record and the Contractor's designate Quality Control person on the submittal data to certify that the submittal meets contract requirements shall be similar to the following:



_______________________________________________ | CONTRACTOR | | (Firm Name) | | | | ___ Approved | | ___ Approved with corrections as noted on | | submittal data and/or attached sheet(s).| | SIGNATURE: _______________________________ | | TITLE: ___________________________________ | | DATE: ____________________________________ |



SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 1 OF 4 PAGES

Fort Sheridan D/B

00 80 00.00 06 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals

GLabor, Equipment, and Material

Report

1.35 GDaily Equipment Report

1.81 GStorm Water Pollution Prevention

Plan (SWPPP)

GScaffolding, Competent Person

and Crew Qualifications and

Training

1.43 GScaffolding Erection Plan

SD-02 Shop Drawings

GMechanical/Electrical Room

Layouts

SD-04 Samples

1.21 GEquipment Warranty

Identification Tags

SD-05 Design Data

GEquipment-in-Place List

GMaintenance and Parts Data

1.17 GSF1413 Statement and

Acknowledgement

1.19Local Agency Check

1.37Notice of Soil Treatment

1.59Progress Photographs

SD-07 Certificates

1.21Warranties

SUBMITTAL REGISTERCONTRACT NO.

TITLE AND LOCATION CONTRACTOR

CONTRACTOR:SCHEDULE DATES

CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

#

CLASSIFICATION

GOVT OR A/E REVWR SUBMIT

APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH/

DATE RCDFROM

CONTR

DATE FWDTO OTHERREVIEWER

DATE RCDFROM OTHREVIEWER

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR/

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r)


Fort Sheridan D/B

00 80 00.00 06 1.20 GNO ASBESTOS - CONTAINING

MATERIAL (ACM)

CERTIFICATION

1.41 GInsurance


GFinal As-Built Drawings

1.21 GWarranty Management Plan


GPreliminary Project Schedule

3.4 GProject Schedule

SD-05 Design Data

Narrative Report

Schedule Reports

Periodic Schedule Updates; G

01 33 00 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals

GSubmittal register


1.3 GLEED Implementation Plan

1.2.1 GLEED AP BD+C

GLEED Final Design

Documentation

SD-05 Design Data

1.2 GLEED Correction Plan


GLEED Documentation Notebook

GLEED Plaque




CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

#

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH/

DATE RCDFROM

CONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR/

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS



Fort Sheridan D/B


1.8 GAccident Prevention Plan (APP)

1.9 GActivity Hazard Analysis (AHA)

GSite Safety & Health Officer

Qualifications(SSHO)

GProof of qualification for Crane

Operators

1.8.1 GCrane Critical Lift Plan

SD-06 Test Reports

1.13Reports

1.13.1Accident Reports

1.13.3Monthly Exposure Reports

1.13.4Crane Reports

1.13.3Regulatory Citations and

Violations

SD-07 Certificates

1.10Confined Space Entry Permit

1.10Hot work permit

License Certification


3.2 GDesign Quality Control Plan

GConstruction Quality Control Plan

01 46 00.00 06 SD-06 Test Reports

G EDFinal Commissioning Report

Reports

SD-07 Certificates




CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

#

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH/

DATE RCDFROM

CONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR/

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS



Fort Sheridan D/B

01 46 00.00 06 G EDCommissioning Agent

G RECertificate of Readiness

SD-10 Operation and Maintenance

Data

G EDSystems Manual


1.7Environmental Protection Plan


1.3.2Storm Water Pollution Prevention

Plan

1.3.2Storm Water Notice of Intent

SD-06 Test Reports

Storm Water Inspection Reports

for General Permit

1.3Erosion and Sediment Controls

SD-07 Certificates

2.1.3Mill Certificate or Affidavit


1.6 GWaste Management Plan


1.7Records




CONTRACTORACTION

APPROVING AUTHORITY

ACTIVITY NO

TRANSMITTAL NO

SPEC SECT

DESCRIPTION

ITEM SUBMITTED

PARAGRAPH

#

CLASSIFICATION


APPROVALNEEDED

BY

MATERIALNEEDED

BY

ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

DATE FWDTO APPR

AUTH/

DATE RCDFROM

CONTR



ACTION CODE

DATEOF

ACTION

MAILEDTO

CONTR/

DATE RCDFRM APPR

AUTH REMARKS



01 33 29.00 06

LEED™ CERTIFICATION03/10

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUBMITTALS

Government approval/acceptance is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following that "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with LRL Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures:

SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals LEED Implementation Plan; G

Six copies submitted to the Government on compact disk with the QC Planwithin 30 days after the accepted design submittal and before the start of any construction activity.

LEED AP BD+C; G

Statement of qualifications of the LEED AP BD+C submitted to the Government with the QC Plan. Includes name and date of expiration of the current credential.

LEED Final Design Documentation; G

Six copies submitted to the Government on compact disk concurrent with the Final Design submittal

SD-05 Design Data

LEED Correction Plan; G


LEED Documentation Notebook; G

Six copies submitted to the Government on compact disk within 14 days of the issue of the LEED Rating for the project by the Green Building Certification Institute.

LEED Plaque; G

Submitted to the Government within 14 days of receipt by the Contractor.

1.2 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

This project shall be designed and constructed to achieve a rating of certified in accordance with LEED 2009. The Contractor shall be

SECTION 01 33 29.00 06 Page 1


responsible for certifying the project at the required LEED rating through the Green Building Certification Institute and shall bear all costs associated with the certification process. The Contractor shall use the Split Design & Construction Review path. The Final Design Review by the Green Building Certification Institute shall be completed prior to the Final Design submittal to the Government. The results of the Final Design Review shall be submitted with the Final Design to the Government. The Final Construction Review shall be completed and the final LEED rating shall be issued by the Green Building Certification Institute prior to Contract Completion.

The Contractor shall be responsible for designing and constructing the project to obtain the required LEED rating. Should there be a case where there is any current or projected problem meeting the full requirements of a LEED credit or prerequisite identified for this project, the Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer in writing immediately. A LEED Correction Plan shall be submitted to the Government for acceptance detailing the method by which the LEED rating for the project will be preserved. The plan shall include the LEED credit or prerequisite impacted, the reason for non-compliance, the proposed correction or solution, an alternate credit, and a schedule for completion of the correction, solution, or alternate credit. If an alternate credit is proposed, associated documentation required by LEED certification requirements, and including a LEED Implementation Plan in accordance with paragraph LEED IMPLEMENTATION PLAN, shall be submitted with the LEED Correction Plan.

Deviations from the accepted design may impact the LEED rating of the project. In any case where a pending action, either by the Contractor or the Government, may cause failure to meet the requirements of an attempted LEED credit or prerequisite, the Contractor shall bring this to the attention of the Contracting Officer immediately.

1.2.1 LEED Accredited Professional (LEED AP BD+C)

A LEED Accredited Professional with specialty in Building Design + Construction (LEED AP BD+C), accredited by the Green Building Certification Institute, on the Contractor's staff shall be responsible for assembling documentation and ensuring that LEED credits and prerequisites are earned and/or documented as required by this specification section and also in accordance with LEED certification requirements. The LEED Accredited Professional shall be identified on the Contractor's Quality Control Staff in accordance with specification LRL Section 01 45 04.10 06 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL.

The LEED Accredited Professional shall review all requests for information, Contractor proposals, modifications, deviations from the design documents, or any other items that could potentially impact the LEED rating of the project.

1.2.2 Documentation

The project has been registered with the Green Building Certification Institute on LEED Online by others. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Government to obtain the Project Administrator role for the project in LEED Online. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Government to identify and grant access to representatives of the Government that will

SECTION 01 33 29.00 06 Page 2


monitor documentation in LEED Online. The Contractor shall provide documentation using LEED Online. Documentation shall be completed in LEED Online in accordance with the schedule in the LEED Implementation Plan.

The LEED Final Design Documentation shall be submitted to the Government on compact disk with the Final Design submittal. The LEED Final Design Documentation shall include the results of the Final Design Review performed by the Green Building Certification Institute along with all completed documentation in LEED Online.

A LEED Documentation Notebook shall be provided to the Government on compact disk within 14 days of the issue of the LEED Rating for the project by the Green Building Certification Institute and shall include a copy of all completed documentation in LEED Online inlcuding both Design Phase and Construction Phase documentation. All correspondence with the Green Building Certification Institute shall be included. A copy of each LEED Correction Plan shall be included in the LEED Documentation Notebook.

The Contractor shall submit a monthly LEED Progress Report that identifies the LEED credits and prerequisites completed and documented to date. The LEED Progress Report shall be submitted on the same day of each month. The Government will compare the LEED Progress Report and the documentation uploaded in LEED Online to the schedule in the LEED Implementation Plan. Failure to adhere to the schedule for completion of requirements for credits and prerequisites, including the associated documentation, in the LEED Implementation Plan shall be cause for withholding the monthly progress payment. Documentation in LEED Online and the LEED Documentation Notebook specified elsewhere in this section, shall be completed and submitted before final payment is made to the Contractor.

1.2.3 Innovation in Design Credits

The Contractor may choose to attempt Innovation in Design credits by using strategies that are not addressed by the existing LEED credits and prerequisites. Any such attempted credits shall be developed in accordance with the requirements of the Green Building Certification Institute for LEED certification. Innovation in Design credits shall conform to exemplary performance requirements or to the requirements of Credit Interpretation Rulings issued by the US Green Building Council or the Green Building Certification Institute. Applicable Credit Interpretation Rulings are those that apply to the LEED version under which the project has been registered. Innovation in Design credits not covered by exemplary performance requirements or Credit Interpretation Rulings will be evaluated by the Government and accepted based on their merit. Innovation in Design credits that are not accepted by the Government shall not be submitted for LEED certification except when failure to achieve the points for the credit will not result in failure of the project to achieve the required LEED rating. The Government will not be obligated to accept credits that do not conform to exemplary performance requirements or Credit Interpretation Rulings.

The Contractor shall identify the intent of the credit, the requirements for compliance with the credit, the submittals necessary to demonstrate compliance, and the design approach or strategies that may be used to meet the requirements. The specific compliance path for this project to meet the requirements for the proposed Innovation in Design credit shall be indicated. The Innovation in Design description shall be submitted with the Final Design. The Innovation in Design credits developed shall be fully described in the LEED Implementation Plan.

SECTION 01 33 29.00 06 Page 3


1.2.4 Credit Interpretation Rulings

The Contractor shall apply existing US Green Building Council or Green Building Certification Institute Credit Interpretation Rulings when pursuing credits using non-standard compliance paths, or when there are special circumstances making compliance difficult. Applicable Credit Interpretation Rulings are those that apply to the LEED version under which the project has been registered. The Contractor may apply for a Credit Interpretation Request from the Green Building Certification Institute for any new proposed strategy, non-standard compliance path, or special circumstances. If a Credit Interpretation Ruling is to be used to substantiate compliance with attempted credits and prerequisites, a copy of the request and ruling, including the dates, must be included in the documentation on LEED Online and in the LEED Documentation Notebook for the associated credit or prerequisite. Compliance methods that are not addressed by existing or new Credit Interpretation Rulings shall not be submitted for LEED certification.

1.2.5 Government Coordination

The Government may provide assistance or resources to the Contractor in order to complete the compliance requirements for a credit or prerequisite; however, the Government is not obligated to provide this assistance or resources. The Contractor shall not select credits for which Government assistance or resources are required without written confirmation from the Government that such assistance or resource will be provided. The Contractor shall identify to the Government credit or prerequisite requirements for which Government assistance is sought. The Contractor shall obtain written confirmation from the Contracting Officer that the Government will comply with the identified requirements. Written confirmation and any supporting documentation shall be included in the documentation on LEED Online and in the LEED Documentation Notebook for the associated credit or prerequisite.

1.3 LEED IMPLEMENTATION PLAN The LEED Implementation Plan shall be submitted within 30 days after acceptance of the design and before the start of any construction activity. The plan shall provide a detailed description of all activities that relate to accomplishing project LEED requirements, including construction practices and procurement practices. The plans shall also include:

a. The name of the LEED Accredited Professional Building Design + Construction (LEED AP BD+C).

b. A copy of the contract with the Commissioning Agent. The contract shall indicate all requirements for LEED Energy & Atmosphere (EA) Prerequisite 1, Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems, for which the Commissioning Agent is responsible. If LEED EA Credit 3 is to be attempted, the contract shall indicate all additional requirements of the Commissioning Agent.

c. Copies of the LEED Letter Templates to be used for tracking and documenting LEED credits and prerequisites. Include proposed materials, estimated costs, and other calculation details to demonstrate that the requirements of the specified LEED credits and prerequisites can be attained.

SECTION 01 33 29.00 06 Page 4


d. The schedule for completion of the requirements and documentation for each credit and prerequisite.

e. List all plans required by the attempted LEED credits and prerequisites and the proposed completion date of each plan. The plans shall be added to the LEED Implementation Plan as they are completed.

f. List all applicable Credit Interpretation Rulings that will be used to substantiate compliance with credits and prerequisites. The complete text of each Credit Interpretation Request and Ruling, and the date of each, shall be included.

g. For each credit or prerequisite requirement for which the Government has agreed to provide assistance or resources, provide a copy of written confirmation and any other associated supporting documentation.

h. The Innovation in Design credits attempted including the intent of the credit, the requirements for compliance with the credit, the submittals necessary to demonstrate compliance, and the design approach or strategies that may be used to meet the requirements. The specific compliance path for this project to meet the requirements for the proposed Innovation in Design credit shall be indicated. Any associated plans, construction practices, and procurement practices shall be described.

i. For fast-track design build projects with multiple stages of design, the specific information as indicated above shall be submitted for each stage of design within the time indicated in this paragraph.

j. Modifications to credit and prerequisite compliance or documentation requirements identified by the LEED-NC Application Guide for Multiple Buildings and On-Campus Building Projects shall be listed independently for each credit or prerequisite.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED


SECTION 01 33 29.00 06 Page 5

LE

ED

Cre

dit

Pa

rag

rap

h

Cre

dit

re

co

mm

en

da

tio

n

PAR FEATURE Remarks

KEY:

SSPR1 RConstruction Activity Pollution Prevention

(PREREQUISITE) LEED Prerequisites shall be achieved.

SS1 P Site Selection Site does not meet requirements

SS2 NPDevelopment Density & Community

Connectivity Site does not meet requirements

SS3 NP Brownfield Redevelopment Site does not meet requirements

SS4.1 NPAlternative Transportation: Public

Transportation Access

SS4.2 PAlternative Transportation: Bicycle Storage &

Changing Rooms

SS4.3 PAlternative Transportation: Low Emitting &

Fuel Efficient Vehicles

SS4.4 P Alternative Transportation: Parking Capacity

SS5.1 p Site Development: Protect or Restore Habitat

SS5.2 P Site Development: Maximize Open Space

SS6.1 P Stormwater Design: Quantity Control

SS6.2 P Stormwater Design: Quality Control

SS7.1 p Heat Island Effect: Non-Roof

SS7.2 P Heat Island Effect: Roof

SS8 P Light Pollution Reduction

WEPR1 R Water Use Reduction LEED Prerequisites shall be achieved.

WE1 RWater Efficient Landscaping: No Potable

Water Use or No IrrigationThere is to be no irrigation on this project

WE2 Innovative Wastewater Technologies

WE3R-2

P-4Water Use Reduction Requirement of Executive Order 13423

Army Reserve LEED 2009 (V3) Credit Guidance

Fort Sheridan, IL ARC FFR

GENERAL - All credit requirements shall be in accordance with LEED 2009 (V3) Reference Guide.

CATEGORY 1 - SUSTAINABLE SITES (SS)

CATEGORY 2 – WATER EFFICIENCY (WE)

NOTE: The total number of credits marked as "required" or "preferred" does not equal the required number of credit required for certification of

the project. Additional points shall be gained from the remainder of available credits.

R Required. This credit is required to be achieved.

P Preferred. The Government prefers this credit be achieved.

NP Not Permitted. This credit may not be used to achieve the required LEED rating.

All other credits may be pursued by D/B team.

September 2009 version Page 1 of 4

LE

ED

Cre

dit

Pa

rag

rap

h

Cre

dit

re

co

mm

en

da

tio

n

PAR FEATURE Remarks



EAPR1 RFundamental Commissioning of the Building

Energy Systems (PREREQUISITE)LEED Prerequisites shall be achieved.

EAPR2 RMinimum Energy Performance

(PREREQUISITE)LEED Prerequisites shall be achieved.

EAPR3 RFundamental Refrigerant Management


EA1R-6

P-9Optimize Energy Performance

A minimum energy reduction of 30% improvement relative to ASHRAE 90.1-2007 is

required by the Corps of Engineers (Refer to Specification Section 01 02 00.00 48 ,

Part 12). LEED Credits to be determined based on energy costs.

EA2 On-Site Renewable Energy

EA3 NP Enhanced Commissioning

EA4 P Enhanced Refrigerant Management

EA5 NP Measurement & Verification This credit is not permitted.

EA6 NP Green Power This credit is not permitted

MRPR1 R

Storage & Collection of Recyclables


MR1.1 P-3Building Reuse: Maintain Existing Walls,

Floors & Roof

MR1.2 P-1Building Reuse: Maintain Interior

Nonstructural Elements

MR2R-1

P-2Construction Waste Management Divert 50% From Disposal is required.

MR3 NP Materials Reuse

MR4 P Recycled Content

Relates to EPA Comprehensive Procurement Guideline compliance. Federal

regulations require purchase of products with recycled content that contribute to this

credit.

MR5 P Regional Materials

MR6 P Rapidly Renewable Materials

MR7 P Certified Wood

CATEGORY 3 – ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE (EA)

CATEGORY 4 – MATERIALS AND RESOURCES (MR)


LE

ED

Cre

dit

Pa

rag

rap

h

Cre

dit

re

co

mm

en

da

tio

n

PAR FEATURE Remarks



IEQPR1 R Minimum IAQ Performance (PREREQUISITE) LEED Prerequisites shall be achieved.

IEQPR2 REnvironmental Tobacco Smoke (ETS) Control

(PREREQUISITE)

LEED prerequisites shall be achieved. Army Reserve policy require smoke free

buildings, which meets the intent of this prerequisite.

IEQ1 Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring

IEQ2 NP Increased Ventilation This credit is not permitted.

IEQ3.1 PConstruction IAQ Management Plan: During

Construction

IEQ3.2 PConstruction IAQ Management Plan: Before

Occupancy

IEQ4.1 PLow Emitting Materials: Adhesives &

Sealants

IEQ4.2 P Low Emitting Materials: Paints & Coatings

IEQ4.3 P Low Emitting Materials: Carpet Systems

IEQ4.4 PLow Emitting Materials: Composite Wood &

Agrifiber Products

IEQ5 P Indoor Chemical & Pollutant Source Control

IEQ6.1 Controllability of Systems: LightingOpen-office furniture systems for Unit Commons and similar spaces will not include

task lighting.

IEQ6.2 Controllability of Systems: Thermal Comfort

IEQ7.1 P Thermal Comfort: Design

IEQ7.2 NP Thermal Comfort: Verification This credit is not permitted.

IEQ8.1 Daylight & Views: Daylight

IEQ8.2 Daylight & Views: Views

CATEGORY 5 – INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)


LE

ED

Cre

dit

Pa

rag

rap

h

Cre

dit

re

co

mm

en

da

tio

n

PAR FEATURE Remarks



CATEGORY 6 – INNOVATION IN DESIGN (ID)

ID1.1 Innovation in Design

ID1.2 p Innovation in Design




IDc2 R LEED Accredited Professional This credit is required.

CATEGORY 7 – REGIONAL PRIORITY (RP)

Project ZIP Code: 93928https://www.usgbc.org/RPC/RegionalPriorityCredits.aspx?CMSPageID=2435

RP1.1 p

RP1.2 p

RP1.3 p

RP1.4 p

TOTALThe contractor must provide all required credits and select enough additional credits

to deliver a project with the required LEED rating.

Certified 40-49 points Silver 50-59 points Gold 60-79 points Platinum 80 points and above



SECTION 01 35 26.00 06

GOVERNMENT SAFETY REQUIREMENTS05/10

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY ENGINEERS (ASSE/SAFE)

ASSE/SAFE A10.32 (2004) Fall Protection

ASSE/SAFE Z359.1 (2007) Safety Requirements for Personal Fall Arrest Systems, Subsystems and Components

ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)

ASME B30.22 (2005) Articulating Boom Cranes

ASME B30.3 (2004) Construction Tower Cranes

ASME B30.5 (2007) Mobile and Locomotive Cranes

ASME B30.8 (2004) Floating Cranes and Floating Derricks

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

NFPA 10 (2007; Errata 2007; AMD 1 2007)Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers

NFPA 241 (2009) Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations

NFPA 51B (2003) Fire Prevention During Welding, Cutting, and Other Hot Work

NFPA 70 (2008; AMD 1 2008) National Electrical Code-2008 Edition

NFPA 70E (2009; Errata 2009)Standards for Electrical Safety in the Workplace


EM 385-1-1 (September 15, 2008)U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Safety and Health Requirements Manual

U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

29 CFR 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards

SECTION 01 35 26.00 06 Page 1


29 CFR 1910.146 Permit-required Confined Spaces

29 CFR 1915 Confined and Enclosed Spaces and Other Dangerous Atmospheres in Shipyard Employment

29 CFR 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction

29 CFR 1926.500 Fall Protection

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; Submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval/acceptance, or for information only. The following shall be submitted:


Accident Prevention Plan (APP); G

Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA); G

Site Safety & Health Officer Qualifications(SSHO); G

Proof of qualification for Crane Operators; G

Crane Critical Lift Plan; G

SD-06 Test Reports

Reports

Submit reports as their incidence occurs, in accordance with the requirements of the paragraph entitled, "Reports."

Accident Reports

Monthly Exposure Reports

Crane Reports

Regulatory Citations and Violations

SD-07 Certificates

Confined Space Entry Permit

Hot work permit

License Certification

Submit one copy of each permit/certificate attached to each daily Quality Control Report.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

a. Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO). The qualified or competent

SECTION 01 35 26.00 06 Page 2


person who is responsible for the on-site safety and health management required for the contract project work.

b. Competent Person for Fall Protection. A person who is capable of identifying hazardous or dangerous conditions in the personal fall arrest system or any component thereof, as well as their application and use with related equipment, and has the authority to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate the hazards of falling.

c. High Visibility Accident. Any mishap which may generate publicity and/or high visibility.

d. Medical Treatment. Treatment administered by a physician or by registered professional personnel under the standing orders of a physician. Medical treatment does not include first aid treatment even through provided by a physician or registered personnel.

e. Qualified Person for Fall Protection. A person with a recognized degree or professional certificate, and who has extensive knowledge, training and experience in the field of fall protection; this person is capable of performing design, analysis, and evaluation of fall protection systems and equipment.

f. Recordable Injuries or Illnesses. Any work-related injury or illness that results in:

(1) Death, regardless of the time between the injury and death, or the length of the illness;

(2) Days away from work (any time lost after day of injury/illness onset);

(3) Restricted work;

(4) Transfer to another job;

(5) Medical treatment beyond first aid;

(6) Loss of consciousness; or

(7) A significant injury or illness diagnosed by a physician or other licensed health care professional, even if it did not result in (1) through (6) above.

g. "USACE" property and equipment specified in USACE EM 385-1-1 should be interpreted as Government property and equipment.

h. Weight Handling Equipment (WHE) Accident. A WHE accident occurs when any one or more of the six elements in the operating envelope fails to perform correctly during operation, including operation during maintenance or testing resulting in personnel injury or death; material or equipment damage; dropped load; derailment; two-blocking; overload; and/or collision, including unplanned contact between the load, crane, and/or other objects. A dropped load, derailment, two-blocking, overload and collision are considered accidents even though no material damage or injury occurs. A component failure (e.g., motor burnout, gear tooth failure, bearing failure) is not considered an accident solely due to material or equipment damage unless the component failure results in damage to other components (e.g., dropped boom, dropped

SECTION 01 35 26.00 06 Page 3


load, roll over, etc.).

i. Low-slope roof. A roof having a slope less than or equal to 4 in 12 (vertical to horizontal).

j. Not Used

k. Certified Construction Health & Safety Technician (CHST). An individual who is currently certified by the Board of Certified Safety Professionals.

l. Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH). An individual who is currently certified by the American Board of Industrial Hygiene.

m. Certified Safety Professional (CSP). An individual who is currently certified by the Board of Certified Safety Professionals.

n. Certified Safety Trained Supervisor (STS). An individual who is currently certified by the Board of Certified Safety Professionals.

o. Associate Safety Professional (ASP). An individual who is currently certified by the Board of Certified Safety Professionals.

1.4 NOT USED

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

In addition to the detailed requirements included in the provisions of this contract, work performed shall comply with USACE EM 385-1-1, and all applicable federal, state, and local, laws, ordinances, criteria, rules and regulations. Submit matters of interpretation of standards to the appropriate administrative agency for resolution before starting work. Where the requirements of this specification, applicable laws, criteria, ordinances, regulations, and referenced documents vary, the most stringent requirements shall apply.

1.6 SITE QUALIFICATIONS, DUTIES AND MEETINGS

1.6.1 Personnel Qualifications

1.6.1.1 Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)

a.) A Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO) shall be provided at the work site at all times and shall be a member of the onsite work organization and be responsible for overall management of the safety and occupational health program. The SSHO shall have the authority to act in all safety matters for the Contractor at all times to perform safety and occupational health management, surveillance, inspections, and safety enforcement for the Contractor. The SSHO shall report to the CQC System Manager and be employed by the prime contractor.

The SSHO shall be:

assigned as SSHO but may have other duties as the CQC System Manager, shall not be the Superintendent.

The SSHO qualifications in resume form shall be submitted per requirements of Section 01 45 04.10 06.

SECTION 01 35 26.00 06 Page 4


b.) The SSHO shall have a competency experience Level as follows and the Contractor must show evidence that this individual has met these requirements and has completed OSHA training, is trained in First Aid, and CPR. When an alternate is required for the project, the alternate shall have the same the same competency experience level and other qualifications as the SSHO.

Competency Experience Levels:

Level 3: A minimum of 5 years safety work on similar projects.30-hour OSHA construction safety class or equivalent within the last 3 years.An average of at least 24 hours of formal safety training each year for the past 5 years with training for competent person status for at least the following 4 areas of competency: Scaffolding; Fall protection; Hazardous energy; Confined space

c.) The superintendent and the CQC system manager shall be equally qualified as the SSHO and shall be capable of performing the full duties of the SSHO during any very brief period of work when the SSHO is absent. To insure that safety and health conditions are maintained/enforced at all times,and a SSHO is present at all times, the Contractor shall designate an alternate to perform the safety and health requirements stated herein to cover any extended period when the SSHO can not be present, such as during absences for vacations/extended sickness, or when there are multiple shifts that requires additional coverage. The alternate shall have the same qualifications/training/ education requirements as the SSHO.

d.) The Contractor shall identify a SSHO for this projectand shall submit qualifications to the Government for acceptance. A copy of the letter to the SSHO signed by an authorized official of the firm describing responsibilities and delegating authority to stop work when safety or occupational health of workers is compromised must be provided to the Government. Additionally, the SSHO shall be either a college graduate with 5 years of previous institutional or commercial construction safety experience.

e.) Acceptance of the Contractor's SSHO is required prior to the start of construction. Acceptance is conditional and will be predicated on satisfactory performance during construction. The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to make changes to operations including removal of personnel, as necessary, to obtain a safe work site. At no time will the job be permitted to operate without a SSHO on duty at the work site.

f.) Duties of the SSHO shall include, as a minimum, the following in addition to the duties now listed per other paragraphs of this Section:

(1) Prepare the Contractor's Safety Plan, and Activity Hazard Analysis for each definable feature of work;

(2) Provide safety indoctrination to all construction site visitors;

(3) Ensure the Contractor's accepted Accident Prevention Plan is carried out;

(4) Ensure that all Contractor/subcontractor employees have all HTRW, asbestos, and lead paint training, and their personnel protection equipment

SECTION 01 35 26.00 06 Page 5


meets applicable OSHA/EPA requirements;

(5) Conducts daily walkthrough of the site ensuring work is being accomplished safely and occupational health is not compromised;

(6) Attend and participate in all preparatory and initial quality control phase meetings;

(7) Conduct weekly safety meetings for all workers;

(8) Conduct monthly supervisory safety meetings;

(9) Provide accident reports;

(10)Produce a Daily Safety Report of activities performed and attach this report to the Contractor's Quality Control Report.

(11)Provide minutes for weekly and monthly safety meetings, minutes to be attached wit the Daily Safety Report.

1.6.1.2 Competent Person for Confined Space Entry

Provide a competent person for confined space meeting the definition and requirements of EM 385-1-1.

1.6.1.3 Crane Operators

Crane operators shall meet the requirements in USACE EM 385-1-1, Section 16 and Appendix G. In addition, for mobile cranes with Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) rated capacitates of 50,000 pounds or greater, crane operators shall be designated as qualified by a source that qualifies crane operators (i.e., union, a government agency, or and organization that tests and qualifies crane operators). Proof of current qualification shall be provided.

1.6.2 Personnel Duties

1.6.2.1 Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)

a. Conduct daily safety and health inspections and maintain a written log which includes area/operation inspected, date of inspection, identified hazards, recommended corrective actions, estimated and actual dates of corrections. Safety inspection logs shall be attached to the Contractors' daily quality control report.

b. Conduct mishap investigations and complete required reports. Maintain the OSHA Form 300 for prime and sub-contractors.

c. Maintain applicable safety reference material on the job site.

d. Attend the pre-construction conference, pre-work safety conference, pre-work meetings including preparatory inspection meeting, and periodic in-progress meetings.

e. Implement and enforce accepted APPS and AHAs.

f. Maintain a safety and health deficiency tracking system that monitors outstanding deficiencies until resolution. A list of unresolved safety and health deficiencies shall be posted on the safety

SECTION 01 35 26.00 06 Page 6


bulletin board.

g. Ensure sub-contractor compliance with safety and health requirements.

h. Other duties as identified per Specification Section 01 45 04.10 06.

h. Other duties as identified per Specification Section 01 45 04.10 06.

Failure to perform the above duties shall result in dismissal of the SSHO, and/or CQC System Manager, and/or superintendent and a project work stoppage. The project work stoppage will remain in effect pending approval of a suitable replacement.

1.6.3 Meetings

1.6.3.1 Prework Safety Conference

a. Contractor representatives who have a responsibility or significant role in accident prevention on the project shall attend the prework safety conference. The purpose of the prework safety conference is for the Contractor and the Contracting Officer's representatives to become acquainted and explain the functions and operating procedures of their respective organizations and to reach mutual understanding relative to the administration of the overall project's APP before the initiation of work. This includes the project superintendent, Site Safety and Health Officer, Quality Control System Manager, or any other assigned safety and health professionals who participated in the development of the APP (including the Activity Hazard Analyses (AHAs) and special plans, program and procedures associated with it).

b. The Contractor shall discuss the details of the submitted APP to include incorporated plans, programs, procedures and a listing of anticipated AHAs that will be developed and implemented during the performance of the contract. This list of proposed AHAs will be reviewed at the conference and an agreement will be reached between the Contractor and the Contracting Officer's representative as to which phases will require an analysis. In addition, a schedule for the preparation, submittal, review, and acceptance of AHAs shall be established to preclude project delays.

c. Deficiencies in the submitted APP will be brought to the attention of the Contractor at the prework safety conference,and the Contractor shall revise the plan to correct deficiencies and re-submit it for acceptance. Work shall not begin until there is an accepted APP.

d. The functions of a prework safety conference, may take place at the Post-Award Kickoff meeting for Design Build Contracts.

1.6.3.2 Weekly Safety Meetings

Shall be conducted and documented as required by EM 385-1-1. Minutes showing contract title, signatures of attendees and a list of topics discussed shall be attached to the Contractors' daily quality control report.

1.6.3.3 Work Phase Meetings

The appropriate AHA shall be reviewed and attendance documented by the Contractor at the preparatory, initial, and follow-up control phases of

SECTION 01 35 26.00 06 Page 7


quality control inspection in accordance with Section 01 45 04.10 06 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL. The analysis should be used during daily inspections to ensure the implementation and effectiveness of safety and health controls; and the results reported on the daily QC Report.

1.7 TRAINING

1.7.1 New Employee Indoctrination

New employees (prime and sub-contractor) will be informed of specific site hazards before they begin work. Documentation of this orientation shall be kept on file at the project site.

1.7.2 Periodic Training

Provide Safety and Health Training in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1 and the accepted APP. Ensure all required training has been accomplished for all onsite employees.

1.7.3 Training on Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA)

Prior to beginning a new control phase, training will be provided to all affected employees to include a review of the AHA to be implemented.

1.8 ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN (APP)

a. The Contractor shall use a qualified person to prepare the written site-specific APP. Prepare the APP in accordance with the format and requirements of USACE EM 385-1-1 and as supplemented herein. Cover all paragraph and subparagraph elements in USACE EM 385-1-1, Appendix A, "Minimum Basic Outline for Accident Prevention Plan". Specific requirements for some of the APP elements are described below. The APP shall be job-specific and shall address any unusual or unique aspects of the project or activity for which it is written. The APP shall interface with the Contractor's overall safety and health program. Any portions of the Contractor's overall safety and health program referenced in the APP shall be included in the applicable APP element and made site-specific. The Government considers the Prime Contractor to be the "controlling authority" for all work site safety and health of the subcontractors. Contractors are responsible for informing their subcontractors of the safety provisions under the terms of the contract and the penalties for noncompliance, coordinating the work to prevent one craft from interfering with or creating hazardous working conditions for other crafts, and inspecting subcontractor operations to ensure that accident prevention responsibilities are being carried out. The APP shall be signed by the person and firm (senior person) preparing the APP, the Contractor, the designated site safety and health officer, the CQC system manager, the contractor's on-site superintendent, and any designated CSP and/or CIH.

b. Submit the APP to the Contracting Officer 15 calendar days prior to the date of the prework safety conference for acceptance. Work cannot proceed without an accepted APP. The Contracting Officer reviews and comments on the Contractor's submitted APP and accepts it when it meets the requirements of the contract provisions.

c. Acceptance is conditional and will be predicated on satisfactory performance during the construction. Once accepted by the Contracting Officer, the APP and attachments will be enforced as part of the contract. Disregarding the provisions of this contract or the accepted APP will be

SECTION 01 35 26.00 06 Page 8


cause for stopping of work, at the discretion of the Contracting Officer, until the matter has been rectified. Work cannot proceed without an accepted APP.

d. Once work begins, changes to the accepted APP shall be made with the knowledge and concurrence of the Contracting Officer, project superintendent, SSHO and Construction Quality Control System Manager. Should any hazard become evident, stop work in the area, and secure the area. The project superintendent shall inform/notify the Contracting Officer within 24 hours of discovery, both verbally and in writing, and develop a plan for resolution as soon as possible to eliminate/ remove the hazard. In the interim, all necessary action shall be taken to restore and maintain safe working conditions in order to safeguard onsite personnel, visitors, the public (as defined by ANSI/ASSE A10.34,) and the environment.

e. Copies of the accepted plan will be maintained at the Resident Engineer's office and at the contractor's job site office.

f. The APP shall be continuously reviewed and amended, as necessary, throughout the life of the contract. Unusual or high-hazard activities not identified in the original APP shall be incorporated in the plan as they are discovered.

1.8.1 EM 385-1-1 Contents

In addition to the requirements outlines in Appendix A of USACE EM 385-1-1, the following is required:

a. Names and qualifications (resumes including education, training, experience and certifications) of all site safety and health personnel designated to perform work on this project to include the designated site safety and health officer and other competent and qualified personnel to be used such as CSPs, CIHs, STSs, CHSTs. The duties of each position shall be specified.

b. Qualifications of competent and of qualified persons. As a minimum, competent persons shall be designated and qualifications submitted for each of the following major areas: excavation; scaffolding; fall protection; hazardous energy; confined space; health hazard recognition, evaluation and control of chemical, physical and biological agents; personal protective equipment and clothing to include selection, use and maintenance.

c. Confined Space Entry Plan. Develop a confined space entry plan in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1, applicable OSHA standards 29 CFR 1910, 29 CFR 1915, and 29 CFR 1926, and any other federal, state and local regulatory requirements identified in this contract. Identify the qualified person's name and qualifications, training, and experience. Delineate the qualified person's authority to direct work stoppage in the event of hazardous conditions. Include procedure for rescue by contractor personnel and the coordination with emergency responders. (If there is no confined space work, include a statement that no confined space work exists and none will be created.)

d. Crane Critical Lift Plan. Prepare and sign weight handling critical lift plans for lifts over 75 percent of the capacity of the crane or hoist at any radius of lift; lifts involving more than one crane or hoist; lifts of personnel; and lifts involving non-routine rigging or

SECTION 01 35 26.00 06 Page 9


operation, sensitive equipment, or unusual safety risks. The plan shall be submitted 15 calendar days prior to on-site work and include the requirements of USACE EM 385-1-1, Section 16.C.18. and the following:

(1) For lifts of personnel, the plan shall demonstrate compliance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.550(g).

e. Fall Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Plan. The plan shall be site specific and address all fall hazards in the work place and during different phases of construction. It shall address how to protect and prevent workers from falling to lower levels when they are exposed to fall hazards above (6)six feet. A qualified person for fall protection shall prepare and sign the plan. The plan shall include fall protection and prevention systems, equipment and methods employed for every phase of work, responsibilities, assisted rescue, self-rescue and evacuation procedures, training requirements, and monitoring methods. Fall Protection and Prevention Plan shall be revised every six months for lengthy projects, reflecting any changes during the course of construction due to changes in personnel, equipment, systems or work habits. The accepted Fall Protection and Prevention Plan shall be kept and maintained at the job site for the duration of the project. The Fall Protection and Prevention Plan shall be included in the Accident Prevention Plan (APP).

f. Excavation Plan. The safety and health aspects prepared in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.

g. Training Records and Requirements. List of mandatory training and certifications which are applicable to this project (e.g. explosive actuated tools, confined space entry, fall protection, crane operation, vehicle operator, forklift operators, personal protective equipment); list of requirements for periodic retraining/certification; outline requirements for supervisory and employee safety meetings.

1.9 ACTIVITY HAZARD ANALYSIS (AHA)

a) The Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) format shall be in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1 as modified by the Louisville District, using CELRL Form 1259, 01 November 2001, the Form is attached at the end of this section. Submit the AHA for review at least 7 calendar days prior to the start of each phase. Format subsequent AHAs as amendments to the APP.

b)An AHA will be developed by the Contractor for every operation involving a type of work presenting hazards not experienced in previous project operations or where a new work crew or subcontractor is to perform work. In addition, AHA's are needed using the project schedule as the basis for the activities performed. Any activities listed on the project schedule will require an AHA. The AHA's will either be developed by the contractor, supplier or subcontractor and provided to the prime contractor for submittal to the Contracting Officer. The analysis must identify and evaluate hazards and outline the proposed methods and techniques for the safe completion of each phase of work. At a minimum, define activity being performed, sequence of work, specific safety and health hazards anticipated, control measures (to include personal protective equipment) to eliminate or reduce each hazard to acceptable levels, equipment to be used, inspection requirements, training requirements for all involved, and the competent person in charge of that phase of work. The analysis should be used during daily inspections to ensure the implementation and

SECTION 01 35 26.00 06 Page 10


effectiveness of the activity's safety and health controls. For work with fall hazards, including fall hazards associated with scaffold erection and removal, identify the appropriate fall arrest systems. For work with materials handling equipment, address safeguarding measures related to materials handling equipment. For work requiring excavations, include requirements for safeguarding excavations.

c. The analysis should be used during daily inspections to ensure the implementation and effectiveness of the activity's safety and health controls.

d. The AHA list will be reviewed periodically (at least monthly) at the Contractor supervisory safety meeting and updated as necessary when procedures, scheduling, or hazards change.

e. Activity hazard analyses shall be updated as necessary to provide an effective response to changing work conditions and activities. The on-site superintendent, site safety and health officer and competent persons used to develop the AHAs, including updates, shall sign and date the AHAs before they are implemented.

f. The activity hazard analyses shall be developed using the project schedule as the basis for the activities performed. Any activities listed on the project schedule will require an AHA. The AHAs will be developed by the contractor, supplier or subcontractor and provided to the prime contractor for submittal to the Contracting Officer.

1.10 DISPLAY OF SAFETY INFORMATION

Within 1 calendar day after commencement of work, erect a safety bulletin board at the job site. The safety bulletin board shall include information and be maintained as required by EM 385-1-1, Section 01.A.06. Additional items required to be posted include:

a. Confined space entry permit.

b. Hot work permit.

1.11 SITE SAFETY REFERENCE MATERIALS

Maintain safety-related references applicable to the project, including those listed in the article "References." Maintain applicable equipment manufacturer's manuals.

1.12 EMERGENCY MEDICAL TREATMENT

Contractors will arrange for their own emergency medical treatment. Government has no responsibility to provide emergency medical treatment.

1.13 REPORTS

1.13.1 Accident Reports

a. For recordable injuries and illnesses, and property damage accidents resulting in at least $2,000 in damages, the Prime Contractor shall conduct an accident investigation to establish the root cause(s) of the accident, complete the USACE Accident Report Form 3394 and provide the report to the Contracting Officer within 5 calendar days of the accident. The Contracting Officer will provide copies of any

SECTION 01 35 26.00 06 Page 11


required or special forms.

b. For any weight handling equipment accident (including rigging gear accidents) the Prime Contractor shall conduct an accident investigation to establish the root cause(s) of the accident, complete the WHE Accident Report (Crane and Rigging Gear) form and provide the report to the Contracting Officer within 30 calendar days of the accident. Crane operations shall not proceed until cause is determined and corrective actions have been implemented to the satisfaction of the contracting officer. The Contracting Officer will provide a blank copy of the accident report form.

1.13.2 Accident Notification

Notify the Contracting Officer as soon as practical, but not later than four hours, after any accident meeting the definition of Recordable Injuries or Illnesses or High Visibility Accidents, property damage equal to or greater than $2,000, or any weight handling equipment accident. Information shall include contractor name; contract title; type of contract; name of activity, installation or location where accident occurred; date and time of accident; names of personnel injured; extent of property damage, if any; extent of injury, if known, and brief description of accident (to include type of construction equipment used, PPE used, etc.). Preserve the conditions and evidence on the accident site until the Government investigation team arrives on-site and Government investigation is conducted.

1.13.3 Monthly Exposure Reports

Monthly exposure reporting to the Contracting Officer is required to be attached to the monthly billing request. This report is a compilation of employee-hours worked each month for all site workers, both prime and subcontractor. The Contracting Officer will provide copies of any special forms.

1.13.4 Regulatory Citations and Violations

Contact the Contracting Officer immediately of any OSHA or other regulatory agency inspection or visit, and provide the Contracting Officer with a copy of each citation, report, and contractor response. Correct violations and citations promptly and provide written corrective actions to the Contracting Officer.

1.13.4 Crane Reports

Submit crane inspection reports required in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1, Appendix H and as specified herein with Daily Reports of Inspections.

1.13.5 Certificate of Compliance

The Contractor shall provide a Certificate of Compliance for each crane entering an activity under this contract (see Contracting Officer for a blank certificate). Certificate shall state that the crane and rigging gear meet applicable OSHA regulations (with the Contractor citing which OSHA regulations are applicable, e.g., cranes used in construction, demolition, or maintenance shall comply with 29 CFR 1926 and USACE EM 385-1-1 Section 16 and Appendix I. Certify on the Certificate of Compliance that the crane operator(s) is qualified and trained in the operation of the crane to be used. The Contractor shall also certify that

SECTION 01 35 26.00 06 Page 12


all of its crane operators working on the DOD activity have been trained in the proper use of all safety devices (e.g., anti-two block devices). These certifications shall be posted on the crane.

1.14 HOT WORK

Prior to performing "Hot Work" (welding, cutting, etc.) or operating other flame-producing/spark producing devices, a written permit shall be requested from the Contracting Officer. CONTRACTORS ARE REQUIRED TO MEET ALL CRITERIA BEFORE A PERMIT IS ISSUED. The Contractor will provide at least two (2) twenty (20) pound 4A:20 BC rated extinguishers for normal "Hot Work". All extinguishers shall be current inspection tagged, approved safety pin and tamper resistant seal. It is also mandatory to have a designated FIRE WATCH for any "Hot Work" done at this activity. The Fire Watch shall be trained in accordance with NFPA 51B and remain on-site for a minimum of 30 minutes after completion of the task or as specified on the hot work permit.

When starting work in the facility, Contractors shall require their personnel to familiarize themselves with the location of the nearest fire alarm boxes and place in memory the emergency Installation's Fire Division phone number. ANY FIRE, NO MATTER HOW SMALL, SHALL BE REPORTED TO THE CITY OF HIGHWOOD FIRE DEPARTMENT IMMEDIATELY.

1.15 SEVERE STORM PLAN

In the event of a severe storm warning, the Contractor must:

a. Secure outside equipment and materials and place materials that could be damaged in protected areas.

b. Check surrounding area, including roof, for loose material, equipment, debris, and other objects that could be blown away or against existing facilities.

c. Ensure that temporary erosion controls are adequate.

1.16 FACILITY OCCUPANCY CLOSURE

Streets, walks, and other facilities occupied and used by the Government/ installation shall not be closed or obstructed without written permission from the Contracting Officer.

1.17 GAS PROTECTION

Contractor shall have one or more employees properly trained and experienced in operation and calibration of gas testing equipment and formally qualified as gas inspectors who shall be on duty during times workers are in confined spaces. Their primary functions shall be to test for gas and operate testing equipment. Unless equipment of constant supervisory type with automatic alarm is employed, gas tests shall be made at least every 2 hours or more often when character of ground or experience indicates gas may be encountered. A gas test shall be made before workmen are permitted to enter the excavation after an idle period exceeding one-half hour.

Readings shall be permanently recorded daily, indicating the concentration of gas, point of test, and time of test. Submit copies of the gas test readings to the Contracting Officer at the end of each work day.

SECTION 01 35 26.00 06 Page 13


Special requirements, coordination, and precautions will apply to areas that contain a hazardous atmosphere or, by virtue of their use or physical character, may be oxygen deficient. A check by Government is required prior to entering confined space. Surveillance and monitoring shall be required in these types of work spaces by both Contractor and Government personnel.

1.18 HIGH NOISE LEVEL PROTECTION

Operations performed by the Contractor that involve the use of equipment with output of high noise levels (jackhammers, air compressors, and explosive-actuated devices) shall be scheduled for weekends and after duty working hours during the hours 17:00 (5:00 PM) and 22:00 (10:00 PM). Use of any such equipment shall be approved in writing by the Contracting Officer prior to commencement of work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FALL PROTECTION ANCHORAGE

Fall protection anchorage, conforming to ASSE/SAFE Z359, installed under the supervision of a qualified person in fall protection, shall be left in place for continued customer use and so identified by signage stating the capacity of the anchorage (strength and number of persons who may be tied-off to it at any one time).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION AND/OR OTHER WORK

The Contractor shall comply with USACE EM 385-1-1, NFPA 241, the APP, the AHA, Federal and/or State OSHA regulations, and other related submittals and installation/activity fire and safety regulations. The most stringent standard shall prevail.

3.1.1 Hazardous Material Use

Each hazardous material must receive approval prior to being brought onto the job site or prior to any other use in connection with this contract. Allow a minimum of 10 working days for processing of the request for use of a hazardous material.

3.1.2 Hazardous Material Exclusions

Notwithstanding any other hazardous material used in this contract, radioactive materials or instruments capable of producing ionizing/non-ionizing radiation (with the exception of radioactive material and devices used in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1 such as nuclear density meters for compaction testing and laboratory equipment with radioactive sources) as well as materials which contain asbestos, mercury or polychlorinated biphenyls, di-isocynates, lead-based paint are prohibited. The Contracting Officer, upon written request by the Contractor, may consider exceptions to the use of any of the above excluded materials.

3.1.3 Unforeseen Hazardous Material

If material that may be hazardous to human health upon disturbance during

SECTION 01 35 26.00 06 Page 14


construction operations is encountered, stop that portion of work and notify the Contracting Officer immediately. Within 14 calendar days the Government will determine if the material is hazardous. If material is not hazardous or poses no danger, the Government will direct the Contractor to proceed without change. If material is hazardous and handling of the material is necessary to accomplish the work, the Government will issue a modification pursuant to "FAR 52.243-4, Changes" and "FAR 52.236-2, Differing Site Conditions."

3.2 PRE-SWITCHOVER COORDINATION MEETING

Electrical power must be maintained throughout the construction period. Contractors are required to apply for utility switchover at least 15 days in advance. As a minimum, the request should include the location of the switchover, utilities being affected, duration of work and any necessary sketches. Special requirements for electrical switchover requests are contained elsewhere in this specification section. Once approved, and prior to beginning work on the utility system requiring shut down; the Contractor shall attend a pre-switchover coordination meeting with the Contracting Officer and the Installation representative, Public Utilities representative to review the scope of work and the lock-out/tag-out procedures for worker protection. No work will be performed on energized electrical circuits unless proof is provided that no other means exist.

3.3 CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY (LOCKOUT/TAGOUT)

Contractor shall ensure that each employee is familiar with and complies with these procedures and USACE EM 385-1-1, Section 12, Control of Hazardous Energy

Contracting Officer will, at the Contractor's request, apply lockout/tagout tags and take other actions that, because of experience and knowledge are known to be necessary to make the particular equipment safe to work on for government owned and operated systems.

No person, regardless of position or authority, shall operate any switch, valve, or equipment that has an official lockout/tagout tag attached to it, nor shall such tag be removed except as provided in this section. No person shall work on any energized equipment including, but not limited to activities such as erecting, installing, constructing, repairing, adjusting, inspecting, un-jamming, setting up, trouble shooting, testing, cleaning, dismantling, servicing and maintaining machines equipment of processes until an evaluation has been conducted identifying the energy source and the procedures which will be taken to ensure the safety of personnel.

When work is to be performed on electrical circuits, only qualified personnel shall perform work on electrical circuits.

A supervisor who is required to enter an area protected by a lockout/tagout tag will be considered a member of the protected group provided he notifies the holder of the tag stub each time he enters and departs from the protected area.

Identification markings on building light and power distribution circuits shall not be relied on for established safe work conditions.

Before clearance will be given on any equipment other than electrical (generally referred to as mechanical apparatus), the apparatus, valves, or

SECTION 01 35 26.00 06 Page 15


systems shall be secured in a passive condition with the appropriate vents, pins, and locks.

Pressurized or vacuum systems shall be vented to relieve differential pressure completely.

Vent valves shall be tagged open during the course of the work.

Where dangerous gas or fluid systems are involved, or in areas where the environment may be oxygen deficient, system or areas shall be purged, ventilated, or otherwise made safe prior to entry.

3.3.1 Tag Placement

Lockout/tagout tags shall be completed in accordance with the regulations printed on the back thereof and attached to any device which, if operated, could cause an unsafe condition to exist.

If more than one group is to work on any circuit or equipment, the employee in charge of each group shall have a separate set of lockout/tagout tags completed and properly attached.

When it is required that certain equipment be tagged, the Government will review the characteristics of the various systems involved that affect the safety of the operations and the work to be done; take the necessary actions, including voltage and pressure checks, grounding, and venting, to make the system and equipment safe to work on; and apply such lockout/tagout tags to those switches, valves, vents, or other mechanical devices needed to preserve the safety provided. This operation is referred to as "Providing Safety Clearance."

3.3.2 Tag Removal

When any individual or group has completed its part of the work and is clear of the circuits or equipment, the supervisor, project leader, or individual for whom the equipment was tagged shall turn in his signed lockout/tagout tag stub to the Contracting Officer. That group's or individual's lockout/tagout tags on equipment may then be removed on authorization by the Contracting Officer.

3.4 FALL HAZARD PROTECTION AND PREVENTION PROGRAM

The Contractor shall establish a fall protection and prevention program, for the protection of all employees exposed to fall hazards. The program shall include company policy, identify responsibilities, education and training requirements, fall hazard identification, prevention and control measures, inspection, storage, care and maintenance of fall protection equipment and rescue and evacuation procedures.

3.4.1 Training

The Contractor shall institute a fall protection training program. As part of the Fall Hazard Protection and Prevention Program, the Contractor shall provide training for each employee who might be exposed to fall hazards. A competent person for fall protection shall provide the training. Training requirements shall be in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1, Section 21.B.

SECTION 01 35 26.00 06 Page 16


3.4.2 Fall Protection Equipment and Systems

The Contractor shall enforce use of the fall protection equipment and systems designated for each specific work activity in the Fall Protection and Prevention Plan and/or AHA at all times when an employee is exposed to a fall hazard or on a surface 6 feet or more above lower levels. Fall protection systems such as guardrails/toeboards, personnel fall arrest system, safety nets, etc., are required when working within 6 feet of any leading edge and employees shall be protected from fall hazards as specified in EM 385-1-1, Section. In addition to the required fall protection systems, safety skiff, personal floatation devices, life rings etc., are required when working above or next to water in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1, paragraphs 21N through 21N.04. Personal fall arrest systems are required when working from an articulating or extendible boom, swing stages, or suspended platform. In addition, personal fall arrest systems are required when operating other equipment such as scissor lifts if the work platform is capable of being positioned outside the wheelbase. The need for tying-off in such equipment is to prevent ejection of the employee from the equipment during raising, lowering, or travel. Fall protection must comply with 29 CFR 1926.500, Subpart M, USACE EM 385-1-1 and ASSE/SAFE A10.32.

3.4.2.1 Personal Fall Arrest Equipment

Personal fall arrest equipment, systems, subsystems, and components shall meet ASSE/SAFE Z359.1. Only a full-body harness with a shock-absorbing lanyard or self-retracting lanyard is an acceptable personal fall arrest body support device. Body belts may only be used as a positioning device system (for uses such as steel reinforcing assembly and in addition to an approved fall arrest system). Harnesses shall have a fall arrest attachment affixed to the body support (usually a Dorsal D-ring) and specifically designated for attachment to the rest of the system. Only locking snap hooks and carabiners shall be used. Webbing, straps, and ropes shall be made of synthetic fiber. The maximum free fall distance when using fall arrest equipment shall not exceed (6 feet). The total fall distance and any swinging of the worker (pendulum-like motion) that can occur during a fall shall always be taken into consideration when attaching a person to a fall arrest system.

3.4.3 Fall Protection for Roofing Work

Fall protection controls shall be implemented based on the type of roof being constructed and work being performed. The roof area to be accessed shall be evaluated for its structural integrity including weight-bearing capabilities for the projected loading.

a. Low Sloped Roofs:

(1) For work within (6 feet) of an edge, on low-slope roofs, personnel shall be protected from falling by use of personal fall arrest systems, guardrails, or safety nets.

(2) For work greater than (6 feet) from an edge, warning lines shall be erected and installed in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.500 and USACE EM 385-1-1.

b. Steep-Sloped Roofs: Work on steep-sloped roofs requires a personal fall arrest system, guardrails with toe-boards, or safety nets. This requirement also includes residential or housing type construction.

SECTION 01 35 26.00 06 Page 17


3.4.4 Existing Anchorage

Existing anchorages, to be used for attachment of personal fall arrest equipment, shall be certified (or re-certified) by a qualified person for fall protection in accordance with ASSE/SAFE Z359.1. Exiting horizontal lifeline anchorages shall be certified (or re-certified) by a registered professional engineer with experience in designing horizontal lifeline systems.

3.4.5 Horizontal Lifelines

Horizontal lifelines shall be designed, installed, certified and used under the supervision of a qualified person for fall protection as part of a complete fall arrest system which maintains a safety factor of 2 (29 CFR 1926.500).

3.4.6 Guardrails and Safety Nets

Guardrails and safety nets shall be designed, installed and used in accordance with EM 385-1-1 and 29 CFR 1926 Subpart M.

3.4.7 Rescue and Evacuation Procedures

When personal fall arrest systems are used, the contractor must ensure that the mishap victim can self-rescue or can be rescued promptly should a fall occur. A Rescue and Evacuation Plan shall be prepared by the contractor and include a detailed discussion of the following: methods of rescue; methods of self-rescue; equipment used; training requirement; specialized training for the rescuers; procedures for requesting rescue and medical assistance; and transportation routes to a medical facility. The Rescue and Evacuation Plan shall be included in the Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) for the phase of work, in the Fall Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Plan, and the Accident Prevention Plan (APP).

3.5 SCAFFOLDING

Employees shall be provided with a safe means of access to the work area on the scaffold. Climbing of any scaffold braces or supports not specifically designed for access is prohibited. Access to scaffold platforms greater than 6 (six) feet in height shall be accessed by use of a scaffold stair system. Vertical ladders commonly provided by scaffold system/tower manufacturers shall not be used for accessing scaffold platforms greater than 6 (six) feet in height. The use of an adequate gate is required. Contractor shall ensure that employees are qualified to perform scaffold erection and dismantling. Do not use scaffold without the capability of supporting at least four times the maximum intended load or without appropriate fall protection as delineated in the accepted fall protection and prevention plan. Stationary scaffolds must be attached to structural building components to safeguard against tipping forward or backward. Special care shall be given to ensure scaffold systems are not overloaded. Side brackets, used to extend scaffold platforms on self-supported scaffold systems for the storage of material is prohibited. The first tie-in shall be at the height equal to 4 times the width of the smallest dimension of the scaffold base. Work platforms shall be placed on mud sills. Scaffold or work platform erectors shall have fall protection during the erection and dismantling of scaffolding or work platforms that are more than 6 (six) feet. Delineate fall protection requirements when working above 6 (six) feet or above dangerous operations in the Fall Protection and Prevention

SECTION 01 35 26.00 06 Page 18


(FP&P) Plan and Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) for the phase of work. For additional requirements, see Section 00 80 00.00 06, paragraph 1.43 SCAFFOLDING.

3.5.1 Stilts

The use of stilts in conjunction with scaffolds is prohibited. Stilts shall not be used for gaining additional height for construction, renovation, repair or maintenance work; see EM 385-1-1 for types of scaffolds where this requirement applies.

3.6 EQUIPMENT

3.6.1 Material Handling Equipment

a. Material handling equipment such as forklifts shall not be modified with work platform attachments for supporting employees unless specifically delineated in the manufacturer's printed operating instructions.

b. The use of hooks on equipment for lifting of material must be in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

c. Operators of forklifts or power industrial trucks shall be licensed in accordance with OSHA.

3.7 Weight Handling Equipment

a. Cranes and derricks shall be equipped as specified in EM 385-1-1, Section 16.

b. The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer 15 days in advance of any cranes entering the activity so that necessary quality assurance spot checks can be coordinated. Contractor's operator shall remain with the crane during the spot check.

c. The Contractor shall comply with the crane manufacturer's specifications and limitations for erection and operation of cranes and hoists used in support of the work. Erection shall be performed under the supervision of a designated person (as defined in ASME B30.5). All testing shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedures.

d. The Contractor shall comply with ASME B30.5 for mobile and locomotive cranes, ASME B30.22 for articulating boom cranes, ASME B30.3 for construction tower cranes, and ASME B30.8 for floating cranes and floating derricks.

e. Under no circumstance shall a Contractor make a lift at or above 90% of the cranes rated capacity in any configuration.

f. When operating in the vicinity of overhead transmission lines, operators and riggers shall be alert to this special hazard and shall follow the requirements of USACE EM 385-1-1 Section 11 and ASME B30.5 or ASME B30.22 as applicable.

g. Crane suspended personnel work platforms (baskets) shall not be used unless the Contractor proves that using any other access to the work location would provide a greater hazard to the workers or is impossible. Personnel shall not be lifted with a line hoist or friction crane.

SECTION 01 35 26.00 06 Page 19


h. Portable fire extinguishers shall be inspected, maintained, and recharged as specified in NFPA 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.

i. All employees shall be kept clear of loads about to be lifted and of suspended loads.

j. The Contractor shall use cribbing when performing lifts on outriggers.

k. The crane hook/block must be positioned directly over the load. Side loading of the crane is prohibited.

l. A physical barricade must be positioned to prevent personnel from entering the counterweight swing (tail swing) area of the crane.

m. Certification records which include the date of inspection, signature of the person performing the inspection, and the serial number or other identifier of the crane that was inspected shall always be available for review by Contracting Officer personnel.

n. Written reports listing the load test procedures used along with any repairs or alterations performed on the crane shall be available for review by Contracting Officer personnel.

o. Certify that all crane operators have been trained in proper use of all safety devices (e.g. anti-two block devices).

p. Each load shall be rigged/attached independently to the hook/master-link in such a fashion that the load cannot slide or otherwise become detached. Christmas-tree lifting (multiple rigged materials) is not allowed.

q. The presence of Government personnel does not relieve the Contractor of an obligation to comply with all applicable safety regulations. The Government will investigate all complaints of unsafe or unhealthful working conditions received in writing from contractor employees, federal civilian employees, or military personnel.

3.8 EXCAVATIONS

The competent person shall perform soil classification in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.

3.8.1 Utility Locations

Prior to digging, the appropriate digging permit must be obtained. All underground utilities in the work area must be positively identified by a private utility locating service in addition to any station locating service and coordinated with the station utility department. Any markings made during the utility investigation must be maintained throughout the contract.

3.8.2 Utility Location Verification

The Contractor must physically verify underground utility locations by hand digging using wood or fiberglass handled tools when any adjacent construction work is expected to come within three feet of the underground system. Digging within 2 feet of a known utility must not be performed by means of mechanical equipment; hand digging shall be used. If construction

SECTION 01 35 26.00 06 Page 20


is parallel to an existing utility the utility shall be exposed by hand digging every 100 feet if parallel within 5 feet of the excavation.

3.8.3 Shoring Systems

Trench and shoring systems must be identified in the accepted safety plan and AHA. Manufacture tabulated data and specifications or registered engineer tabulated data for shoring or benching systems shall be readily available on-site for review. Job-made shoring or shielding shall have the registered professional engineer stamp, specifications, and tabulated data. Extreme care must be used when excavating near direct burial electric underground cables.

3.8.4 Trenching Machinery

Trenching machines with digging chain drives shall be operated only when the spotters/laborers are in plain view of the operator. Operator and spotters/laborers shall be provided training on the hazards of the digging chain drives with emphasis on the distance that needs to be maintained when the digging chain is operating. Documentation of the training shall be kept on file at the project site.

3.9 UTILITIES WITHIN CONCRETE SLABS

Utilities located within concrete slabs or pier structures, bridges, and the like, are extremely difficult to identify due to the reinforcing steel used in the construction of these structures. Whenever contract work involves concrete chipping, saw cutting, or core drilling, the existing utility location must be coordinated with station utility departments in addition to a private locating service. Outages to isolate utility systems shall be used in circumstances where utilities are unable to be positively identified. The use of historical drawings does not alleviate the contractor from meeting this requirement.

3.10 ELECTRICAL

3.10.1 Conduct of Electrical Work

Underground electrical spaces must be certified safe for entry before entering to conduct work. Cables that will be cut must be positively identified and de-energized prior to performing each cut. Positive cable identification must be made prior to submitting any outage request for electrical systems. Arrangements are to be coordinated with the Contracting Officer and Station Utilities for identification. The Contracting Officer will not accept an outage request until the Contractor satisfactorily documents that the circuits have been clearly identified. Perform all high voltage cable cutting remotely using hydraulic cutting tool. When racking in or live switching of circuit breakers, no additional person other than the switch operator will be allowed in the space during the actual operation. Plan so that work near energized parts is minimized to the fullest extent possible. Use of electrical outages clear of any energized electrical sources is the preferred method. When working in energized substations, only qualified electrical workers shall be permitted to enter. When work requires Contractor to work near energized circuits as defined by the NFPA 70, high voltage personnel must use personal protective equipment that includes, as a minimum, electrical hard hat, safety shoes, insulating gloves with leather protective sleeves, fire retarding shirts, coveralls, face shields, and safety glasses. In addition, provide electrical arc flash protection for personnel as required by NFPA 70E.

SECTION 01 35 26.00 06 Page 21


Insulating blankets, hearing protection, and switching suits may also be required, depending on the specific job and as delineated in the Contractor's AHA.

3.10.2 Portable Extension Cords

Portable extension cords shall be sized in accordance with manufacturer ratings for the tool to be powered and protected from damage. All damaged extension cords shall be immediately removed from service. Portable extension cords shall meet the requirements of NFPA 70.

3.11 WORK IN CONFINED SPACES

The Contractor shall comply with the requirements in Section 06.I of USACE EM 385-1-1, OSHA 29 CFR 1910.146 and OSHA 29 CFR 1926.21(b) (6). Any potential for a hazard in the confined space requires a permit system to be used.

a. Entry Procedures. Prohibit entry into a confined space by personnel for any purpose, including hot work, until the qualified person has conducted appropriate tests to ensure the confined or enclosed space is safe for the work intended and that all potential hazards are controlled or eliminated and documented. (See Section 34 of USACE EM 385-1-1 for entry procedures.) All hazards pertaining to the space shall be reviewed with each employee during review of the AHA.

b. Forced air ventilation is required for all confined space entry operations and the minimum air exchange requirements must be maintained to ensure exposure to any hazardous atmosphere is kept below its' action level.

c. Sewer wet wells require continuous atmosphere monitoring with audible alarm for toxic gas detection.


SECTION 01 35 26.00 06 Page 22

ACTIVITY HAZARDS ANALYSIS

Project: Job:

Prepared By: Reviewed By:

Date Prepared (mm-dd-yyyy):

CELRL Form 1259, 1 November 2001 Previous Versons are Obsolete and Should Not Be Used (Proponent: CELRL-SO)

Recommended Protective Clothing & Equipment:

S

e

v

e

r

i

t

y

P r o b a b i l i t y

Frequent Likely Occasional Seldom Unlikely

E = Extremely High Risk

H = High Risk

M = Moderate Risk

Risk Assessment Code (RAC):

JOB STEPS HAZARDSACTIONS TO ELIMINATE OR

MINIMIZE HAZARDS

E E H H M

E

H

M

H H M L

M M L L

L L L L

Catastrophic

Critical

Marginal

Negligible

Page 1 of 5

EM 385-1-1

(PARA REF)

01 35 26.01 06 ATTACHMENTS - 1

ACTIVITY HAZARDS ANALYSISDate Prepared (mm-dd-yyyy):

Project: Job:


MINIMIZE HAZARDS

Page 2 of 5

EM 385-1-1

(PARA REF)


01 35 26.01 06 ATTACHMENTS - 2

ACTIVITY HAZARDS ANALYSIS Page 3 of 5


Project: Job:


MINIMIZE HAZARDS

EM 385-1-1

(PARA REF)


01 35 26.01 06 ATTACHMENTS - 3



Project: Job:


MINIMIZE HAZARDS

EM 385-1-1

(PARA REF)


01 35 26.01 06 ATTACHMENTS - 4



Project: Job:

EQUIPMENT TO BE USED INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS TRAINING REQUIREMENTS


01 35 26.01 06 ATTACHMENTS - 5

CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE This certificate shall be signed by an official of the company that provides cranes for any application under this contract. Post a completed certificate on each crane brought ontoproperty. PRIME CONTRACTOR /PHONE:

CONTRACT NUMBER:

CRANE SUPPLIER/PHONE: (if different from prime contractor)

CRANE NUMBER: (i.e., ID number)

CRANE MANUFACTURER/TYPE/CAPACITY: CRANE OPERATOR'S NAME(S): I certify that: 1. The above noted crane conforms to applicable OSHA regulations.The following regulations apply:___________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ 2. That the operators noted above have been trained and are qualified for the operation of the above noted crane. 3. That the operators noted above have been trained not to bypass safety devices during lifting operations. COMPANY OFFICIAL SIGNATURE:

DATE:

COMPANY OFFICIAL NAME/TITLE:

POST ON CRANE (IN CAB OR VEHICLE)

01 35 26.01 06 ATTACHMENTS - 6


SECTION 01 42 00

SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS08/10

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

Various publications are referenced in other sections of the specifications to establish requirements for the work. These references are identified in each section by document number, date and title. The document number used in the citation is the number assigned by the standards producing organization, (e.g. ASTM B 564 Nickel Alloy Forgings). However, when the standards producing organization has not assigned a number to a document, an identifying number has been assigned for reference purposes.

1.2 ORDERING INFORMATION

The addresses of the standards publishing organizations whose documents are referenced in other sections of these specifications are listed below, and if the source of the publications is different from the address of the sponsoring organization, that information is also provided. Documents listed in the specifications with numbers which were not assigned by the standards producing organization should be ordered from the source by title rather than by number.

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY ENGINEERS (ASSE/SAFE)1800 East Oakton StreetDes Plaines, IL 60018-2187Ph: 847-699-2929Fax: 847-768-3434E-mail: [email protected]: http://www.asse.org

ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)Three Park Avenue, M/S 10ENew York, NY 10016-5990Ph: 800-854-7179 or 800-843-2763Fax: 212-591-7674E-mail: [email protected]: http://www.asme.org

ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O. Box C700West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959Ph: 610-832-9585Fax: 610-832-9555E-mail: [email protected]: http://www.astm.org

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)1 Batterymarch ParkQuincy, MA 02169-7471Ph: 617-770-3000 or 800-344-3555Fax: 617-770-0700E-mail: [email protected]



Internet: http://www.nfpa.org

U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)Order CRD-C DOCUMENTS from:Headquarters Points of contact441 G Street NWWashington, DC 20314-1000Ph: 202-761-0011E-mail: [email protected]: http://www.wes.army.mil/SL/MTC/handbook.htmOrder Other Documents from:USACE Publications DepotAttn: CEHEC-IM-PD2803 52nd AvenueHyattsville, MD 20781-1102Ph: 301-394-0081Fax: 301-394-0084E-mail: [email protected]: http://www.usace.army.mil/publications or http://www.hnd.usace.army.mil/techinfo/engpubs.htm

U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)Ariel Rios Building1200 Pennsylvania Avenue, N.W.Washington, DC 20004Ph: 202-272-0167for Fax and E-mail see belowInternet: http://www.epa.gov--- Some EPA documents are available only from: National Technical Information Service (NTIS)5301 Shawnee RoadAlexandria, VA 22312Ph: 703-605-6050 or 1-688-584-8332Fax: 703-605-6900E-mail: [email protected]: http://www.ntis.gov

U. S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)2101 L St NW, Suite 500Washington, D.C. 20037Fax: 202-828-5110E-mail: [email protected]: http://www.usgbc.org

U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)8601 Adelphi Road College Park, MD 20740-6001Ph: 866-272-6272Fax: 301-837-0483E-mail: [email protected]: http://www.archives.govOrder documents from:Superintendent of DocumentsU.S.Government Printing Office (GPO)732 North Capitol Street, NWWashington, DC 20401Ph: 202-512-1800Fax: 202-512-2104E-mail: [email protected]



Internet: http://www.gpoaccess.gov

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used




SECTION 01 45 01.10 06

USACE QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM (QCS), FOR ARMY RESERVE CENTERS (ARCs)12/09

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 Contract Administration

The Government will use the Resident Management System for Windows (RMS) to assist in its monitoring and administration of this contract. The Contractor must use the Government-furnished Construction Contractor Module of RMS, referred to as QCS, to record, maintain, and submit various information throughout the contract period. The Contractor module, user manuals, updates, and training information can be downloaded from the RMS web site. This joint Government-Contractor use of RMS and QCS will facilitate electronic exchange of information and overall management of the contract. QCS provides the means for the Contractor to input, track, and electronically share information with the Government in the following areas:

AdministrationFinancesQuality ControlSubmittal MonitoringSchedulingImport/Export of Data

Project submittals will be made utilizing PROJENET SUBMITTAL REGISTER.

1.1.1 Correspondence and Electronic Communications

For ease and speed of communications, both Government and Contractor will, to the maximum extent feasible, exchange correspondence and other documents in electronic format. Correspondence, pay requests and other documents comprising the official contract record will also be provided in paper format, with signatures and dates where necessary. Paper documents will govern, in the event of discrepancy with the electronic version.

1.1.2 Other Factors

Particular attention is directed to Contract Clause, "Schedules for Construction Contracts", Contract Clause, "Payments", Section 01 32 01.00 06PROJECT SCHEDULE, Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, and Section 01 45 01.10 06 USACE QUALITY CONTROL, which have a direct relationship to the reporting to be accomplished through QCS. Also, there is no separate payment for establishing and maintaining the QCS database; all costs associated therewith will be included in the contract pricing for the work.

1.2 QCS SOFTWARE

QCS is a Windows-based program that can be run on a stand-alone personal computer or on a network. The Government will make available the QCS software to the Contractor after award of the construction contract. Prior to the Pre-Construction Conference, the Contractor will be responsible to download, install and use the latest version of the QCS software from the Government's RMS Internet Website. Upon specific justification and request by the Contractor, the Government can provide QCS on CD-ROM. Any program

SECTION 01 45 01.10 06 Page 1


updates of QCS will be made available to the Contractor via the Government RMS Website as they become available.

1.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

The following is the minimum system configuration that the Contractor must have to run QCS:

QCS and QAS System

Hardware

IBM-compatible PC with 1000 MHz Pentium or higher processor

256+ MB RAM for workstation / 512+ MB RAM for server

1 GB hard drive disk space for sole use by the QCS system

3-1/2 inch high-density floppy drive

Compact Disk (CD) Reader 8x speed or higher

SVGA or higher resolution monitor (1024x768, 256 colors)

Mouse or other pointing device

Windows compatible printer. (Laser printer must have 4 MB+ of RAM)

Connection to the Internet, minimum 56k BPS

Software

MS Windows 2000 or higher

QAS-Word Processing software: MS Word 2000 or newer

Latest version of: Netscape Navigator, Microsoft Internet Explorer, or other browser that supports HTML 4.0 or higher

Electronic mail (E-mail) MAPI compatible

Virus protection software that is regularly upgraded with all issued manufacturer's updates

1.4 RELATED INFORMATION

1.4.1 QCS User Guide

After contract award, download instructions for the installation and use of QCS from the Government RMS Internet Website. In case of justifiable difficulties, the Government will provide the Contractor with a CD-ROM containing these instructions.

1.4.2 Contractor Quality Control(CQC) Training

The use of QCS will be discussed with the Contractor's QC System Manager during the mandatory CQC Training class.

SECTION 01 45 01.10 06 Page 2


1.5 CONTRACT DATABASE

Prior to the pre-construction conference, the Government will provide the Contractor with basic contract award data to use for QCS. The Government will provide data updates to the Contractor as needed, generally by using the Government's SFTP repository built into QCS import/export function. These updates will generally consist of submittal reviews, correspondence status, QA comments, and other administrative and QA data.

1.6 DATABASE MAINTENANCE

Establish, maintain, and update data in the QCS database throughout the duration of the contract at the Contractor's site office. Submit data updates to the Government (e.g., daily reports, submittals, RFI's, schedule updates, payment requests, etc.) using the Government's SFTP repository built into QCS export function. If permitted by the Contracting Officer, e-mail or CD-ROM may be used instead of E-mail (see Paragraph DATA SUBMISSION VIA CD-ROM). The QCS database typically includes current data on the following items:

1.6.1 Administration

1.6.1.1 Contractor Information

Contain within the database the Contractor's name, address, telephone numbers, management staff, and other required items. Within 14 calendar days of receipt of QCS software from the Government, deliver Contractor administrative data in electronic format.

1.6.1.2 Subcontractor Information

Contain within the database the name, trade, address, phone numbers, and other required information for all subcontractors. A subcontractor must be listed separately for each trade to be performed. Assign each subcontractor/trade a unique Responsibility Code, provided in QCS. Within 14 calendar days of receipt of QCS software from the Government, deliver subcontractor administrative data in electronic format.

1.6.1.3 Correspondence

Identify all Contractor correspondence to the Government with a serial number. Prefix correspondence initiated by the Contractor's site office with "S". Prefix letters initiated by the Contractor's home (main) office with "H". Letters must be numbered starting from 0001. (e.g., H-0001 or S-0001). The Government's letters to the Contractor will be prefixed with "C".

1.6.1.4 Equipment

Contain within the Contractor's QCS database a current list of equipment planned for use or being used on the jobsite, including the most recent and planned equipment inspection dates.

1.6.1.5 Management Reporting

QCS includes a number of reports that Contractor management can use to track the status of the project. The value of these reports is reflective of the quality of the data input, and is maintained in the various sections of QCS. Among these reports are: Progress Payment Request worksheet,

SECTION 01 45 01.10 06 Page 3


QA/QC comments, Submittal Register Status, Three-Phase Inspection checklists.

1.6.1.6 Request For Information (RFI)

Exchange all Requests For Information (RFI) using the Built-in RFI generator and tracker in QCS.

1.6.2 Finances

1.6.2.1 Pay Activity Data

Include within the QCS database a list of pay activities that the Contractor must develop in conjunction with the construction schedule. The sum of all pay activities must be equal to the total contract amount, including modifications. Group pay activities Contract Line Item Number (CLIN); the sum of the activities must equal the amount of each CLIN. The total of all CLINs equals the Contract Amount.

1.6.2.2 Payment Requests

Prepare all progress payment requests using QCS. Complete the payment request worksheet, prompt payment certification, and payment invoice in QCS. Update the work completed under the contract, measured as percent or as specific quantities, at least monthly. After the update, generate a payment request report using QCS. Submit the payment request, prompt payment certification, and payment invoice with supporting data using the Government's SFTP repository built into QCS export function. If permitted by the Contracting Officer, e-mail or a CD-ROM may be used. A signed paper copy of the approved payment request is also required, which will govern in the event of discrepancy with the electronic version.

1.6.3 Quality Control (QC)

QCS provides a means to track implementation of the 3-phase QC Control System, prepare daily reports, identify and track deficiencies, document progress of work, and support other Contractor QC requirements. Maintain this data on a daily basis. Entered data will automatically output to the QCS generated daily report. Provide the Government a Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Plan within the time required in Section 01 45 01 USACE QUALITY CONTROL. Within seven calendar days of Government acceptance, submit a QCS update reflecting the information contained in the accepted CQC Plan: schedule, pay activities, features of work, submittal register, QC requirements, and equipment list.

1.6.3.1 Daily Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Reports.

QCS includes the means to produce the Daily CQC Report. The Contractor may use other formats to record basic QC data. However, the Daily CQC Report generated by QCS must be the Contractor's official report. Summarize data from any supplemental reports by the Contractor and consolidate onto the QCS-generated Daily CQC Report. Submit daily CQC Reports as required by Section 01 45 01 USACE QUALITY CONTROL. Electronically submit reports to the Government within 24 hours after the date covered by the report. Also provide the Government a signed, printed copy of the daily CQC report.

1.6.3.2 Deficiency Tracking.

Use QCS to track deficiencies. Deficiencies identified by the Contractor

SECTION 01 45 01.10 06 Page 4


will be numerically tracked using QC punch list items. Maintain a current log of its QC punch list items in the QCS database. The Government will log the deficiencies it has identified using its QA punch list items. The Government's QA punch list items will be included in its export file to the Contractor. Regularly update the correction status of both QC and QA punch list items.

1.6.3.3 QC Requirements

Develop and maintain a complete list of QC testing and required structural and life safety special inspections required by the International Code Council (ICC), transferred and installed property, and user training requirements in QCS. Update all data on these QC requirements as work progresses, and promptly provide this information to the Government via QCS.

1.6.3.4 Three-Phase Control Meetings

Maintain scheduled and actual dates and times of preparatory and initial control meetings in QCS.

1.6.3.5 Labor and Equipment Hours

Log labor and equipment exposure hours on a daily basis. This data will be rolled up into a monthly exposure report.

1.6.3.6 Accident/Safety Reporting

The Government will issue safety comments, directions, or guidance whenever safety deficiencies are observed. The Government's safety comments will be included in its export file to the Contractor. Regularly update the correction status of the safety comments. In addition, utilize QCS to advise the Government of any accidents occurring on the jobsite. This brief supplemental entry is not to be considered as a substitute for completion of mandatory reports, e.g., ENG Form 3394 and OSHA Form 300.

1.6.3.7 Features of Work

Include a complete list of the features of work in the QCS database. A feature of work may be associated with multiple pay activities. However, each pay activity (see subparagraph "Pay Activity Data" of paragraph "Finances") will only be linked to a single feature of work.

1.6.3.8 Hazard Analysis

Use QCS to develop a hazard analysis for each feature of work included in the CQC Plan. Address any hazards, or potential hazards, that may be associated with the work.

1.6.4 Submittal Management

The Government will provide the initial submittal register in electronic format. Thereafter, maintain a complete list of all submittals, including completion of all data columns. Submittals will be made electronically utilizing PROJNET SUBMITTAL REGISTER. Dates on which submittals are received and returned by the Government will be included in PROJNET SUBMITTAL REGISTER.

SECTION 01 45 01.10 06 Page 5


Use QCS to track and transmit all submittals. ENG Form 4025, submittal transmittal form, and the submittal register update must be produced using QCS. QCS and RMS will be used to update, store and exchange submittal registers and transmittals, but will not be used for storage of actual submittals.

1.6.5 Schedule

Develop a construction schedule consisting of pay activities, in accordance with Section 01 32 01.00 06 PROJECT SCHEDULE. Input and maintain in the QCS database this schedule either manually or by using the Standard Data Exchange Format (SDEF) (see Section 01 32 01.00 06 PROJECT SCHEDULE). Include with each pay request the updated schedule.

1.6.6 Import/Export of Data

QCS includes the ability to export Contractor data to the Government and to import submittal register and other Government-provided data from RMS, and schedule data using SDEF.

1.7 IMPLEMENTATION

Contractor use of QCS as described in the preceding paragraphs is mandatory. Ensure that sufficient resources are available to maintain its QCS database, and to provide the Government with regular database updates. QCS shall be an integral part of the Contractor's management of quality control.

1.8 DATA SUBMISSION VIA CD-ROM

The Government-preferred method for Contractor's submission of QCS data is by using the Government's SFTP repository built into QCS export function. Other data should be submitted using E-mail with file attachment(s). For locations where this is not feasible, the Contracting Officer may permit use of CD-ROM for data transfer. Export data onto CDs using the QCS built-in export function. If used, submit CD-ROMs in accordance with the following:

1.8.1 File Medium

Submit in English required data on CD-ROM conforming to industry standards used in the United States.

1.8.2 CD-ROM Labels

Affix a permanent exterior label to each CD-ROM submitted. Indicate on the label in English, the QCS file name, full contract number, contract name, project location, data date, name and telephone number of person responsible for the data.

1.8.3 File Names

The files will be automatically named by the QCS software. The naming convention established by the QCS software must not be altered.

1.9 MONTHLY COORDINATION MEETING

Update the QCS database each workday. At least monthly, generate and submit an export file to the Government with schedule update and progress

SECTION 01 45 01.10 06 Page 6


payment request. As required in Contract Clause "Payments", at least one week prior to submittal, meet with the Government representative to review the planned progress payment data submission for errors and omissions.

Make all required corrections prior to Government acceptance of the export file and progress payment request. Payment requests accompanied by incomplete or incorrect data submittals will be returned. The Government will not process progress payments until an acceptable QCS export file is received.

1.10 NOTIFICATION OF NONCOMPLIANCE

The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor of any detected noncompliance with the requirements of this specification. Take immediate corrective action after receipt of such notice. Such notice, when delivered to the Contractor at the work site, will be deemed sufficient for the purpose of notification.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used


SECTION 01 45 01.10 06 Page 7


SECTION 01 45 04.10 06

CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL08/10

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.

ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

ASTM D 3740 (2004a) Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction

ASTM E 329 (2007) Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing


1.2 PAYMENT

Separate payment will not be made for providing and maintaining an effective Quality Control program, and all costs associated therewith shall be included in the applicable unit prices or lump-sum prices contained in the Bidding Schedule.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Government approval/acceptance is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval, or for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:


Design Quality Control Plan; G

Construction Quality Control Plan; G

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 EXECUTION


The Contractor is responsible for quality control and shall establish and

SECTION 01 45 04.10 06 Page 1


maintain an effective quality control system in compliance with the Contract Clause titled "Inspection of Construction." The quality control system shall consist of plans, procedures, and organization necessary to produce an end product which complies with the contract requirements. The system shall cover all design and construction operations, both onsite and offsite, and shall be keyed to the proposed construction sequence. The site project superintendent will be held responsible for the quality of work on the job and is subject to removal by the Contracting Officer for non-compliance with the quality requirements specified in the contract. The site project superintendent in this context shall be the highest level manager responsible for the overall construction activities at the site, including quality and production. The site project superintendent shall maintain a physical presence at the site at all times, except as otherwise acceptable to the Contracting Officer, and shall be responsible for all construction and construction related activities at the site.

3.2 DESIGN QUALITY CONTROL PLAN (DQCP)

All documents shall be technically reviewed by competent, independent reviewers identified in the DQC Plan. The same element that produced the product shall not perform the independent technical review (ITR). The plan must identify the Independent Technical Review Team and their qualifications. The Contractor shall correct errors and deficiencies in the design documents prior to submitting them to the Government.

The DQC Plan shall be implemented by a Design Quality Control Project Manager (DQCPM) who has the responsibility of being cognizant of and assuring that all documents on the project have been coordinated. This individual shall be a person who has verifiable engineering or architectural design experience and is a registered professional engineer or architect and can be one of the DESIGNERS OF RECORD. The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer, in writing, of the name of the individual, and the name of an alternate person assigned to the position. The Design Quality Control Project Manager (DQCPM) and the Design Project Manager can be the same person.

In addition to these requirements, the design firm shall have a Design Project Manager (PM), who shall coordinate and manage the design for all disciplines and serve as the point of contact on all design related issues. The Design PM shall be a registered Architect or Engineer, with a minimum of tens years overall designer experience (including PM experience) and a minimum of two years Design PM experience. Design PM experience shall be on projects of similar size and complexity.

The Contractor shall include the design schedule in the master project schedule, showing the sequence of events involved in carrying out the project design tasks within the specific contract period. This should be at a detailed level of scheduling sufficient to identify all major design tasks, including those that control the flow of work. The schedule shall include review and correction periods associated with each item. This should reflect calendar days and not dates for each activity. If the schedule is changed, the Contractor shall submit a revised schedule reflecting the change within 7 calendar days. The Contractor shall include in the DQC Plan the discipline-specific checklists to be used during the design and quality control of each submittal.

The Contractor shall furnish for review by the government, not later than 10 days after Notice to Proceed, the Contractor Design Quality Control Plan for the design portion of the contract. The professional quality,

SECTION 01 45 04.10 06 Page 2


technical accuracy and the coordination of all design documents and other services to be provided by the prime Contractor and subcontractor/ consultants is of major importance. A logical and functional quality control program requiring technical and interdisciplinary reviews to eliminate errors and deficiencies in the design documents is required. As a minimum, the DQCP will address the following elements:

Management Approach - Define the specific management-methodology to be followed during the design phase of the work including the relationship between prime contractor and subcontractors/consultants. Address coordination, quality control, communications and lines of responsibility. The DQCP must also cover the process of review and acceptance of construction submittals as specified in Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.

Management Structure - Delineate the organizational structure and interrelationship of management and the design team including all subcontractor and consultants. Identify the key design and review team members showing their specific responsibilities. Either the designer or the reviewer must be a registered professional for the Architectural, Civil, Structural, Mechanical and Electrical disciplines.

List submittals required, dates for submittal, dates for completion of Government review and products required to be submitted. Technical review comments provided by the ITR Team must be submitted with each design submittals. The approved complete checklists shall be submitted at each design phase as part of the project documentation.

Designer of Record (DOR)- The registered professional Engineer, or Architect ultimately responsible and liable for adequacy and safety of the design. DOR review is required on all submittals and DOR approval is required on all submittals of extensions of design and submittals of critical materials. See Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES for definitions of these type submittals.

3.2.1 Acceptance of Plan

Acceptance of the Contractor's Quality Control Plan for Design is required prior to the start of design. Acceptance is conditional and will be predicated on satisfactory performance during the preparation of design documents. The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to make changes in his CQC Plan for Design, and operations including removal of personnel, as necessary, to obtain the quality specified.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION QUALITY CONTROL PLAN (CQCP)

The Contractor shall furnish for review by the Government, not later than 30 days after receipt of notice to proceed, the Contractor Construction Quality Control (CQC) Plan proposed to implement the requirements of the Contract Clause titled "Inspection of Construction." The plan shall identify personnel, procedures, control, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used. The Government will consider an interim plan for the first 30 days of operation. Construction will be permitted to begin only after acceptance of the CQC Plan or acceptance of an interim plan applicable to the particular feature of work to be started. Work outside of the features of work included in an accepted interim plan will not be permitted to begin until acceptance of a CQC Plan or another interim plan containing the additional features of work to be started.

SECTION 01 45 04.10 06 Page 3


3.3.1 Content of the CQC Plan

The CQC Plan shall include, as a minimum, the following to cover all construction operations, both onsite and offsite, including work by subcontractors, fabricators, suppliers, and purchasing agents:

a. A description of the quality control organization, including a chart showing lines of authority and acknowledgment that the CQC staff shall implement the three phase control system for all aspects of the work specified. The staff shall include a CQC System Manager who shall report to someone higher in the Contractor's organization than the project superintendent.

b. The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and authorities of each person assigned a CQC function.

c. A copy of the letter to the CQC System Manager signed by an authorized official of the firm which describes the responsibilities and delegates sufficient authorities to adequately perform the functions of the CQC System Manager, including authority to stop work which is not in compliance with the contract. The CQC System Manager shall issue letters of direction to all other various quality control representatives outlining duties, authorities, and responsibilities. Copies of these letters shall also be furnished to the Government.

d. Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing submittals, including those of subcontractors, offsite fabricators, suppliers, and purchasing agents. These procedures shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.

e. Control, verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test to include the test name, specification paragraph requiring test, feature of work to be tested, test frequency, and person responsible for each test. Include subgrade suitability, fill placement and compaction operations testing requirements and reporting process described in Part 3 of Section 01 02 00.00 48.

f. Procedures for tracking preparatory, initial, and follow-up control phases and control, verification, and acceptance tests including documentation.

g. Procedures for tracking construction deficiencies from identification through acceptable corrective action. These procedures shall establish verification that identified deficiencies have been corrected.

h. Reporting procedures, including proposed reporting formats.

i. A list of the definable features of work. A definable feature of work is a task which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has separate control requirements, and may be identified by different trades or disciplines, or it may be work by the same trade in a different environment. Although each section of the specifications may generally be considered as a definable feature of work, there are frequently more than one definable features under a particular section. This list will be agreed upon during the coordination meeting.

SECTION 01 45 04.10 06 Page 4


3.3.2 Acceptance of Plan

Acceptance of the Contractor's plan is required prior to the start of construction. Acceptance is conditional and will be predicated on satisfactory performance during the construction. The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to make changes in his CQC Plan and operations including removal of personnel, as necessary, to obtain the quality specified.

3.3.3 Notification of Changes

After acceptance of the CQC Plan, the Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer in writing of any proposed change. Proposed changes are subject to acceptance by the Contracting Officer.

3.4 COORDINATION MEETING

After the Preconstruction Conference, before start of construction, and prior to acceptance by the Government of the CQC Plan, the Contractor shall meet with the Contracting Officer or Authorized Representative and discuss the Contractor's quality control system. The CQC Plan shall be submitted for review a minimum of 30 calendar days prior to the Coordination Meeting. During the meeting, a mutual understanding of the system details shall be developed, including the forms for recording the CQC operations, control activities, testing, administration of the system for both onsite and offsite work, and the interrelationship of Contractor's Management and control with the Government's Quality Assurance. Minutes of the meeting shall be prepared by the Government and signed by both the Contractor and the Contracting Officer. The minutes shall become a part of the contract file. There may be occasions when subsequent conferences will be called by either party to reconfirm mutual understandings and/or address deficiencies in the CQC system or procedures which may require corrective action by the Contractor.

3.4.1 Subcontractor CQC Orientation

Before a Subcontractor begins work on the jobsite, the CQC Manager will train the Subcontractor by showing the video tape entitled "CQC - A Bridge (or Pathway) to Success" and answering any questions pertaining to quality control operations. This requirement is waived only if a Subcontractor attended the initial coordination meeting described above. A copy of this video can be borrowed from the Contracting Officer. A record of the orientation shall be documented in the QC Report.

3.5 CONSTRUCTION QUALITY CONTROL ORGANIZATION

3.5.1 Personnel Requirements

a. The requirements for the CQC organization are a CQC System Manager and sufficient number of additional qualified personnel to ensure safety and contract compliance. A Site Safety Health Officer (SSHO) will be required for this contract. The Safety and Health Officer shall be a member of the CQC staff. (See Section 01 35 26.00 06 GOVERNMENT SAFETY REQUIREMENTS for the SSHO qualifications and duties.)

b. Personnel identified in the technical provisions as requiring specialized skills to assure the required work is being performed properly will also be included as part of the CQC organization. The Contractor's

SECTION 01 45 04.10 06 Page 5


CQC staff shall maintain a presence at the site at all times during progress of the work and have complete authority and responsibility to take any action necessary to ensure contract compliance. The CQC staff shall be subject to acceptance by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall provide adequate office space, filing systems and other resources as necessary to maintain an effective and fully functional CQC, and safety/health organization. Complete records of all letters, material submittals, shop drawing submittals, schedules and all other project documentation shall be promptly furnished to the CQC organization by the Contractor. The CQC organization shall be responsible to maintain these documents and records at the site at all times and made available to the SSHO, except as otherwise acceptable to the Contracting Officer.

3.5.2 CQC System Manager Qualifications and Duties

a. The Contractor shall identify as CQC System Manager an individual within the onsite work organization who shall be responsible for overall management of CQC and have the authority to act in all CQC matters for the Contractor. The CQC System Manager shall be either a graduate engineer, graduate architect, or a graduate of construction management, with a minimum of five (5) years construction experience on construction similar to this contract.

b. This CQC System Manager shall be employed by the Prime Contractor and beon the site at all times during construction. An alternate for the CQC System Manager shall be identified in the CQC Plan to serve in the event of the CQC System Manager's absence. The requirements for the alternate shall be the same as for the designated CQC System Manager.

c. The CQC System Manager shall be:

assigned as CQC but may have other quality control duties as identified per the Experience Matrix Table. Shall not be the superintendent.

3.5.3 CQC Personnel

a. The Design Quality Control Manager (DQCM) has the responsibility of being cognizant of and assuring that all documents on the project have been coordinated, and will ensure that all services required by the D-B contract are performed and provided in a manner that meets professional architectural and engineering quality standards. For required qualifications refer to the experience matrix below.

b. In addition to CQC personnel specified elsewhere in the contract, the Contractor shall provide as part of the CQC organization specialized personnel to assist the CQC System Manager for the following areas identified per Experience Matrix Table. These individuals may be employees of the prime or subcontractor. These individuals identified per the Experience Matrix Table, shall be responsible to the CQC System Manager; be physically present at the construction site during work on their areas of responsibility; have the necessary education and/or experience in accordance with the experience matrix listed herein. These individuals in the Experience Matrix Table may perform other duties but must be allowed sufficient time to perform their assigned quality control duties as described in the Quality Control Plan.

c. The word "graduate" below indicates an individual possessing a four-year college degree accredited in the respective field listed.

SECTION 01 45 04.10 06 Page 6


Experience Matrix Table

Area Qualifications

a. SSHO See Section 01 35 29.00 06 SAFETY AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH REQUIREMENTS

b. DQCM (person not required Registered Architect or to be on site at all times) Professional Engineer

c. Mechanical Graduate Mechanical Engineer with 2 yrs experience or person with 5 yrs related experience

d. Electrical Graduate Electrical Engineer with 2 yrs related experience or person with 5 yrs related experience

e. LEED-AP LEED accredited by USGBC (US Green Building Council)

f. Submittals Submittal Clerk with 1 yr experience

g. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Specialist must be a member (TAB) Personnel of AABC or an experienced technician of the firm certified by the NEBB.

h. IT/Communications BICSI Cerified RCDD (Registered Communication Distribution Designer)

i. Roofing RCI Registered Roof Observer

3.5.3.1 Registered Roof Observer

The contractor is required to provide a RCI Registered Roof Observer (RRO) services during all roof related construction activities. The Registered Roof Observers will perform daily oversight and quality control on all roof work to assure compliance with the projects plans and specifications. The RRO will supply recommendations and reports to the Government for review and shall create initial update Asset Management Data file using commercially available industry standard software that is compatible with that used by USAR-IMCOM. The Government will supply the format of the file. The RRO shall provide daily reports per CQC requirements, number of squares of roof placed and the contractor's compliance with specifications and details. The RRO shall take daily color photographs (a minimum 24 photos total for the project) of every type of activity performed that shall include (but not limited to) insulation attachment, application of roofing membrane and flashings, sheet metal installation, kettle operation, material storage/handling and compliance with safety requirements. Photos may be digital but one hard color copy shall be made daily and kept on

SECTION 01 45 04.10 06 Page 7


site.

3.5.3.2 RRO COMMUNICATION WITH THE GOVERNMENT

The Register Roof Observer shall submit all plans, schedules, reports, and documentation directly to the Contracting Officer's Representative concurrent with submission to the CQC System Manager. The RRO shall have direct communication with the Contracting Officer's Representative regarding all elements of the roofing installation process.

3.5.4 Additional Requirement

In addition to the above experience and education requirements the CQC System Manager shall have completed and passed the course entitled "Construction Quality Management For Contractors" within the last 5 years. A copy of the certification shall be provided with the CQCP. This course is periodically offered by the Associated Builders and Constructors, Inc., or Associated General Contractor, Inc., and the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers.

3.5.5 Organizational Changes

The Contractor shall maintain the CQC staff at full strength at all times. When it is necessary to make changes to the CQC staff, the Contractor shall revise the CQC Plan to reflect the changes and submit the changes to the Contracting Officer for acceptance.

3.6 SUBMITTALS AND DELIVERABLES

Submittals, if needed, shall be made as specified in Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. The CQC organization shall be responsible for certifying that all submittals and deliverables are in compliance with the contract requirements. When Section 01 46 10.00 06 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS is included in the contract, the submittals required by those sections shall be coordinated with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES to ensure adequate time is allowed for each type of submittal required.

3.7 CONTROL

Contractor Quality Control is the means by which the Contractor ensures that the construction, to include that of subcontractors and suppliers, complies with the requirements of the contract. At least three phases of control shall be conducted by the CQC System Manager for each definable feature of work as follows:

3.7.1 Preparatory Phase

This phase shall be performed prior to beginning work on each definable feature of work, after all required plans/documents/materials are approved/accepted, and after copies are at the work site. This phase shall include:

a. A review of each paragraph of applicable specifications, reference codes, and standards. A copy of those sections of referenced codes and standards applicable to that portion of the work to be accomplished in the field shall be made available by the Contractor at the preparatory inspection. These copies shall be maintained in the field and available for use by Government personnel until final acceptance of the work.

SECTION 01 45 04.10 06 Page 8


b. A review of the contract drawings.

c. A check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved.

d. Review of provisions that have been made to provide required control inspection and testing.

e. Examination of the work area to assure that all required preliminary work has been completed and is in compliance with the contract.

f. A physical examination of required materials, equipment, and sample work to assure that they are on hand, conform to approved shop drawings or submitted data, and are properly stored.

g. A review of the appropriate activity hazard analysis to assure safety requirements are met.

h. Discussion of procedures for controlling quality of the work including repetitive deficiencies. Document construction tolerances and workmanship standards for that feature of work.

i. A check to ensure that the portion of the plan for the work to be performed has been accepted by the Contracting Officer.

j. Resolve all differences.

k. Discussion of the initial control phase.

l. The Government shall be notified at least 24 hours in advance of beginning the preparatory control phase. This phase shall include a meeting conducted by the CQC System Manager and attended by the superintendent, other CQC personnel (as applicable), and the foreman responsible for the definable feature. The results of the preparatory phase actions shall be documented by separate minutes prepared by the CQC System Manager and attached to the daily CQC report. The Contractor shall instruct applicable workers as to the acceptable level of workmanship required in order to meet contract specifications.

3.7.2 Initial Phase

This phase shall be accomplished at the beginning of a definable feature of work. The following shall be accomplished:

a. A check of work to ensure that it is in full compliance with contract requirements. Review minutes of the preparatory meeting.

b. Verify adequacy of controls to ensure full contract compliance. Verify required control inspection and testing.

c. Establish level of workmanship and verify that it meets minimum acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with required sample panels as appropriate.

d. Resolve all differences.

SECTION 01 45 04.10 06 Page 9


e. Check safety to include compliance with and upgrading of the safety plan and activity hazard analysis. Review the activity analysis with each worker.

f. The Government shall be notified at least 48 hours in advance of beginning the initial phase. Separate minutes of this phase shall be prepared by the CQC System Manager and attached to the daily CQC report. Exact location of initial phase shall be indicated for future reference and comparison with follow-up phases.

g. The initial phase should be repeated for each new crew to work onsite, or any time acceptable specified quality standards are not being met.

3.7.3 Follow-up Phase

Daily checks shall be performed to assure control activities, including control testing, are providing continued compliance with contract requirements, until completion of the particular feature of work. The checks shall be made a matter of record in the CQC documentation. Final follow-up checks shall be conducted and all deficiencies corrected prior to the start of additional features of work which may be affected by the deficient work. The Contractor shall not build upon nor conceal non-conforming work.

3.7.4 Additional Preparatory and Initial Phases

Additional preparatory and initial phases shall be conducted on the same definable features of work if: the quality of on-going work is unacceptable; if there are changes in the applicable CQC staff, onsite production supervision or work crew; if work on a definable feature is resumed after a substantial period of inactivity; or if other problems develop.

3.8 TESTS

3.8.1 Testing Procedure

The Contractor shall perform specified or required tests to verify that control measures are adequate to provide a product which conforms to contract requirements. Upon request, the Contractor shall furnish to the Government duplicate samples of test specimens for possible testing by the Government. Testing includes operation and/or acceptance tests when specified. For QC testing of construction materials including soil, rock, aggregate, asphalt, concrete, and steel, the Contractor shall procure the services of a Corps of Engineers (COE) validated testing laboratory or establish a COE validated testing laboratory at the project site. Technical specifications included in the contract that require materials testing by an approved commercial testing laboratory shall be intended to mean by a COE validated laboratory. The Contractor shall perform the following activities and record and provide the following data:

a. Verify that testing procedures comply with contract requirements.

b. Verify that facilities and testing equipment are available and comply with testing standards.

c. Check test instrument calibration data against certified standards.

SECTION 01 45 04.10 06 Page 10


d. Verify that recording forms and test identification control number system, including all of the test documentation requirements, have been prepared.

e. Results of all tests taken, both passing and failing tests, shall be recorded on the CQC report for the date taken. Specification paragraph reference, location where tests were taken, and the sequential control number identifying the test shall be given. If approved by the Contracting Officer, actual test reports may be submitted later with a reference to the test number and date taken. An information copy of tests performed by an offsite or commercial test facility shall be provided directly to the Contracting Officer. Failure to submit timely test reports as stated may result in nonpayment for related work performed and disapproval of the test facility for this contract.

3.8.2 Testing Laboratories

3.8.2.1 Capability Check

The Government reserves the right to check laboratory equipment in the proposed laboratory for compliance with the standards set forth in the contract specifications and to check the laboratory technician's testing procedures and techniques. Laboratories utilized for testing soils, concrete, asphalt, and steel shall meet criteria detailed in ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 329.

3.8.2.2 Capability Recheck

If the selected laboratory fails the capability check, the Contractor will be assessed a charge of $1,375.00 to reimburse the Government for each succeeding recheck of the laboratory or the checking of a subsequently selected laboratory. Such costs will be deducted from the contract amount due the Contractor.

3.8.3 Onsite Laboratory

The Government reserves the right to utilize the Contractor's control testing laboratory and equipment to make assurance tests, and to check the Contractor's testing procedures, techniques, and test results at no additional cost to the Government.

3.8.4 Furnishing or Transportation of Samples for Testing

Costs incidental to the transportation of samples or materials shall be borne by the Contractor. Samples of materials for test verification and acceptance testing by the Government shall be delivered to the Corps of Engineers Division Laboratory, f.o.b., at the following address:

For delivery by mail:

Geotechnical & Structures LaboratoryMaterial Testing Center (GS-E)U.S. Army Engineer Research and Development Center3909 Halls Ferry RoadVicksburg, MS 39180-6199

Coordination for each specific test, exact delivery location, and dates will be made through the Area Office.

SECTION 01 45 04.10 06 Page 11


3.9 COMPLETION INSPECTION

3.9.1 Punch-Out Inspection

Near the end of the work, or any increment of the work established by a time stated in the SPECIAL CLAUSES clause, "Commencement, Prosecution, and Completion of Work", or by the specifications, the CQC Manager shall conduct an inspection of the work. A punch list of items which do not conform to the approved drawings and specifications shall be prepared and included in the CQC documentation, as required by paragraph DOCUMENTATION. The list of deficiencies shall include the estimated date by which the deficiencies will be corrected. The CQC System Manager or staff shall make a second inspection to ascertain that all deficiencies have been corrected. Once this is accomplished, the Contractor shall notify the Government that the facility is ready for the Government Pre-Final inspection.

3.9.2 Pre-Final Inspection

The Government will perform the pre-final inspection to verify that the facility is complete and ready to be occupied. A Government Pre-Final Punch List may be developed as a result of this inspection. The Contractor's CQC System Manager shall ensure that all items on this list have been corrected before notifying the Government, so that a Final inspection with the customer can be scheduled. Any items noted on the Pre-Final inspection shall be corrected in a timely manner. These inspections and any deficiency corrections required by this paragraph shall be accomplished within the time slated for completion of the entire work or any particular increment of the work if the project is divided into increments by separate completion dates.

3.9.3 Final Acceptance Inspection

The Contractor's Quality Control Inspection personnel, plus the superintendent or other primary management person, and the Contracting Officer's Representative shall be in attendance at the final acceptance inspection. Additional Government personnel including, but not limited to, those from Base/Post Civil Facility Engineer user groups, and major commands may also be in attendance. The final acceptance inspection will be formally scheduled by the Contracting Officer based upon results of the Pre-Final inspection. Notice shall be given to the Contracting Officer at least 14 days prior to the final acceptance inspection and shall include the Contractor's assurance that all specific items previously identified to the Contractor as being unacceptable, along with all remaining work performed under the contract, will be complete and acceptable by the date scheduled for the final acceptance inspection. Failure of the Contractor to have all contract work acceptably complete for this inspection will be cause for the Contracting Officer to bill the Contractor for the Government's additional inspection cost in accordance with the contract clause titled "Inspection of Construction".

3.10 DOCUMENTATION

The Contractor shall maintain current records providing factual evidence that required quality control activities and/or tests have been performed. These records shall include the work of subcontractors and suppliers and shall be on an acceptable form that includes, as a minimum, the following information:

SECTION 01 45 04.10 06 Page 12


a. Contractor/subcontractor and their area of responsibility.

b. Operating plant/equipment with hours worked, idle, or down for repair.

c. Work performed each day, giving location, description, and by whom. When Network Analysis (NAS) is used, identify each phase of work performed each day by NAS activity number.

d. Test and/or control activities performed with results and references to specifications/drawings requirements. The control phase shall be identified (Preparatory, Initial, Follow-up). List of deficiencies noted, along with corrective action.

e. Quantity of materials received at the site with statement as to acceptability, storage, and reference to specifications/drawings requirements.

f. Submittals and deliverables reviewed, with contract reference, by whom, and action taken.

g. Offsite surveillance activities, including actions taken.

h. Job safety evaluations stating what was checked, results, and instructions or corrective actions.

i. Instructions given/received and conflicts in plans and/or specifications.

j. Contractor's verification statement.

k. These records shall indicate a description of trades working on the project; the number of personnel working; weather conditions encountered; and any delays encountered. These records shall cover both conforming and deficient features and shall include a statement that equipment and materials incorporated in the work and workmanship comply with the contract. The original and one copy of these records in report form shall be furnished to the Government daily within 24 hours after the date covered by the report, except that reports need not be submitted for days on which no work is performed. As a minimum, one report shall be prepared and submitted for every 7 days of no work and on the last day of a no work period. All calendar days shall be accounted for throughout the life of the contract. The first report following a day of no work shall be for that day only. Reports shall be signed and dated by the CQC System Manager. The report from the CQC System Manager shall include copies of test reports and copies of reports prepared by all subordinate quality control personnel.

l. Deficiency Tracking System. The Contractor shall maintain a cumulative list of deficiencies identified for the duration of the project. Deficiencies to be listed include those failures, Government oral observations and Notifications of Noncompliance. The list shall be maintained at the project site. Copies of updated listings shall be submitted to the Government at least every 30 days.

SECTION 01 45 04.10 06 Page 13


3.11 RESIDENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM FORMS

Forms are generated by the RMS software.

3.12 NOTIFICATION OF NONCOMPLIANCE

The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor of any detected noncompliance with the foregoing requirements. The Contractor shall take immediate corrective action after receipt of such notice. Such notice, when delivered to the Contractor at the work site, shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose of notification. If the Contractor fails or refuses to comply promptly, the Contracting Officer may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No part of the time lost due to such stop orders shall be made the subject of claim for extension of time or for excess costs or damages by the Contractor.


SECTION 01 45 04.10 06 Page 14


SECTION 01 46 00.00 06

COMMISSIONING OF BUILDING ENERGY SYSTEMS09/08

PART 1 GENERAL

Commissioning of the HVAC, Lighting Control, Domestic Hot Water, Renewable Energy, and On-Site Power systems is the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall employ the services of an independent Commissioning Agent. The Commissioning Agent shall coordinate all aspects of the commissioning process. Commissioning procedures shall conform to the procedures outlined in this specification.

1.1 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-05 Design Data;

Design Review Report; G, ED.

Completed report individually listing each deficiency and the corresponding proposed corrective action shall be submitted concurrent with the submission of the final design.

Commissioning Plan; G, ED.

Outline of the overall commissioning process; the schedule for Pre-Commissioning Checks, Functional Performance Tests, Training, and Turn-Over Instruction as applicable; list of team members who will represent the Contractor during Pre-Commissioning Checks and Functional Performance Tests; Pre-Commissioning Check lists and Functional Performance Tests lists for each building, each system, and each component; shall be submitted at least 14 calendar days prior to start of pre-commissioning checks.

SD-06 Test Reports

Final Commissioning Report Reports; G, ED.

Completed pre-commissioning checklists and functional performance test checklists organized by system and by subsystem and submitted as one package. The results of failed tests shall be included along with a description of the corrective action taken. The report shall include an executive summary of the commissioning process and results and include any seasonal testing scheduled for a later date. The report shall indicate whether systems meet the requirements of the Owner's Project Requirements and the Basis of Design. The training video shall be included. The report shall be submitted no later than 14 calendar days after completion of

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 1


Functional Performance Testing.

SD-07 Certificates

Commissioning Agent; G, ED

The Commissioning Agent shall be a NEBB qualified Systems Commissioning Administrator (SCA) employed by a NEBB certified firm with a minimum of three years of HVAC commissioning experience and at least two projects of similar size and scope; or an AABC Certified Commissioning Agent (CCA) employed by an AABC certified firm with a minimum of three years of HVAC commissioning experience and at least two projects of similar size and scope; or a Professional Engineer (P.E.) with a minimum of five years of HVAC design experience who is not associated with the design of this project, is licensed in the state where this project is located, and has a minimum of three years of HVAC commissioning experience and at least two projects of similar size and scope. The Commissioning Agent's certification of qualifications including the Commissioning Agent's name and firm shall be submitted no later than 30 calendar days after Notice to Proceed. The Commissioning Agent's contract shall be submitted with the Commissioning Agent's qualifications

Certificate of Readiness; G, RE.

Statement issued by the Contractor and signed by the Contractor, the Commissioning Agent, and all other Contractor's Representatives on the Commissioning Team certifying that all equipment, systems, and controls are complete and ready for Functional Performance Tests. Includes start-up reports, completed Pre-Commissioning Checklists, Performance Verification Test Report, and the TAB Report. Submit no later than 14 calendar days prior to Functional Performance Tests.

SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

Systems Manual; G, ED.

Completed manual including the Basis of Design and, for all commissioned systems, the single line diagrams, the as-built sequences of operation, the control drawings, original setpoints, operating instructions, recommended schedule of maintenance if not in the O&M manual, and the recommended schedule for calibrating sensors and actuators. The Systems Manual shall be submitted no later than 14 calendar days after completion of Functional Performance Testing.

1.2 Certificate of Readiness

The Contractor shall issue a Certificate of Readiness certifying that the building energy systems are ready for Functional Performance Testing. The Certificate of Readiness shall include all equipment and system start-up reports, Performance Verification Test Reports, Pre-Commissioning Checklists, TAB Report, and the Building Air Tightness Test Report. The Contractor, the Commissioning Agent, and the Contractor's Quality Control, Mechanical, Electrical, Controls, and Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Representatives shall sign and date the Certificate of Readiness.

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 2


1.3 COMMISSIONING ACTIVITIES

The Contractor shall be responsible for the following procedures described in this specification:

a. Preconstruction Commissioning Meeting - The Commissioning Agent, the Contractor, the Contractor's Quality Control Representative, and the Government shall meet and discuss the commissioning process to include all requirements and submittals as specified in this section no later than 14 days after approval of the Commissioning Agent.

b. Design Review (Design-Build) - The Commissioning Agent shall review the Design Plans and Specifications, the Basis of Design, and the Owner's Project Requirements prior to 60% completion of the design. The Commissioning Agent shall assess the completeness and clarity of the Owner's Project Requirements, verify that the requirements stated in the Owner's Project Requirements are addressed in the Basis of Design, and verify that the Design Plans and Specifications are prepared in accordance with the Basis of Design and the Owner's Project Requirements. The Commissioning Agent shall backcheck the reviewed documents at 95% completion of the design. The Commissioning Agent shall provide a Design Review Report which shall identify any discrepancies between the reviewed documents, deviations in the design from the Basis of Design or Owner's Project Requirements, or deficiencies that would prevent the building energy systems from operating effectively in accordance with the sequence of operation. The Design Review Report shall individually list each deficiency and the corresponding proposed corrective action necessary for proper system operation. The report shall be submitted with the final design submission to the Government. The Contracting Officer's Representative, the Commissioning Agent, and the Designers shall meet, discuss, and resolve any items contained in the report no later than 14 calendar days after submission of the report.

c. Commissioning Plan - The Commissioning Agent shall prepare the Commissioning Plan. The Commissioning Plan shall outline the overall commissioning process, the commissioning schedule, the commissioning team members and responsibilities, and documentation requirements. The commissioning schedule shall include Pre-Commissioning Checks, Functional Performance Tests, Training, and Turn-Over Instruction as applicable. The Commissioning Agent shall prepare the Pre-Commissioning Checklists for each building, for each system, and for each component before the start of the checks. Appendix A provides examples of the minimum detail required for Pre-Commissioning Checklists. The Commissioning Agent shall prepare the Functional Performance Test lists for each building, for each system, and for each component before the start of the tests. Appendix B provides examples of the minimum detail required for Functional Performance Test Lists.

d. Construction - The Commissioning Agent shall review all building energy system related shop drawings and submittals and verify the submitted equipment complies with the contract requirements and the requirements of the Basis of Design and the Owner's Project Requirements. The Commissioning Agent shall review the status of the Pre-Commissioning Checklists, and shall verify the items on the checklists conform to the submittals, are installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and are installed in compliance with the contract requirements and the requirements of the Basis of Design and the Owner's Project Requirements. The Commissioning Agent shall perform an onsite

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 3


review and shall verify that the systems are in compliance with all specifications prior to the Functional Performance Tests.

e. Pre-Commissioning Checks - The Commissioning Agent, Contractor's Quality Control Representative, and the Government shall perform pre-commissioning checks and complete the Pre-Commissioning Checklists. Each applicable item in the checklist for each item of equipment shall be inspected and the checklist shall be initialed by the Commissioning Team. The Commissioning Team shall only initial items on the checklist that are complete and witnessed.

e. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Verification Testing - After the TAB process is performed and the balance report is submitted, the Commissioning Agent shall perform a verification test. The extent of verification shall be to the discretion of the commissioning agent; however a minimum of 15% of all readings shall be verified. If readings deviate more than + or - 10% from the report the TAB contractor shall be directed to re-balance the system and submit new reports.

f. Pre-Functional Performance Test Meeting - The Commissioning Agent, the Contractor, the Contractor's Quality Control Representative, and the Government shall meet prior to Functional Performance Tests to determine if all Functional Performance Test Prerequisites have been completed and to discuss the reports submitted with the Certificate of Readiness and the Functional Performance Test procedures

g. Functional Performance Tests - The Commissioning Agent shall lead the Functional Performance Tests in accordance with the Commissioning Plan.

h. Systems Manual - The Commissioning Agent shall develop a system manual. The systems manual shall be a separate document from the Operating and Maintenance Manuals required by related sections. The system manual shall include the Basis of Design and, for all commissioned systems, the single line diagrams, the as-built sequences of operation, the control drawings, original setpoints, operating instructions, recommended schedule of maintenance if not in the O&M manual, and the recommended schedule for calibrating sensors and actuators.

i. Training - The Commissioning Agent shall schedule, supervise and video all training of the owner's maintenance staff on all building energy equipment and systems. The video shall be turned over to the COR as part of the final commissioning report for future reference. The Commissioning agent shall provide the video on the appropriate media as directed by the Contracting Officer's Representative.

j. Operating and Maintenance Manuals Turn-over - The Commissioning Agent shall assist and schedule the submission of all O&M Manuals and Warranties.

k. Turn-over Instruction - When the building energy systems are ready to be turned-over to the owner, the Commissioning Agent shall schedule a final session for operation and maintenance personnel instruction. The system design engineers, installing contractors, major equipment suppliers and any other interested parties should be in attendance. This instruction shall include a review of all systems and equipment operations, additional hands-on instruction where required and a question and answer period.

l. Final Commissioning Report - The Commissioning Agent shall prepare a Final Commissioning Report as required. The report shall include an executive summary of the commissioning process and results and include any

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 4


seasonal testing scheduled for a later date. The report shall indicate whether systems meet the requirements of the Owner's Project Requirements and the Basis of Design. The report shall detail any deficiencies found during the testing and the corrective actions taken. The report shall include all Pre-Commissioning Checklists and Functional Performance Test Checklists, and any substantiating information.

1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

The Functional Performance Tests described in this Section shall begin only after all work and testing required in related Sections, including Section 23 09 23 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC AND OTHER LOCAL BUILDING SYSTEMS, LRL Section 07 25 00.00 06 BUILDING AIR BARRIER SYSTEM, and Section 23 05 93.00 10 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC, have been successfully completed, and after all test and inspection reports and operation and maintenance manuals required in these Sections have been submitted and approved.

The following shall be completed prior to Functional Performance Tests:

a. All equipment and systems have been completed, calibrated, and operate in accordance with contract documents.b. Performance Verification Tests have been completed and the Performance Verification Test Report has been submitted. Performance Verifications Tests shall demonstrate that all physical and functional requirements of the contract have been met. The Contractor shall demonstrate that the control systems perform in accordance with the sequence of operations.c. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing has been completed and the TAB Report has been submitted.d. The Building Air Tightness Tests have been completed and the Building Air Tightness Test Reports have been submitted.e. The Pre-Commissioning Checklists have been competed and submitted.f. The Certificate of Readiness has been submitted.g. The Pre-Functional Performance Test Meeting has occurred.

1.5 COMMUNICATION WITH THE GOVERNMENT

The Commissioning Agent shall submit all plans, schedules, reports, and documentation directly to the Contracting Officer's Representative concurrent with submission to the CQC System Manager. The Commissioning Agent shall have direct communication with the Contracting Officer's Representative regarding all elements of the commissioning process.

PART 2 PRODUCTS(NOT APPLICABLE)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 COMMISSIONING TEAM AND CHECKLISTS

The Contractor shall designate team members to participate in the pre-commissioning checks and the functional performance testing specified herein.

The team members for pre-commissioning checks shall be as follows:

Designation Function

QA Contracting Officer's Quality Assurance Representative QC Contractor's Quality Control Representative

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 5


CA Commissioning Agent

The team members for functional performance testing shall be as follows:

Contracting Officer's Quality Assurance Representative Contractor's Quality Control Representative Commissioning Agent Contractor's Controls Representative Contractor's Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Representative Design Agent's Representative

The following may be required to participate as team members during Pre-Commissioning Checks and Functional Performance Testing at the request of the Commissioning Agent:

Contractor's Mechanical Representative Contractor's Electrical Representative Using Agent's Representative

The commissioning team shall complete the Pre-Commissioning Check Lists and the Functional Performance Tests lists prepared by the Commissioning Agent. Acceptance by each commissioning team member of each pre-commissioning checklist item shall be indicated by initials and date. Acceptance by each commissioning team member of each functional performance test checklist shall be indicated by signature and date.

3.2 TESTS

The pre-commissioning checks and functional performance tests shall be performed in a manner which essentially duplicates the checking, testing, and inspection methods established in the related Sections. Where checking, testing, and inspection methods are not specified in other Sections, methods shall be established to verify that the system is installed and performs in accordance with contract documents. Testing and verification shall demonstrate that all HVAC components have been installed, that each control device and item of equipment operates, and that the system operates in accordance with contract documents. Requirements in related Sections are independent from the requirements of this Section and shall not be used to satisfy any of the requirements specified in this Section. The Contractor shall provide all materials, services, and labor required to perform the pre-commissioning checks and functional performance tests. A pre-commissioning check or functional performance test shall be aborted if any system deficiency prevents the successful completion of the test or if any participating non-Government commissioning team member of which participation is specified is not present for the test. The Contractor shall reimburse the Government for all costs associated with effort lost due to tests that are aborted. These costs shall include salary, travel costs and per diem (where applicable) for Government commissioning team members.

3.2.1 Pre-Commissioning Checks

Pre-commissioning checks shall be performed for ductwork, piping, each major item of equipment, and the control systems. Deficiencies discovered during these checks shall be corrected and retested in accordance with the applicable contract requirements.

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 6


3.2.2 Functional Performance Tests

Functional performance tests shall be performed for each major item of equipment, each HVAC system, and the HVAC control systems. Functional performance tests shall verify all control responses, safeties, interlocks, operating modes, capacities, and all other relevant contract requirements comply with contract documents. Functional performance tests shall begin only after all pre-commissioning checks have been successfully completed, the Certificate of Readiness has been submitted, and the Pre-Functional Performance Test Meeting has occurred. Tests shall prove all modes of the sequences of operation, and shall verify all other relevant contract requirements. Tests shall begin with equipment or components and shall progress through subsystems to complete systems. Upon failure of any functional performance test checklist item, the Contractor shall correct all deficiencies in accordance with the applicable contract requirements. The checklist shall then be repeated until it has been completed with no errors. If TAB Verification has not been completed prior to Functional Performance Testing, it shall be verified during Functional Performance Testing.

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 7


APPENDIX A

PRE-COMMISSIONING CHECKLISTS

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 8


Pre-commissioning checklist - Piping

For [_____] Piping System

Checklist Item QA QC CA

Installation

a. Piping complete. ___ ___ ___

b. As-built shop drawings submitted. ___ ___ ___

c. Piping flushed and cleaned. ___ ___ ___

d. Strainers cleaned. ___ ___ ___

e. Valves installed as required. ___ ___ ___

f. Piping insulated as required. ___ ___ ___

g. Thermometers and gauges installed as required. ___ ___ ___

h. Verify operation of valves. ___ ___ ___ i. Air vents installed as specified. ___ ___ ___

j. Flexible connectors installed as specified ___ ___ ___

k. Verify that piping has been labeled and valves identified as specified. ___ ___ ___

Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB)

a. Hydrostatic test complete. ___ ___ ___ b. TAB operation complete. ___ ___ ___

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 9


Pre-commissioning Checklist - Ductwork

For Air Handler: [_____]


Installation

a. Ductwork complete. ___ ___ ___

b. As-built shop drawings submitted. ___ ___ ___

c. Ductwork leak test complete. ___ ___ ___

NOTE: The first bracketed item will be used for Army projects, the second for Air Force projects.

[d. Fire dampers, smoke dampers, and access doors installed as required. ___ ___ ___]

[d. Fire dampers, smoke dampers, and access doors installed as required with installation of each verified by the specified team members initialing each location on a copy of the as-built drawings. ___ ___ ___]

e. Ductwork insulated as required. ___ ___ ___

f. Thermometers and gauges installed as required. ___ ___ ___

g. Verify open/closed status of dampers. ___ ___ ___

h. Verify smoke dampers operation. ___ ___ ___

i. Flexible connectors installed as specified ___ ___ ___


a. TAB operation complete. ___ ___ ___

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 10


Pre-commissioning Checklist - Multizone Air Handling Unit

For Air Handling Unit: [_____]

Checklist Item QA QC CAInstallation

a. Vibration isolation devices installed [and freed to float with adequate movement and seismic restraint] as specified. ___ ___ ___

b. Inspection and access doors are operable and sealed. ___ ___ ___

c. Casing undamaged. ___ ___ ___

d. Insulation undamaged. ___ ___ ___

e. Condensate drainage is unobstructed. (Visually verify pan drains completely by pouring a cup of water into drain pan.) ___ ___ ___

f. Fan belt adjusted. ___ ___ ___

g. Manufacturer's required maintenance clearance provided. ___ ___ ___

Electrical

a. Power available to unit disconnect. ___ ___ ___

b. Power available to unit control panel. ___ ___ ___

c. Proper motor rotation verified. ___ ___ ___

d. Verify that power disconnect is located within sight of the unit it controls. ___ ___ ___

[e. Power available to electric heating coil. ___ ___ ___]

Coils

[a. Chilled water piping properly connected. ___ ___ ___]

[a. Refrigerant piping properly connected. ___ ___ ___]

[b. Chilled water piping pressure tested. ___ ___ ___]

[b. Refrigerant piping pressure tested. ___ ___ ___]

[c. Hot water piping properly connected. ___ ___ ___]

[c. Steam and condensate piping properly connected. ___ ___ ___]

[d. Hot water piping pressure tested. ___ ___ ___]

[d. Steam and condensate piping pressure tested. ___ ___ ___]

e. Air vents installed on water coils [with shutoff valves] as specified. ___ ___ ___

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 11


f. Any damage to coil fins has been repaired ___ ___ ___

Controls

a. Control valves/actuators properly installed. ___ ___ ___

b. Control valves/actuators operable. ___ ___ ___

c. O.A. dampers/actuators properly installed. ___ ___ ___

d. O.A. dampers/actuators operable. ___ ___ ___

e. Zone dampers/actuators properly installed. ___ ___ ___

f. Zone dampers/actuators operable. ___ ___ ___


a. Construction filters removed and replaced. ___ ___ ___

b. TAB report submitted. ___ ___ ___

c. TAB results within +10%/-0% of L/s cfm shown on drawings ___ ___ ___

d. TAB results for outside air intake within +10%/-0% of L/s CFM shown on drawings. ___ ___ ___

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 12


Pre-commissioning Checklist - Variable Volume Air Handling Unit



Installation

a. Vibration isolation devices installed. ___ ___ ___




e. Condensate drainage is unobstructed. (Visually verify drainage by pouring a cup of water into drain pan.) ___ ___ ___


g. Manufacturer's required maintenance clearance provided. ___ ___ ___

Electrical






Coils









[e. Air vents installed on water coils [with shutoff valves] as specified. ___ ___ ___]

f. Any damage to coil fins has been repaired. ___ ___ ___]

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 13


Controls

a. Control valves/actuators properly installed. ___ ___ ___ b. Control valves/actuators operable. ___ ___ ___

c. Dampers/actuators properly installed. ___ ___ ___

d. Dampers/actuators operable. ___ ___ ___

e. Verify proper location, installation and calibration of duct static pressure sensor. ___ ___ ___

f. Fan air volume controller operable. ___ ___ ___

g. Air handler controls system operational. ___ ___ ___



b. TAB report submitted. ___ ___ ___

c. TAB results within +10%/-0% of L/s cfm shown on drawings ___ ___ ___

d. TAB results for outside air intake within +10%/-0% of both the minimum and maximum L/s cfms shown on drawings. ___ ___ ___

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 14


Pre-commissioning Checklist - VAV Terminal

For VAV Terminal: [_____]


Installation

a. VAV terminal in place. ___ ___ ___

b. VAV terminal ducted. ___ ___ ___

c. VAV terminal connected to controls. ___ ___ ___

[d. Reheat coil connected to hot water pipe. ___ ___ ___]

[e. Electric reheat coil connected to local disconnect. ___ ___ ___]

f. Manufacturer's required maintenance clearance provided. ___ ___ ___

Controls

a. Cooling only VAV terminal controls set. ___ ___ ___

b. Cooling only VAV controls verified. ___ ___ ___

c. Reheat VAV terminal controls set. ___ ___ ___ d. Reheat terminal/coil controls verified. ___ ___ ___


a. Verify terminal maximum air flow set. ___ ___ ___

b. Verify terminal minimum air flow set. ___ ___ ___

c. TAB operation complete. ___ ___ ___

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 15


Pre-commissioning Checklist - DX Air Cooled Condensing Unit

For Condensing Unit: [_____]


Installation ___ ___ ___

b. Refrigerant pipe leak tested. ___ ___ ___

c. Refrigerant pipe evacuated and charged ___ ___ ___ in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

d. Check condenser fans for proper rotation. ___ ___ ___

e. Any damage to coil fins has been repaired. ___ ___ ___

f. Manufacturer's required maintenance/ ___ ___ ___ operational clearance provided.

Electrical



c. Verify that power disconnect is located within sight of the unit it controls ___ ___ ___

Controls a. Unit safety/protection devices tested. ___ ___ ___

b. Control system and interlocks installed. ___ ___ ___

c. Control system and interlocks operational. ___ ___ ___

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 16


Pre-commissioning Checklist - Pumps

For Pump: [_____]


Installation

a. Pumps grouted in place. ___ ___ ___

b. Pump vibration isolation devices functional. ___ ___ ___

c. Pump/motor coupling alignment verified. ___ ___ ___

d. Piping system installed. ___ ___ ___

e. Piping system pressure tested. ___ ___ ___

f. Pump not leaking. ___ ___ ___

g. Field assembled couplings aligned to meet manufacturer's prescribed tolerances. ___ ___ ___

Electrical

a. Power available to pump disconnect. ___ ___ ___

b. Pump rotation verified. ___ ___ ___

c. Control system interlocks functional. ___ ___ ___



a. Pressure/temperature gauges installed. ___ ___ ___

b. Piping system cleaned. ___ ___ ___

c. Chemical water treatment complete. ___ ___ ___

d. Water balance complete. ___ ___ ___

e. Water balance with design maximum flow. ___ ___ ___

f. TAB Report submitted. ___ ___ ___

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 17


Pre-commissioning Checklist - Packaged Air Cooled Chiller

For Chiller: [_____]


Installation

a. Chiller properly piped. ___ ___ ___

b. Chilled water pipe leak tested. ___ ___ ___

c. Verify that refrigerant used complies with specified requirements. ___ ___ ___

d. Any damage to coil fins has been repaired. ___ ___ ___

e. Manufacturer's required maintenance clearance provided. ___ ___ ___

Electrical



c. Separate power is supplied to electric heating tape. ___ ___ ___


Controls

a. Factory startup and checkout complete. ___ ___ ___

b. Chiller safety/protection devices tested. ___ ___ ___

c. Chilled water flow switch installed. ___ ___ ___

d. Chilled water flow switch tested. ___ ___ ___

e. Chilled water pump interlock installed. ___ ___ ___

f. Chilled water pump interlock tested. ___ ___ ___

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 18


Pre-commissioning Checklist - Centrifugal Chiller



Installation

a. Chilled water connections properly piped. ___ ___ ___

b. Condenser water connections properly piped. ___ ___ ___

c. Chilled water pipe leak tested. ___ ___ ___

d. Condenser water pipe leak tested. ___ ___ ___

e. High efficiency purge unit installed and operating as specified. ___ ___ ___

f. Refrigerant leak detector installed. ___ ___ ___

g. Oxygen sensor installed and tested. ___ ___ ___

h. Mechanical room ventilation installed as specified. ___ ___ ___

i. Manufacturer's required maintenance clearance provided. ___ ___ ___

j. Field assembled couplings aligned to meet manufacturer's prescribed tolerances. ___ ___ ___

Electrical

a. Power available to unit starter. ___ ___ ___


c. Verify that power disconnect is located within sight of the unit it controls. ___ ___ ___

Controls

a. Factory startup and checkout complete. ___ ___ ___

b. Chiller safety/protection devices tested. ___ ___ ___

c. Chilled water flow switch installed. ___ ___ ___

d. Chilled water flow switch tested. ___ ___ ___

e. Chilled water pump interlock installed. ___ ___ ___

f. Chilled water pump interlock tested. ___ ___ ___

g. Condenser water flow switch installed. ___ ___ ___

h. Condenser water flow switch tested. ___ ___ ___

i. Condenser water pump interlock installed. ___ ___ ___

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 19


j. Condenser water pump interlock tested. ___ ___ ___

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 20


Pre-commissioning Checklist - Cooling Tower

For Cooling Tower: [_____]


Installation

a. Cooling tower in place. ___ ___ ___

b. Cooling tower piped. ___ ___ ___

c. Cooling tower fan drive adjusted. ___ ___ ___

d. Cooling tower makeup water supply piped. ___ ___ ___

e. Verify makeup control valve shutoff. ___ ___ ___

f. Fan lubricated and blade pitch adjusted. ___ ___ ___

g. Manufacturer's required maintenance/ operational clearance provided. ___ ___ ___

h. Cooling tower drain and overflow is piped. ___ ___ ___

Electrical

a. Power available to tower disconnect. ___ ___ ___

b. Power available to electric sump heater. ___ ___ ___

c. Control system interlocks functional. ___ ___ ___

d. Motor and fan rotation checked. ___ ___ ___

e. Verify that power disconnect is located within sight of the unit is controls. ___ ___ ___

Piping

a. Tower basin is clean and filled. ___ ___ ___

b. Condenser water treatment functional. ___ ___ ___

c. Water balance with design flow verified. ___ ___ ___

d. Water distribution headers balanced. ___ ___ ___

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 21


Pre-commissioning Checklist - Hot Water Boiler

For Boiler: [_____]


Installation

a. Boiler flue installed. ___ ___ ___

b. Boiler hot water piping installed. ___ ___ ___

c. Boiler hot water piping tested. ___ ___ ___

d. Boiler makeup water piping installed. ___ ___ ___

e. Boiler fuel oil piping installed. ___ ___ ___

f. Boiler fuel oil piping tested. ___ ___ ___

g. Boiler gas piping installed. ___ ___ ___

h. Boiler gas piping tested. ___ ___ ___


Startup

a. Boiler system cleaned and filled with treated water. ___ ___ ___

b. Boiler safety/protection devices, including high temperature burner shut-off, low water cutoff, flame failure, pre and post purge, have been tested. ___ ___ ___

c. Verify that PRV rating conforms to boiler rating. ___ ___ ___

d. Boiler water treatment system functional. ___ ___ ___

e. Boiler startup and checkout complete. ___ ___ ___

f. Combustion efficiency demonstrated. ___ ___ ___

Electrical

a. Verify that power disconnect is located within sight of the unit served. ___ ___ ___

Controls

a. Hot water pump interlock installed. ___ ___ ___

b. Hot water pump interlock tested. ___ ___ ___

c. Hot water heating system balanced. ___ ___ ___

d. Hot water heating controls operational. ___ ___ ___

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 22


Pre-commissioning Checklist - Steam Boiler

For Boiler: [_____]


Installation

a. Boiler flue installed. ___ ___ ___

b. Boiler steam piping installed. ___ ___ ___

c. Boiler steam piping tested. ___ ___ ___

d. Boiler makeup water piping installed. ___ ___ ___

e. Boiler makeup water piping tested. ___ ___ ___

f. Boiler fuel oil piping installed. ___ ___ ___

g. Boiler fuel oil piping tested. ___ ___ ___

h. Boiler gas piping installed. ___ ___ ___

i. Boiler gas piping tested. ___ ___ ___

j. Manufacturer's required maintenance clearance provided. ___ ___ ___

Startupa. Boiler system cleaned and filled with treated water. ___ ___ ___

b. Boiler safety/protection devices, including high temperature burner shut-off, low water cutoff, flame failure, pre and post purge, have been tested. ___ ___ ___

c. Verify that PRV rating conforms to boiler rating. ___ ___ ___

d. Boiler feed water system operational. ___ ___ ___

e. Boiler water treatment system functional. ___ ___ ___

f. Boiler startup and checkout complete. ___ ___ ___

g. All steam traps operational. ___ ___ ___

h. All condensate return pumps operational. ___ ___ ___

i. Combustion efficiency demonstrated. ___ ___ ___

Electrical


SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 23


Pre-commissioning Checklist - Steam/Hot Water Converter

For Converter: [_____]


Installation

a. Converter steam piping installed. ___ ___ ___

b. Converter steam piping tested. ___ ___ ___

c. Hot water piping installed. ___ ___ ___

d. Hot water piping tested. ___ ___ ___

e. Makeup water piping installed. ___ ___ ___

f. Vacuum breaker installed on shell of shell and tube unit. ___ ___ ___

g. Air vent installed as specified. ___ ___ ___

h. Manufacturer's required maintenance clearance provided. ___ ___ ___

Startup

a. Hot water system cleaned and filled. ___ ___ ___

b. All steam traps operational. ___ ___ ___

c. All condensate return pumps operational. ___ ___ ___

d. Converter safety/protection devices tested. ___ ___ ___

e. Converter startup and checkout complete. ___ ___ ___

Controls



SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 24


Pre-commissioning Checklist - Fan Coil Unit

For Fan Coil Unit: [_____]


Installation


b. Access doors/removable panels are operable and sealed. ___ ___ ___



e. Condensate drainage is unobstructed. ___ ___ ___


g. Any damage to coil fins has been repaired. ___ ___ ___

h. Manufacturer's required maintenance clearance provided. ___ ___ ___

Electrical






Coils

[a. Dual temperature piping properly connected. ___ ___ ___]


[b. Dual temperature piping pressure tested. ___ ___ ___]




Controls



c. Verify proper location and installation of thermostat. ___ ___ ___

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 25




b. TAB results +10%/-0% of L/s (cfm) shown on drawings ___ ___ ___

c. TAB Report submitted. ___ ___ ___

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 26


Pre-commissioning Checklist - Unit Heater

For Electric Cabinet or Unit Heater: [_____]


Installation

[a. Hot water piping properly connected. ___ ___ ___]

[a. Steam and condensate piping properly connected. ___ ___ ___]

[b. Hot water piping pressure tested. ___ ___ ___]

[b. Steam and condensate piping pressure tested. ___ ___ ___]

c. Air vent installed on hot water coil with shutoff valve as specified. ___ ___ ___

d. Any damage to coil fins has been repaired. ___ ___ ___ e. Manufacturer's required maintenance/ operational clearance provided. ___ ___ ___

Electrical


b. Proper motor rotation verified. ___ ___ ___


d. Power available to electric heating coil. ___ ___ ___

Controls

a. Control valves properly installed. ___ ___ ___

b. Control valves operable. ___ ___ ___



a. TAB Report submitted. ___ ___ ___

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 27


Pre-commissioning Checklist - Exhaust Fan

For Exhaust Fan: [_____]


Installation

a. Fan belt adjusted. ___ ___ ___

Electrical

a. Power available to fan disconnect. ___ ___ ___



Controls

a. Control interlocks properly installed. ___ ___ ___

b. Control interlocks operable. ___ ___ ___



e. Verify proper location and installation of thermostat. ___ ___ ___


a. TAB results +10%/-0% to L/s (cfm) shown on drawings ___ ___ ___

b. TAB Report submitted. ___ ___ ___

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 28


Pre-commissioning Checklist - Computer Room Unit

For Computer Room Unit: [_____]


Installation

a. Unit properly supported. ___ ___ ___

b. Access doors are operable and sealed. ___ ___ ___



e. Condensate drainage is unobstructed and routed to floor drain. ___ ___ ___


g. Manufacturer's required maintenance operational clearance provided. ___ ___ ___

Electrical





[e. Power available to reheat coils. ___ ___ ___]

Coils/Humidifier






[c. Steam piping properly connected. ___ ___ ___]


[d. Steam piping pressure tested. ___ ___ ___]

e. Humidifier makeup water connected. ___ ___ ___

Controls

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 29


a. Control valves operable. ___ ___ ___

b. Unit control system operable and verified. ___ ___ ___




b. TAB results +10%/-0% L/s (cfm) shown on drawings. ___ ___ ___


SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 30


Pre-commissioning Checklist - HVAC System Controls

For HVAC System Control Including the Central Equipment


Installation

a. As-built shop drawings submitted. ___ ___ ___

b. Layout of control panel matches drawings. ___ ___ ___

c. Framed instructions mounted in or near control panel. ___ ___ ___

d. Components properly labeled (on inside and outside of panel). ___ ___ ___

e. Control components piped and/or wired to each labeled terminal strip. ___ ___ ___

f. EMCS connection made to each labeled terminal strip as shown. ___ ___ ___

g. Control wiring and tubing labeled at all terminations, splices, and junctions. ___ ___ ___

h. Shielded wiring used on electronic sensors. ___ ___ ___

i. Air dryer installed as specified. ___ ___ ___

j. Water drain installed as specified. ___ ___ ___

Main Power and Control Air

a. 110 volt AC power available to panel. ___ ___ ___

b. 138 kPa gauge (20 psig) 20 psig compressed air available to panel. ___ ___ ___

Testing, Commissioning, and Balancing

a. Testing, Commissioning, and Balancing Report submitted. ___ ___ ___

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 31


Pre-commissioning Checklist - Single Zone or Outdoor Air Handling Unit



Installation



c. Casing undamaged. ___ ___ ___ d. Insulation undamaged. ___ ___ ___

e. Condensate drainage is unobstructed and trap is installed in accordance with the details. ___ ___ ___


g. Any damage to coil fins has been repaired. ___ ___ ___

h. Manufacturer's required maintenance clearance provided. ___ ___ ___ Electrical





e. Power available to electric heating coil. ___ ___ ___

Coils









[e. Air vents installed on water coils [with

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 32


shutoff valves] as specified. ___ ___ ___]

f. Any damage to coil fins has been repaired. ___ ___ ___

Controls





e. Verify proper location and installation of thermostat. ____ ___ ___





SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 33


Pre-commissioning Checklist - Energy Recovery System

For Energy Recovery System: [_____]


Installation

a. Recovery system piping installed. ___ ___ ___

b. Recovery system piping tested. ___ ___ ___

c. Air vent installed as specified. ___ ___ ___

d. Manufacturer's required maintenance clearance provided. ___ ___ ___

Startup

a. Recovery system piping cleaned and filled. ___ ___ ___

b. Converter startup and checkout complete. ___ ___ ___ Controls



SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 34


Pre-commissioning Checklist - Geothermal Well Field


Installation

a. Vault inspection and access doors are operable. ___ ___ ___

c. All vault supply and return valves operate full open and full closed. ___ ___ ___

d. The vault contains no water and has no leaks. ___ ___ ___

e. TAB report submitted. ___ ___ ___

f. TAB results within +10%/-0% of the flow shown on drawings ___ ___ ___

g. Verify the flow.

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 35


SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 36


Pre-commissioning Checklist - Heat Exchanger

For Heat Exchanger: [____]


Installation

a. Piping installed and connections are per manufacturers diagrams. ___ ___ ___

b. Piping tested. ___ ___ ___

c. Makeup water piping installed. ___ ___ ___

d. Air vent installed as specified. ___ ___ ___

e. Manufacturer's required maintenance clearance provided. ___ ___ ___

Startup

a. System cleaned and filled. ___ ___ ___

b. Strainer is clean. ___ ___ ___

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 37


Pre-commissioning Checklist - Heat Pump Unit

For Heat Pump Unit: _____


Installation

a. Unit properly supported. ___ ___ ___

b. Access doors are operable and sealed. ___ ___ ___



e. Condensate drainage is unobstructed and trap is as detailed. ___ ___ ___

g. Manufacturer's required maintenance operational clearance provided. ___ ___ ___

h. Loop water piping connected as detailed. ___ ___ ___

Electrical


b. Proper fan motor rotation verified. ___ ___ ___


Controls

a. Control valve is operates properly. ___ ___ ___

b. Unit control system operable and verified. ___ ___ ___






SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 38


Pre-commissioning Checklist - Domestic Hot Water Heater

For Water Heater: [_____]


Installation

a. Water Heater flue installed. ___ ___ ___

b. Water Heater hot water piping installed. ___ ___ ___

c. Water Heater hot water piping tested. ___ ___ ___

d. Water Heater makeup water piping installed. ___ ___ ___

e. Water Heater fuel oil piping installed. ___ ___ ___

f. Water Heater fuel oil piping tested. ___ ___ ___

g. Water Heater gas piping installed. ___ ___ ___

h. Water Heater gas piping tested. ___ ___ ___

i. Water Heater insulation installed as required ___ ___ ___

j. Manufacturer's required maintenance clearance provided. ___ ___ ___ Startup

a. Domestic water system cleaned, flushed, and filled with water. ___ ___ ___

b. Water Heater safety/protection devices, including high temperature burner shut-off, low water cutoff, flame failure, have been tested. ___ ___ ___

c. Water Heater startup and checkout complete. ___ ___ ___

f. Combustion efficiency demonstrated. ___ ___ ___

Electrical


Controls

a. Domestic water heating controls operational. ___ ___ ___

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 39


Pre-commissioning Checklist - Steam/Domestic Hot Water Heat Exchanger

For Heat Exchanger: [_____]


Installation

a. Heat Exchanger steam piping installed. ___ ___ ___

b. Heat Exchanger steam piping tested. ___ ___ ___

c. Domestic hot water piping installed. ___ ___ ___

d. Domestic hot water piping tested. ___ ___ ___

e. Makeup cold water piping installed. ___ ___ ___

f. Vacuum breaker installed on shell of shell and tube unit. ___ ___ ___

g. Air vent installed as specified. ___ ___ ___

h. Insulation installed as required. ___ ___ ___


Startup

a. Hot water system cleaned, flushed, and filled. ___ ___ ___

b. All steam traps operational. ___ ___ ___

c. All condensate return pumps operational. ___ ___ ___

d. Heat Exchanger safety/protection devices tested. ___ ___ ___

e. Heat Exchanger startup and checkout complete. ___ ___ ___

Controls



SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 40


Pre-commissioning Checklist - Lighting System

For Lighting System: [_____]


Installation

a. Light fixtures installed and . ___ ___ ___

Electrical

a. Power available to light fixtures. ___ ___ ___

b. Power available to light sensors. ___ ___ ___

c. Power available to occupancy sensors. ___ ___ ___

Controls

a. Controls operable. ___ ___ ___

c. Verify proper location and installation of light sensors. ___ ___ ___

d. Verify proper location and installation of occupancy sensors. ___ ___ ___

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 41


APPENDIX B

FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS CHECKLISTS

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 42


Functional Performance Test Checklist - Pumps

For Pump: [_____]

Prior to performing this checklist, ensure that for closed loop systems, system is pressurized and the make-up water system is operational or, for open loop systems, that the sumps are filled to the proper level.

1. Activate pump start using control system commands (all possible combination, on/auto, etc.). ON__________ AUTO__________ OFF__________

a. Verify pressure drop across strainer:

Strainer inlet pressure __________ kPa (_____ psig) Strainer outlet pressure _________ kPa (_____ psig) Strainer inlet pressure __________ psig Strainer outlet pressure _________ psig

b. Verify pump inlet/outlet pressure reading, compare to Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Report, pump design conditions, and pump manufacturer's performance.

DESIGN TAB ACTUAL Pump inlet pressure (kPa gauge) _________ __________ __________ Pump outlet pressure (kPa gauge) _________ __________ __________

DESIGN TAB ACTUAL Pump inlet pressure (psig) ___________ __________ __________ Pump outlet pressure (psig) ___________ __________ __________

c. Operate pump at shutoff and at 100 percent of designed flow when all components are in full flow. Plot test readings on pump curve and compare results against readings taken from flow measuring devices.

SHUTOFF 100 percent Pump inlet pressure (kPa gauge) __________ __________ Pump outlet pressure __________ __________ Pump flow rate (L/s) __________ __________

SHUTOFF 100 percent Pump inlet pressure (psig) __________ __________ Pump outlet pressure __________ __________ Pump flow rate (gpm) __________ __________

d. Operate pump at shutoff and at minimum flow or when all components are in full by-pass. Plot test readings on pump curve and compare results against readings taken from flow measuring devices.

SHUTOFF 100 percent Pump inlet pressure (kPa gauge) __________ __________ Pump outlet pressure __________ __________ Pump flow rate (L/s) __________ __________

SHUTOFF 100 percent Pump inlet pressure (psig) __________ __________ Pump outlet pressure __________ __________ Pump flow rate (gpm) __________ __________

2. Verify motor amperage each phase and voltage phase to phase and

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 43


phase to ground for both the full flow and the minimum flow conditions.

a. Full flow:

PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3 Amperage __________ __________ __________ Voltage __________ __________ Voltage _________________________ Voltage to ground __________ __________ __________

b. Minimum flow:

PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3 Amperage __________ __________ __________ Voltage __________ __________ Voltage _________________________ Voltage to ground __________ __________ __________

3. Unusual vibration, noise, etc.

___________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

4. Certification: We the undersigned have witnessed the above functional performance tests and certify that the item tested has met the performance requirements in this section of the specifications.

Signature and Date

Contractor's Quality Control Representative _____________________________

Contractor's Mechanical Representative _____________________________

Contractor's Electrical Representative _____________________________

Contractor's Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Representative _____________________________

Contractor's Controls Representative _____________________________

Government Representative _____________________________

Using Agency's Representative _____________________________

Design Agency's Representative _____________________________

Commissioning Agent _____________________________

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 44


Functional Performance Test Checklist - Centrifugal Chiller


1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate operation of chilled water system as per specifications including the following: Start building air handler to provide load for chiller. Activate controls system chiller start sequence as follows:

a. Time of day startup program initiates chiller start: ____________

b. Start condenser water pump and establish condenser water flow. Verify chiller condenser water proof-of-flow switch operation. ___________

c. Start chilled water pump and establish chilled water flow. Verify chiller chilled water proof-of-flow switch operation. ____________________

d. Verify control system energizes chiller start sequence. __________

e. Verify chiller senses chilled water temperature above set point and control system activates chiller start. __________________________________

f. Verify functioning of "soft start" sequence. _____________________

g. Shut off air handling equipment to remove load on chilled water system. Verify chiller shutdown sequence is initiated and accomplished after load is removed. _______________________

h. Restart air handling equipment one minute after chiller shut down. Verify condenser water pump, cooling tower, and chiller restart sequence. _____________________________________________________________________________


Signature and Date










SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 45


Functional Performance Test Checklist - Cooling Tower

For Cooling Tower: [_____]

1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate operation of the cooling tower as per specification and the following:

a. Activate cooling tower fan start using control system command. This should first start [condenser][tower] water pump, establish flow, delay fan start, as specified, to equalize flow in distribution basin and sump. Verify fan start after timed delay. ______________________________________

b. After chiller startup, control system should modulate [bypass valve and two-speed fan motor][fan speed] to maintain [condenser][loop] water set point. Verify function of bypass valve under varying loads. ____________________________

c. Verify cooling tower operates in accordance with the sequence of control. _____________________

d. Verify makeup water [float][fill] valve is functioning: ___________________

e. Verify bleed valve is functioning:________________________________________________

Activate chemical treatment feed valve, verify makeup of chemical treatment system, pump, and controls: _____________________________________________

e. Entering water temperature [_____] degrees C Leaving water temperature: [_____] degrees C Air volume measured: [_____] L/s Air volume calculated: [_____] L/s Entering wet bulb temperature: [_____] degrees C Measured water flow: [_____] L/s

e. Entering water temperature [_____] degrees F Leaving water temperature: [_____] degrees F Air volume measured: [_____] cfm Air volume calculated: [_____] cfm Entering wet bulb temperature: [_____] degrees F Measured water flow: [_____] gpm


Signature and Date





SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 46







SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 47


Functional Performance Test Checklist - VAV Terminals

The Contracting officer will select VAV terminals to be spot-checked during the functional performance test. The number of terminals shall not exceed [2] [10] [10 percent].

1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate operation of selected VAV boxes as per specifications including the following:

a. Cooling only VAV boxes:

(1) Verify VAV box response to room temperature set point adjustment. Turn thermostat to 5 degrees F above ambient and measure maximum air flow. Turn thermostat to 5 degrees F below ambient and measure minimum air flow.

Maximum flow [_____] L/s Minimum flow [_____] L/s

Maximum flow [_____] cfm Minimum flow [_____] cfm

(2) Check damper maximum/minimum flow settings.

Maximum flow setting [_____] L/s Minimum flow setting [_____] L/s

Maximum flow setting [_____] cfm Minimum flow setting [_____] cfm

b. Cooling with reheat VAV boxes:

(1) Verify VAV box response to room temperature set point adjustment. Turn thermostat to 3 degrees C 5 degrees F above ambient and measure maximum air flow. Turn thermostat to 3 degrees C 5 degrees F below ambient and measure minimum air flow.

Maximum flow [_____] L/s Minimum flow [_____] L/s

Maximum flow [_____] cfm Minimum flow [_____] cfm

(2) Check damper maximum/minimum flow settings.



Reheat coil operation range (full open to full closed) __________________

c. Fan powered VAV boxes:

(1) Verify VAV box response to sensor call for heating via set point adjustment. Changes to be cooling setpoint to heating set point and return to cooling set point. __________ Verify cooling damper closes to

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 48


minimum position, blower fan energizes according to sequence of operation, and upon further drop in space temperature, heating coil activation and deactivation. __________

(2) Check primary air damper maximum/minimum flow settings.


(3) Check blower fan flow. [_____] L/s


(3) Check blower fan flow. [_____] cfm

(4) Verify free operation of fan backdraft damper (insure no primary air is being discharged through the recirculated air register). _____________________________________________________________________________

(5) Verify that no recirculated air is being induced when box is in full cooling. ______________________________________________________________


Signature and Date Contractor's Quality Control Representative _____________________________









SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 49


Functional Performance Test Checklist - Variable Volume Air Handling Unit


Ensure that a slight negative pressure exists on inboard side of the outside air dampers throughout the operation of the dampers. Modulate OA, RA, and EA dampers from fully open to fully closed positions.

1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall verify operation of air handling unit as per specification including the following:

a. The following shall be verified when the [supply fan operating] [supply and return fans operating] mode is initiated:

(1) All dampers in normal position [and fan inlet vanes modulate to maintain the required static pressure]. ____________________________________

(2) All valves in normal position. ______________________________

(3) System safeties allow start if safety conditions are met. _____

(4) VAV fan controller shall "soft-start" fan. __________________

(5) Modulate all VAV boxes to minimum air flow and verify that the static pressure does not exceed the design static pressure Class shown. _____________________________________________________________________________

b. Occupied mode of operation - economizer de-energized.

(1) Outside air damper at minimum position. _____________________

(2) Return air damper open. _____________________________________

(3) Relief air damper [at minimum position] [closed]. ___________

(4) Chilled water control valve modulating to maintain leaving air temperature set point. _____________________________________________________

(5) Fan VAV controller receiving signal from duct static pressure sensor and modulating fan to maintain supply duct static pressure set point. _____________________________________________________________________________

c. Occupied mode of operation - economizer energized.

(1) Outside air damper modulated to maintain mixed air temperature set point. _________________________________________________________________

(2) Relief air damper modulates with outside air damper according to sequence of operation. __________________________________________________

(3) Chilled water control valve modulating to maintain leaving air temperature set point. _____________________________________________________

(4) Hot water control valve modulating to maintain leaving air temperature set point. _____________________________________________________

(5) Fan VAV controller receiving signal from duct static pressure sensor and modulating fan to maintain supply duct static pressure set point. _____________________________________________________________________________

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 50


d. Unoccupied mode of operation

(1) All dampers in normal position. _____________________________

(2) Verify low limit space temperature is maintained as specified in sequence of operation. ________________________________________________

e. The following shall be verified when the [supply fan off] [supply and return fans off] mode is initiated:



(3) Fan de-energizes. ___________________________________________

f. Verify the chilled water coil control valve operation by setting all VAV's to maximum and minimum cooling.

Max cooling Min coolingSupply air volume (_____ L/s) __________ ___________

Supply air temp. (_____ degrees C) __________ ___________

Max cooling Min coolingSupply air volume _____ cfm) __________ ___________

Supply air temp. (_____ degrees F) __________ ___________

g. Verify safety shut down initiated by smoke detectors. ____________

h. Verify safety shut down initiated by low temperature protection thermostat. ________________________________________________________________


Signature and Date










SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 51


SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 52


Functional Performance Test Checklist - Single Zone Air Handling Unit



a. The following shall be verified when the [supply fan operating] [supply and return fans operating] mode is initiated:

(1) All dampers in normal position. ______________________________




(1) Outside air damper at minimum position. ______________________

(2) Return air damper open. ______________________________________

(3) Relief air damper [at minimum position] [closed]. ____________

(4) Chilled water control valve modulating to maintain space cooling temperature set point. _____________________________________________

(5) Hot water control valve modulating to maintain space heating temperature set point input from outside air temperature controller. ________


(1) Outside air damper modulated to maintain mixed air temperature set point. _________________________________________________________________

(2) Relief air damper modulates with outside air damper according to sequence of operation. ________________________________________________

(3) Chilled water control valve modulating to maintain space cooling temperature set point. _____________________________________________



(2) Verify low limit space temperature is maintained as specified in sequence of operation. __________________________________________________

e. The following shall be verified when the [supply fan off] [supply and return fans off] mode is initiated:


(2) All valves in normal position. _______________________________

(3) Fan de-energizes. ___________________________________________

f. Verify cooling coil and heating coil operation by varying thermostat set point from cooling set point to heating set point and

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 53


returning to cooling set point. ____________________________________________

g. Verify safety shut down initiated by smoke detectors. _____________

h. Verify safety shut down initiated by low temperature protection thermostat. _______________________________________________________________


Signature and Date










SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 54


Functional Performance Test Checklist - Single Zone Outdoor Air Handling Unit

For Air Handling Unit: [____]_____


a. The following shall be verified when the supply fan is commanded off or manually set to OFF:

(1) Outdoor air damper is closed. ______________________________

(2) Automatic Water Valve is closed. Verify no water flow. ______________________________

b. The following shall be verified when the supply fan is commanded on or manually set to ON:

(1) Outside air damper at full open position. ___________________

(2) Automatic Water Valve is open. Verify full flow. ___________

(3) Verify safety shut down initiated by smoke detectors. _______

c. Cooling mode of operation:

(1) Note the outdoor air temperature. _______________

(2) Verify that the cooling coil leaving air temperature is as scheduled. ___________________________________________

(3) Verify that the reheat coil leaving temperature is as scheduled. _____________________________

d. Heating mode of operation:

(1) Verify that the cooling coil leaving air temperature is as scheduled. ______________________________

(2) Verify that the heating section leaving air temperature is as scheduled. ______________________________ 2. Certification: We the undersigned have witnessed the above functional performance tests and certify that the item tested has met the performance requirements in this section of the specifications.

Signature and Date





SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 55






SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 56


Functional Performance Test Checklist - Multizone Air Handling Unit


Ensure that a slight negative pressure exists on inboard side of the outside air dampers throughout the operation of the dampers. Modulate OA, RA, and EA dampers from fully open to fully closed positions.


a. The following shall be verified when the supply and return fans operating mode is initiated:

(1) All dampers in normal position. _______________________________

(2) All valves in normal position. ________________________________



(1) Outside air damper at minimum position. _______________________

(2) Return air damper open. _______________________________________

(3) Relief air damper [at minimum position] [closed]. _____________

(4) Chilled water control valve modulating to maintain cold deck supply air temperature set point. __________________________________________

(5) Hot water control valve modulating to maintain hot deck supply air temperature set point input from outside air temperature controller. _____________________________________________________________________________


(1) Outside air damper modulates to maintain mixed air temperature set point. _________________________________________________________________

(2) Relief air damper modulates with outside air damper according to sequence of operation. __________________________________________________

(3) Chilled water control valve modulating to maintain cold deck supply air temperature set point. __________________________________________

(4) Hot water control valve modulating to maintain hot deck supply air temperature set point input from outside air temperature controller. _____________________________________________________________________________



(2) Verify low limit space temperature is maintained as specified in sequence of operation. _________________________________________________

e. The following shall be verified when the supply and return fans off mode is initiated:

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 57




(3) Fan de-energizes. ___________________________________________

f. Verify zone damper operation by varying zone thermostat set points from cooling set point to heating set point and returning to cooling set point. _____________________________________________________________________

g. Verify safety shut down initiated by smoke detectors. ____________

h. Verify safety shut down initiated by low temperature protection thermostat. ________________________________________________________________

i. Index room thermostats to full cooling then to full heating. Measure and record cold deck, hot deck, and supply air temperatures and determine damper leakage for a minimum of 2 zones.

Cold deck temperature __________ degrees C (_____ degrees F)Hot deck temperature __________ degrees C (_____ degrees F)

Cold deck temperature _____ degrees FHot deck temperature _____ degrees F

Zone _______Cooling temperature _______ degrees C (_____ degrees F)Heating temperature _______ degrees C (_____ degrees F)Damper leakage cooling ____ degrees C (_____ degrees F)Damper leakage heating ____ degrees C (_____ degrees F)

Zone _______Cooling temperature _______ degrees FHeating temperature _______ degrees FDamper leakage cooling ____ degrees FDamper leakage heating ____ degrees

Zone _______Cooling temperature _______ degrees C (_____ degrees F)Heating temperature _______ degrees C (_____ degrees F)Damper leakage cooling ____ degrees C (_____ degrees F)Damper leakage heating ____ degrees C (_____ degrees F)

Zone _______Cooling temperature _______ degrees FHeating temperature _______ degrees FDamper leakage cooling ____ degrees FDamper leakage heating ____ degrees F


Signature and Date


SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 58










SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 59


Functional Performance Test Checklist - Packaged Air Cooled Chiller


1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate operation of chilled water system as per specifications including the following: Start building air handler to provide load for chiller. Activate controls system chiller start sequence as follows.

a. Start chilled water pump and establish chilled water flow. Verify chiller-chilled water proof-of-flow switch operation. ___________________

b. Verify control system energizes chiller start sequence. __________

c. Verify chiller senses chilled water temperature above set point and control system activates chiller start. __________________________________

d. Verify functioning of "soft start" sequence. _____________________

e. Shut off air handling equipment to remove load on chilled water system. Verify chiller shutdown sequence is initiated and accomplished after load is removed. ___________________________________________________

f. Restart air handling equipment one minute after chiller shut down. Verify chiller restart sequence. _________________________________________

2. Verify chiller inlet/outlet pressure reading, compare to Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Report, chiller design conditions, and chiller manufacturer's performance data.

DESIGN TAB ACTUALChiller inlet pressure (kPa gauge) __________ __________ __________Chiller inlet pressure (psig) __________ __________ __________

Chiller outlet pressure (kPa gauge) __________ __________ __________Chiller outlet pressure (psig) __________ __________ __________

3. Verify chiller amperage each phase and voltage phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground.

PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3 Amperage __________ __________ __________ Voltage __________ __________ Voltage ______________________ Voltage to ground __________ __________ __________

4. Record the following information:

Ambient dry bulb temperature ___________ degrees CAmbient wet bulb temperature ___________ degrees CEntering chilled water temperature _____ degrees CLeaving chilled water temperature ______ degrees C

Ambient dry bulb temperature ___________ degrees FAmbient wet bulb temperature ___________ degrees FEntering chilled water temperature _____ degrees FLeaving chilled water temperature ______ degrees F

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 60


5. Unusual vibration, noise, etc. ___________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________


Signature and Date










SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 61


Functional Performance Test Checklist - Air Cooled Condensing Unit

For Condensing Unit: [_____]

1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate operation of refrigeration system as per specifications including the following: Start building air handler to provide load for condensing unit. Activate controls system start sequence as follows.

a. Start air handling unit. Verify control system energizes condensing unit start sequence. ____________________________________________

b. Shut off air handling equipment to verify condensing unit de-energizes. ______________________________________________________________

c. Restart air handling equipment one minute after condensing unit shut down. Verify condensing unit restart sequence. _______________________

2. Verify condensing unit amperage each phase and voltage phase to phase and phase to ground.

PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3 Amperage __________ __________ __________ Voltage __________ __________ Voltage _______________________ Voltage to ground __________ __________ __________

3. Record the following information: Ambient dry bulb temperature __________ degrees C Ambient wet bulb temperature __________ degrees C Suction pressure __________ kPa gauge Discharge pressure __________ kPa gauge

Ambient dry bulb temperature ________ degrees F Ambient wet bulb temperature ________ degrees F Suction pressure ________ psig Discharge pressure ________ psig

4. Unusual vibration, noise, etc. ___________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________


Signature and Date



Contractor's Electrical Representative Representative _____________________________

Contractor's Testing, Adjusting and Balancing _____________________________


SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 62






SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 63


Functional Performance Test Checklist - Hot Water Boiler

For Boiler: [_____]

1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate operation of hot water system as per specifications including the following: Start building heating equipment to provide load for boiler. Activate controls system boiler start sequence as follows.

a. Start hot water pump and establish hot water flow. Verify boiler hot water proof-of-flow switch operation. ______________________________

b. Verify control system energizes boiler start sequence. ___________

c. Verify boiler senses hot water temperature below set point and control system activates boiler start. ___________________________________

d. Shut off building heating equipment to remove load on hot water system. Verify boiler shutdown sequence is initiated and accomplished after load is removed. _________________________________________________________

2. Verify boiler inlet/outlet pressure reading, compare to Test and Balance (TAB) Report, boiler design conditions, and boiler manufacturer's performance data.

DESIGN TAB ACTUALBoiler inlet pressure (kPa gauge) __________ _________ __________Boiler outlet pressure (kPa gauge) __________ _________ __________Boiler flow rate (L/s) __________ _________ __________Flue-gas temperature at boiler outlet _________ __________Percent carbon dioxide in flue-gas _________ __________Draft at boiler flue-gas exit _________ __________Draft or pressure in furnace _________ __________Stack emission pollutants __________ _________ __________concentrationFuel type __________ _________ __________Combustion efficiency __________ _________ __________

DESIGN TAB ACTUALBoiler inlet pressure (psig) __________ _________ __________Boiler outlet pressure (psig) __________ _________ __________Boiler flow rate (gpm) __________ _________ __________Flue-gas temperature at boiler outlet _________ __________Percent carbon dioxide in flue-gas _________ __________Draft at boiler flue-gas exit _________ __________Draft or pressure in furnace _________ __________Stack emission pollutants __________ _________ __________concentrationFuel type __________ _________ __________Combustion efficiency __________ _________ __________


Ambient temperature __________ degrees CEntering hot water temperature __________ degrees CLeaving hot water temperature __________ degrees C

Ambient temperature __________ degrees FEntering hot water temperature __________ degrees F

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 64


Leaving hot water temperature __________ degrees F

4. Verify temperatures in item 3 are in accordance with the reset schedule. ________________________________________________________________

5. Verify proper operation of boiler safeties. __________________________


___________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

7. Visually check refractory for cracks or spalling and refractory and tubes for flame impingement. _____________________________________________


Signature and Date










SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 65


Functional Performance Test Checklist - Steam Boiler

For Boiler: [_____]

1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate operation of steam heating system as per specifications including the following: Start building heating equipment to provide load for boiler. Activate controls system boiler start sequence as follows.

a. Start steam heating system. Verify control system energizes boiler start sequence. ___________________________________________________________

b. Verify boiler senses steam pressure below set point and control system activates boiler start. ____________________________________________

c. Shut off building heating equipment to remove load on steam heating system. Verify boiler shutdown sequence is initiated and accomplished after load is removed. __________________________________________________________

d. Verify that water level and makeup water system are operational. _____________________________________________________________________________

2. Verify boiler inlet/outlet pressure reading, compare to boiler design conditions and manufacturer's performance data.

DESIGN TAB ACTUAL Boiler inlet water temp (degrees F) __________ __________ __________ Boiler outlet pressure (kPa gauge) __________ __________ __________ Flue-gas temperature at boiler outlet (degrees C) __________ __________ Percent carbon dioxide in flue-gas __________ __________ Draft at boiler flue-gas exit __________ __________ Draft or pressure in furnace __________ __________ Stack emission pollutants _________ __________ __________ concentration Fuel type __________ __________ __________ Combustion efficiency __________ __________ __________

DESIGN TAB ACTUAL Boiler inlet water temp (degrees F) __________ __________ __________ Boiler outlet pressure (psig) __________ __________ __________ Flue-gas temperature at boiler outlet (degrees F) __________ __________ Percent carbon dioxide in flue-gas __________ __________ Draft at boiler flue-gas exit __________ __________ Draft or pressure in furnace __________ __________ Stack emission pollutants __________ __________ __________ concentration Fuel type __________ __________ __________ Combustion efficiency __________ __________ __________


Ambient temperature __________ degrees C Ambient temperature __________ degrees F

4. Verify proper operation of boiler safeties. __________________________


___________________________________________________________________________

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 66


___________________________________________________________________________

6. Visually check refractory for cracks or spalling and refractory and tubes for flame impingement. _______________________________________________


Signature and Date










SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 67


Functional Performance Test Checklist - Fan Coil Units

The Contracting Officer will select fan coil units to be spot-checked during the functional performance test. The number of terminals shall not exceed [2] [10] [10 percent].

1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate operation of selected fan coils as per specifications including the following:

a. Cooling only fan coils:

(1) Verify fan coil unit response to room temperature set point adjustment. Changes to be cooling set point to cooling set point minus 10 degrees and return to cooling set point. ___________________________________

(2) Check blower fan air flow. _____ L/s Check blower fan air flow. _____ cfm

(3) Check cooling coil water flow. _____ L/s Check cooling coil water flow. _____ gpm

(4) Verify proper operation of cooling water control valve. ______

b. Cooling/heating fan coils:

(1) Verify fan coil unit response to room temperature set point adjustment. Changes to be cooling set point to heating set point and return to cooling set point. _____________________________________________

(2) Check blower fan air flow. _____ L/s Check blower fan air flow. _____ cfm

(3) Check cooling coil water flow. _____ L/s Check cooling coil water flow. _____ cfm

(4) Verify proper operation of cooling water control valve. _____

(5) Check cooling mode inlet air temperature. _____ degrees C Check cooling mode inlet air temperature. _____ degrees F

(6) Check cooling mode outlet air temperature. _____ degrees C Check cooling mode outlet air temperature. _____ degrees F

(7) Check heating coil water flow. _____ L/s Check heating coil water flow. _____ gpm

(8) Verify proper operation of heating water control valve. _____

(9) Check heating mode inlet air temperature. _____ degrees C Check heating mode inlet air temperature. _____ degrees F

(10) Check heating mode outlet air temperature. _____ degrees C Check heating mode outlet air temperature. _____ degrees F


Signature and Date

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 68


Contractor's Quality Control Representative ____________________________


Contractor's Electrical Representative ______________________________







SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 69


Functional Performance Test Checklist - Unit Heaters

The Contracting Officer will select unit heaters to be spot-checked during the functional performance test. The number of terminals shall not exceed [2] [10] [10 percent].

1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate operation of selected unit heaters as per specifications including the following:

a. Verify unit heater response to room temperature set point adjustment. Changes to be heating set point to heating set point minus 10 degrees and return to heating set point. ___________________________________

b. Check blower fan speed. _______________________________________rpm

c. Check heating mode inlet air temperature. _____ degrees C Check heating mode inlet air temperature. _____ degrees F

d. Check heating mode outlet air temperature. _____ degrees C Check heating mode outlet air temperature. _____ degrees F


Signature and Date










SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 70


Functional Performance Test Checklist - Heat Exchanger

For Converter: HX-1

1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate operation of heat exchanger as per specifications including the following:

a. Verify proper flow. _________________________________

b. Verify that the building controls open the valve allowing flow to the heat exchanger according the the sequence of control. ________________

c. Shut off building cooling equipment to remove load on system. Verify that the valve allowing flow to the heat exchanger closes. ________

2. Verify converter inlet/outlet pressure reading, compare to converter design conditions and manufacturer's performance data.

DESIGN ACTUAL Hot Side inlet water temp (degrees F) __________ __________ Hot Side outlet water temp (degrees F) __________ __________ Cold Side inlet water temp (degrees F) __________ __________ Cold Side outlet water temp (degrees F) __________ __________ Hot side inlet pressure (psig) __________ __________ Hot Side outlet pressure (psig) __________ __________ Hot Side Water flow rate based on pressure drop. __________ __________ Hot Side Water flow rate based on flow measuring device. __________ __________ Cold side inlet pressure (psig) __________ __________ Cold Side outlet pressure (psig) __________ __________ Cold Side Water flow rate based on pressure drop. __________ __________ Cold Side Water flow rate based on flow measuring device. __________ __________

3. Check and report unusual vibration, noise, etc. ___________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________


Signature and Date Contractor's Quality Control Representative ____________________________






SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 71




SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 72


Functional Performance Test Checklist - Heat Pump Unit

For Heat Pump: _____

1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall verify operation of each heat pump as per specification including the following:

a. System safeties allow start if safety conditions are met. ________

b. Verify cooling and heating operation by varying thermostat set point from space set point to space set point plus 10 degrees, space set point minus 10 degrees, and returning to space set point. __________________

c. Verify that airflow is within +10/-0 percent of design airflow. _____________________________________________________________________________

d. Command all units off, then command all the units on. Verify that units start in a staggered manner and that all units do not start at once.___________________________________________________________________


Signature and Date









SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 73


Functional Performance Test Checklist - Steam/Hot Water Converter

For Converter: [_____]

1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate operation of heating system as per specifications including the following: Start building heating equipment to provide load for converter.

a. Verify control system energizes. _________________________________

b. Verify converter senses hot water temperature below set point and control system modulates steam valve. ______________________________________

c. Shut off building heating equipment to remove load on heating system. Verify converter steam valve closes after load is removed. ________

2. Verify converter inlet/outlet pressure reading, compare to converter design conditions and manufacturer's performance data.

DESIGN ACTUAL Converter inlet water temp (degrees C) __________ __________ Converter outlet water temp (degrees F) __________ __________ Converter inlet steam pressure (psig) __________ __________ Determine water flow rate based on pressure drop through converter __________ __________ Determine water flow rate with flow measuring device __________ __________ Verify that temperature of water is in accordance with outdoor air reset schedule __________ __________

DESIGN ACTUAL Converter inlet water temp (degrees F) __________ __________ Converter outlet water temp (degrees F) __________ __________ Converter inlet steam pressure (psig) __________ __________ Determine water flow rate based on pressure drop through converter __________ __________ Determine water flow rate with flow measuring device __________ __________ Verify that temperature of water is in accordance with outdoor air reset schedule __________ __________

3. Verify proper operation of converter safeties. _______________________


___________________________________________________________________________




SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 74









SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 75


Functional Performance Test Checklist - Computer Room Unit

For Computer Room Unit: [_____]

1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall verify operation of computer room unit as per specification including the following:

a. System safeties allow start if safety conditions are met. ________

b. Verify cooling and heating operation by varying thermostat set point from space set point to space set point plus 10 degrees, space set point minus 10 degrees, and returning to space set point. __________________

c. Verify humidifier operation by varying humidistat set point from space set point to space set point plus 20 percent RH, and returning to space set point. _________________________________________________________________

d. Verify that airflow is within +10/-0 percent of design airflow. _____________________________________________________________________________

e. Verify unit shut down during fire event initiated by smoke/heat sensors. ___________________________________________________________________


Signature and Date










SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 76


Functional Performance Test Checklist - Geothermal Well Field

1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate operation of the system as per specifications including the following: Start equipment to provide energy source for the geothermal well field.

2. Verify the geothermal well field inlet/outlet readings, compare to design conditions and manufacturer's performance data.

Design Actual Loop inlet temp (degrees F) __________ __________ Loop outlet temp (degrees F) __________ __________ Loop flow rate __________ __________ Loop pressure drop __________ __________ Energy transferred (BTU/hr) __________ __________


Signature and Date




Contractor's Testing , Adjusting and Balancing Representative _____________________________





SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 77


Functional Performance Test Checklist - HVAC Controls

For HVAC System: [_____]

The Contracting Officer will select HVAC control systems to undergo functional performance testing. The number of systems shall not exceed [2] [10] [10 percent].

1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall verify operation of HVAC controls by performing the following tests:

a. Verify that controllers are maintaining the set points by manually measuring the controlled variables with a thermometer, sling psychrometer, inclined manometer, etc.

b. Verify sensor/controller combination by manually measuring the controlled medium. Take readings from control panel display and compare readings taken manually. Record all readings for all sensors on a separate form.

Sensor - ___________________________________________ Manual measurement _______________________________ Panel reading value ______________________________

c. Verify system stability by changing the controller set point as follows:

(1) Air temperature - 10 degrees F

(2) Water temperature - 10 degrees F

(3) Static or Differential pressure - 10 percent of set point

(4) Relative humidity - percent (RH) (5) Flow - 10 percent

The control system shall be observed for 10 minutes after the change in set point. Instability or excessive hunting will be unacceptable.

d. Verify interlock with other HVAC controls.

e. Verify interlock with fire alarm control panel.

f. Verify interlock with EMCS.

g. Verify all points are available at the EMCS..

[h. Change controller set point 10 percent with EMCS and verify correct response.]

2. Verify that operation of control system conforms to that specified in the sequence of operation.


Signature and Date

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 78











SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 79


Functional Performance Test Checklist - Energy Recovery System

For Energy Recovery System: [_____]

1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate operation of energy recovery system as per specifications including the following: Start equipment to provide energy source for recovery system.

a. Verify energy source is providing recoverable energy. ____________

b. Verify recovery system senses available energy and activates. ____

c. Verify that recovery system deactivates when recoverable energy is no longer available. __________________________________________________

2. Verify recovery system inlet/outlet readings, compare to design conditions and manufacturer's performance data.

Design Actual Primary loop inlet temp (degrees C) __________ __________ Primary loop outlet temp (degrees F) __________ __________ Primary loop flow rate __________ __________ Secondary loop inlet temp (degrees) __________ __________ Secondary loop outlet temp (degrees C) __________ __________ Energy recovered (kJ) __________ __________

Design Actual Primary loop inlet temp (degrees F) __________ __________ Primary loop outlet temp (degrees F) __________ __________ Primary loop flow rate __________ __________ Secondary loop inlet temp (degrees F) __________ __________ Secondary loop outlet temp (degrees F) __________ __________ Energy recovered BTU's) __________ __________

3. Check and report unusual vibration, noise, etc.

___________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________


Signature and Date




Contractor's Testing , Adjusting and Balancing Representative _____________________________



SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 80





SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 81


Functional Performance Test Checklist - Domestic Hot Water Heater

For Water Heater: [_____]

1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate operation of domestic hot water system as per specifications including the following:

a. Run domestic hot water at all plumbing fixtures. Determine flow rate of hot water at fixtures. Verify hot water heater burners fire to maintain hot water temperature.______________________

b. Shut off domestic hot water at plumbing fixtures. Verify hot water heater burners shut off when load is satisfied. _________________________________________________________

c. Put building into unoccupied mode and verify that domestic hot water recirculating pump shuts off and hot water heater controls are disabled. ________________________________________________

d. Put building into occupied mode and verify that domestic hot water recirculating pump starts and hot water heater controls are enabled. _________________________________


Entering hot water temperature __________ degrees CLeaving hot water temperature __________ degrees CDomestic hot water flow rate __________ L/s

Entering hot water temperature __________ degrees FLeaving hot water temperature __________ degrees FDomestic hot water flow rate __________ gpm

3. Verify capacity of water heater from data in item 2. ________________________________________________________________

4. Verify proper operation of water heater safeties. _______________________________________________________________


___________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________


Signature and Date





SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 82







SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 83


Functional Performance Test Checklist - Steam/Domestic Hot Water Heat Exchanger

For Heat Exchanger: [_____]

1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate operation of the domestic hot water system as per specifications including the following:

a. Run domestic hot water at all plumbing fixtures. Determine flow rate of hot water at fixtures._ _________________________________

b. Verify heat exchanger senses hot water temperature below set point and control system modulates steam valve. ______________________________________

c. Shut off domestic hot water at plumbing fixtures. Verify heat exchanger steam valve closes after load is removed.

d. Put building into unoccupied mode and verify that domestic hot water recirculating pump shuts off and heat exchanger controls are disabled. ________________________________________________

e. Put building into occupied mode and verify that domestic hot water recirculating pump starts and heat exchanger controls are enabled. ___________________________________________________________

2. Verify heat exchanger inlet/outlet temperature readings and pressures and compare to heat exchanger design conditions and manufacturer's performance data.

DESIGN ACTUAL Converter inlet water temp (degrees C) __________ __________ Converter outlet water temp (degrees F) __________ __________ Converter inlet steam pressure (psig) __________ __________ Determine water flow rate based on pressure drop through heat exchanger __________ __________ Determine water flow rate with flow measuring device or from plumbing fixture flow rate __________ __________ DESIGN ACTUAL Converter inlet water temp (degrees F) __________ __________ Converter outlet water temp (degrees F) __________ __________ Converter inlet steam pressure (psig) __________ __________ Determine water flow rate based on pressure drop through converter __________ __________ Determine water flow rate with flow measuring device or from plumbing fixture flow rate __________ __________

3. Verify proper operation of heat exchanger safeties. _______________________


___________________________________________________________________________

5. Certification: We the undersigned have witnessed the above functional

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 84


performance tests and certify that the item tested has met the performance requirements in this section of the specifications.










SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 85


Functional Performance Test Checklist - Electric Instantaneous Point-of-Use Water Heaters

1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate operation of electric instantaneous point-of-use water heaters as per specifications including the following:

a. Run domestic hot water at all connected plumbing fixtures. Determine flow rate of hot water at fixtures. _____________________________

b. Check water heater inlet water temperature. _____ degrees C _____ degrees F

c. Check water heater outlet water temperature. _____ degrees C _____ degrees F

2. Verify capacity of water heater from data in item 1. ________________________________________________________________


Signature and Date










SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 86


Functional Performance Test Checklist - Lighting System

1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate operation of lighting system for 10% of sensors, devices, or spaces as applicable including the following:

a. Occupancy Sensors - Enter room to turn on lights and leave room. Record time to lights off. _____________________________

b. Occupancy Sensors - Verify manual switch operation. ______________________________________________

c. Night Shutoff - Verify lighting system shuts off at specified time._________________________________________

d. Night Shutoff - Verify occupancy sensors override night shutoff.______________________________________

e. Automatic Lighting Dimmers - Verify light dimmers increase light output from fixtures by blocking daylight from windows. ______________________________________________

f. Automatic Lighting Dimmers - Verify light dimmers decrease light output from fixtures by allowing daylight into space._________________________________________

2. Record illumination level in footcandles at 30 inches above the floor at 10 ft intervals for all spaces with automatic lighting dimmers. ________________________________________________________________


Signature and Date










SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 87


APPENDIX C

BASIS OF DESIGN

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 88


BASIS OF DESIGN DOCUMENT FOR LEED FUNDAMENTAL COMMISSIONING

Project: Project, Location, PN ######

Approved: Name Design Agent's Representative Date

Instructions: Each bullet point describes information that should be inputted. Replace the explanation of the bullet point with the appropriate information. Add fields or additional spaces as necessary to provide all pertinent information to the commissioning of the building energy-related systems. Matrices may be provided to describe Primary Design Assumptions for redundant space types rather than listing per the outline.

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 89


BASIS OF DESIGN DOCUMENT FOR LEED FUNDAMENTAL COMMISSIONING

Contents

1. Primary Design Assumptions a. Climatic Design Conditions b. Space Type 1 i. Space Use ii. Redundancy iii. Diversity iv. Space Zoning v. Occupancy vi. Operations vii. Space Environmental Requirements c. Space Type 2 i. Space Use ii. Redundancy iii. Diversity iv. Space Zoning v. Occupancy vi. Operations vii. Space Environmental Requirements d. Space Type 3 i. Space Use ii. Redundancy iii. Diversity iv. Space Zoning v. Occupancy vi. Operations vii. Space Environmental Requirements2. Applicable Standards3. System Narratives a. HVAC&R Systems i. System 1 ii. System 2 iii. System 3 b. Lighting Systems i. System 1 ii. System 2 iii. System 3 c. Domestic Hot Water Systems i. System 1 ii. System 2 iii. System 3 d. On-site Power Systems i. System 1 ii. System 2 iii. System 3 e. Other Systems i. System 1 ii. System 2 iii. System 3

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 90


1. Primary Design Assumptions

a. Climatic Design Conditions Identify Source of Design Condition Data. (Example: Design Criteria Data is obtained from the Air Force Combat Climatology Center in accordance with UFC 3-400-02, Design: Engineering Weather Data.)

Location Information. (Example: Ft. Drum, NY; Latitude 44.05 N, Longitude 75.73 W, Elevation 679 ft)

Summer Hot Design Condition (Example: 1.0% Dry Bulb Temperature Occurrence 84 deg F / 70 deg F mean coincident wet bulb temperature) Winter Design Condition (Example: 99.6% Dry Bulb Temperature Occurrence -11 deg F/ -11 deg F mean coincident wet bulb temperature)

Summer Humid Design Condition (Example: 1.0% Wet Bulb Temperature Occurrence 73 deg F/ 79 deg F mean coincident dry bulb temperature)

Cooling and Heating Degree Days and Base Temperature (Example: Cooling Degree Days 584 Heating Degree Days 6901 Base 65 deg F)

b. Space Type 1

Space Use: Explain how the space(s) will be used (Example: Classroom occasionally used as conference room). Redundancy: Identify whether and why the systems serving the space(s) require redundancy. (Example: Systems serving spaces will use hydronic heating system with two boilers minimum.)

Diversity: Identify whether and why diversity may be applied to the determination of block cooling/heating loads, ventilation rates, lighting, electrical circuit capacity, etc. (Example: Applied population diversity to ventilation system in accordance with ASHRAE 62.1-2004. Applied diversity to VAV system by setting airflow at value needed to satisfy total block load.)

Space Zoning: Describe how spaces will be zoned. (Example: No more than 3 private offices will be grouped together on one VAV box and thermostat. Commander offices will have its own VAV box and thermostat.) (Example: External open office spaces [within 15 ft of wall] will be separately zoned from interior open office spaces.) (Example: Each office is its own zone.)

Occupancy: Describe the occupancy including number of people at various times (i.e. drill weekend-maximum capacity, weekdays-20%; or 0700-0900 - none, 0900-1400 - 30 people, 1400-1600 - none; 1 person per 100 sqft.).

Operations: Describe how space(s) are operated. (Example: Building is operated 24 hrs 7 days a week; Building systems are controlled from DDC

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 91


system to switch modes based on occupancy schedule or sensor input.) (Example: The classroom is used occasionally as a conference room.)

Space Environmental Requirements: Describe the environmental requirements of the space(s). Include description of temperatures, humidity levels, ventilation rates, air quality, lighting levels, or any other specific parameters (i.e. 75 deg F, 50% rh, 30 fc, etc.).

c. Space Type 2

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 92


2. Applicable Standards List standards, codes, design guides, and other references used for the design and installation of the building energy systems.

(Example: ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2004 Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2004 Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality ASHRAE Standard 52.2-1999 Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size LEED-NC Green Building Rating System for New Construction & Major Renovations v2.2 LEED for New Construction & Major Renovation v 2.2 Reference Guide International Mechanical Code International Plumbing Code NFPA 54 National Fuel Gas Code NFPA 90A Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems NFPA 90B Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems UFC 4-171-05 Design: Guide for Army Reserve Facilities UFC 3-400-01 Energy Conservation UFC 3-400-02 Design: Engineering Weather Data UFC 3-410-01 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning)

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 93


3. System Narratives

a. HVAC&R Systems i. System 1 (Examples: Office Area VAV Air Distribution System, Hydronic Heating System, Geothermal Systems, Control Systems, Unit Heating)

Insert narrative of system.

ii. System 2


b. Lighting Systems

i. System 1 (Examples: High-efficiency fluorescent lamps with high-efficiency ballasts. A daylight harvesting system with automatic dimming of the fluorescent fixtures based on the amount of natural sunlight in the area will be specified in the open office areas.)


ii. System 2


c. Domestic Hot Water Systems

i. System 1 (Examples: Gas-fire Water Heater with External Storage Tank, Recirculation Loop, Instantaneous Electric Water Heaters)


ii. System 2


d. On-site Power Systems

i. System 1 (Examples: Hydro-power Units, etc.)


ii. System 2


e. Other Systems

i. System 1


ii. System 2


SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 94


SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 95


APPENDIX D

OWNER'S PROJECT REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 96


1. Owner and User Requirements

a. Primary Purpose, Program, and Use

Army Reserve Training Center, which includes classrooms, offices and work room areas.

b. Project History

The project concepts are based on the current Army Reserve standard design criteria and general requirements indicated in UFC 4-171-05 and other Army Reserve and DoD criteria documents, which are used for the development of new building designs for Army Reserve training facilities.

c. Broad Goals

To provide economical facilities of consistent design quality and provisions, and that that meet the functional and training needs of the units.

i. Future Expansion: Future facility expansion should be a consideration in project design, but is not a primary consideration. Any provisions for future expansion should be limited to those with little or no construction cost impact.

ii. Flexibility: To accommodate the growth or change of the units' training goals, common open office areas are provided with a balanced ratio of exclusive office space and classrooms, to offer user training flexibility. The facility is designed with flexibility of building systems.

iii. Quality of Materials: Similar to a representative facility of the same type in the private sector - 25-to-50 year life with a normal maintenance and replacement schedule.

iv. Construction Costs: The facility must be designed and constructed within the project's authorized budget.

v. Operational Costs: A major goal is to minimize the operating and maintenance costs as much as practical while meeting the project's construction budget. Another major goal is to meet or exceed EPAct requirements.

vi. Life Cycle: Building systems are considered with respect to life cycle costs, not just initial costs.

vii. Other Goals: The facility is an institutional building with both community and national significance being the home station for the local Army Reserve unit. Thus the design of the building must reflect the Reservists' feelings of patriotism, pride and community participation as well as a sense of the purpose of the U.S. Army: to keep the peace by maintaining a strong and capable organized military force.

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 97


2. Environmental and Sustainability Goals

a. LEED Goal LEED Certified rating.

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 98


3. Energy Efficiency Goals a. Compliance with the Energy Policy Act of 2005

It is mandatory that all federal buildings designed after January 2007 meet the requirements of the Energy Policy Act of 2005. This act requires that the building energy consumption level be reduced by 30% compared to the baseline building performance per ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2004, Appendix G if Life Cycle Cost Effective. If 30% reduction is not life-cycle cost effective, the most energy efficient design that is life cycle cost effective must be evaluated. Federal agencies are required to specify FEMP-designated or ENERGY STAR equipment, including building mechanical and lighting equipment and builder-supplied appliances. This project strives to meet the energy goals required by EPAct. However, this project is a renovation with a minor addition and many of the building's systems will be existing. Renovations and new equipment will be selected to achieve energy savings over the basic minimum requirements of ASHRAE 90.1. b. Building Siting

As a general rule, the Training Center Building, due to its high usage and the desire to provide high community visual presence, will be located on the most visible portion of the site. The other buildings are typically located relatively near the Training Center Building for convenient accessibility. When practical, the longest sides of buildings are oriented along an east-west axis. This orientation will generally result in most windows facing north and south to minimize solar heat gain. Buildings also must fit within the available site limitations and comply with AT/FP requirements.

c. Building Facade

The exterior appearance of the new addition will vary to be compatible with the adjoining environment's architectural theme and existing construction.

d. Building Fenestration

Windows are required in regularly occupied areas on exterior walls and will be selected for ASHRAE 90.1 compliance and EPAct energy use goals. Windows shall also comply with AT/FP requirements.

e. Building Envelope

Envelope components on the new addition are selected for ASHRAE 90.1 compliance and EPAct energy use goals.

f. Building Roof

Roof components are selected for ASHRAE 90.1 compliance and EPAct energy use goals.

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 99


4. Indoor Environmental Quality Requirements

a. All Space Types

i. Intended Use: Classroom occasionally used as conference room.

ii. Occupancy Schedule: Buildings typically are occupied by full time staff from approximately 7:00 AM to 5:00 PM during the normal five-day work week. Buildings are also occupied during similar hours on both days two or three weekends per month by training Reservists.

iii. Environmental Requirements:

Lighting: IESNA Lighting Reference Guide and UFC 4-171-05Temperature: ASHRAE 55 and UFC 4-171-05Humidity: ASHRAE 55 and UFC 4-171-05Air Quality: ASHRAE 62.1Ventilation: ASHRAE 62.1 and UFC 4-171-05Filtration: ASHRAE 62.1The Army Reserve Facility Design Guide UFC 4-171-05 indicates minimum STC ratings.

iv. Occupant System Control Ability: Lighting: Switches with dual-level switching or dimming as indicated in UFC 4-171-05Temperature: NoneHumidity: NoneAir Quality: NoneVentilation: None

v. Type of Lighting: Lighting system types are identified in UFC 4-171-05.

vi. After-hour Use Accommodations: Generally, no accommodations for after-hours use are required. Building usage is routinely scheduled.

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 100


5. Equipment and System Expectations

a. HVAC Systems

i. Quality and Reliability: No specific quality or reliability requirements specified. Equipment should remain serviceable over life of building or to the extent typical of the type of equipment. ii. Type: No special expectations have been identified. iii. Automation: No special expectations have been identified. iv. Flexibility: No special expectations have been identified. v. Maintenance Requirements: No special expectations have been identified.

b. Lighting Systems

i. Quality and Reliability: The building lighting system should meet or exceed ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1 requirements. ii. Type: No special expectations have been identified. iii. Automation: No special expectations have been identified. iv. Flexibility: No special expectations have been identified. v. Maintenance Requirements: No special expectations have been identified.

c. Domestic Hot Water Systems

i. Quality and Reliability: No special expectations have been identified. ii. Type: Explain the type of equipment desired. No special expectations have been identified. iii. Automation: No special expectations have been identified. iv. Flexibility: No special expectations have been identified. v. Maintenance Requirements: No special expectations have been identified.

SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 101


6.Building Occupant and O&M Personnel Requirements

a. Facility Operation

Unit and/or contract staff will operate the facility.

b. UMCS (EMCS or FMCS)

The facility building automation system is capable of energy monitoring. It will not be connected to a base-wide EMCS. Requirements are as indicated in project documentation.

c. Occupant Training and Orientation

Required training will be as indicated in Section 01 78 23.00 06, Equipment Operating, Maintenance and Repair Manuals.

d. O&M Staff Training and Orientation

Required training will be as indicated in Section 01 78 23.00 06.


SECTION 01 46 00.00 06 Page 102


SECTION 01 50 00

TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND CONTROLS08/09

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

Requirements of this Section apply to, and are a component of, each section of the specifications.

1.2 REFERENCES


NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

NFPA 241 (2009) Standard for Safeguarding Construction,Alteration, and Demolition Operations

NFPA 70 (2011) National Electrical Code

1.3 CONSTRUCTION SITE PLAN

Prior to the start of work, the Contractor shall propose a site layout plan for Government acceptance, indicating proposed locations and dimensions for temporary facilities onsite and offsite, including staging, storage, trailers, access, parking and other Contractor use of the site, and shall work with Government to arrive at a final plan acceptable to the Government. Contractor's trailers and other equipment and materials on the site shall be tied down to resist storm force winds. Contractor shall maintain the site free from debris that could represent a hazard during storm force winds. Identify any areas which may have to be graveled to prevent the tracking of mud. Indicate if the use of a supplemental or other staging area is desired.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TEMPORARY SIGNAGE

2.1.1 Bulletin Board

Immediately upon beginning of work, provide a weatherproof glass-covered bulletin board not less than 36 by 48 inches in size for displaying the Equal Employment Opportunity poster, a copy of the wage decision contained in the contract, Wage Rate Information poster, and other information approved by the Contracting Officer. Locate the bulletin board at the project site in a conspicuous place easily accessible to all employees, as approved by the Contracting Officer.

2.1.2 Safety Signs

Erect signs within 15 days after receipt of the notice to proceed. Correct



the data required by the safety sign daily, with light colored metallic or non-metallic numerals.

2.2 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL

2.2.1 Haul Roads

At contractors expense construct access and haul roads necessary for proper prosecution of the work under this contract. Construct with suitable grades and widths; sharp curves, blind corners, and dangerous cross traffic are be avoided. Provide necessary lighting, signs, barricades, and distinctive markings for the safe movement of traffic. The method of dust control, although optional, must be adequate to ensure safe operation at all times. Location, grade, width, and alignment of construction and hauling roads are subject to approval by the Contracting Officer. Lighting must be adequate to assure full and clear visibility for full width of haul road and work areas during any night work operations.

2.2.2 Barricades

Erect and maintain temporary barricades to limit public access to hazardous areas. Whenever safe public access to paved areas such as roads, parking areas or sidewalks is prevented by construction activities or as otherwise necessary to ensure the safety of both pedestrian and vehicular traffic barricades will be required. Securely place barricades clearly visible with adequate illumination to provide sufficient visual warning of the hazard during both day and night.

2.2.3 Fencing

a. Provide fencing along the construction site at all open excavations and tunnels to control access by unauthorized people. Fencing must be installed to be able to restrain a force of at least 250 pounds against it.

bb. In addition, prior to the start of work, enclose those areas at the construction site which are not within the construction fence with a temporary safety fence, including gates and warning signs, to protect the public from construction activities. The safety fence shall match the base standard color (or bright orange where it protects excavated areas), shall be made of high density polyethylene grid or approved equal, a minimum of 42 inches high, supported and tightly secured to steel posts located on minimum 10 foot centers. Remove the fence from the work site upon completion of the contract.

2.2.4 Temporary Wiring

Provide temporary wiring in accordance with NFPA 241 and NFPA 70, Article 305-6(b), Assured Equipment Grounding Conductor Program. Include frequent inspection of all equipment and apparatus.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EMPLOYEE PARKING

Contractor employees will park privately owned vehicles in an area designated by the Contracting Officer. This area will be within reasonable walking distance of the construction site. Contractor employee parking must not interfere with existing and established parking requirements of



the government installation.

3.2 AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY SERVICES

3.2.1 Temporary Utilities

Provide temporary utilities required for construction. Materials may be new or used, must be adequate for the required usage, not create unsafe conditions, and not violate applicable codes and standards.

3.2.2 Payment for Utility Services

a. The contractor is to provide temporary electrical power separate from Building 181 power.

b. The amount of each utility service consumed will be charged to or paid for by the Contractor at prevailing rates charged to the Government or, where the utility is produced by the Government, at reasonable rates determined by the Contracting Officer. Carefully conserve any utilities furnished without charge.

c. Pay all costs incurred in connecting, converting, and transferring the utilities to the work. Make connections, including providing backflow-preventing devices on connections to domestic water lines; providing meters; and providing transformers; and make disconnections. Under no circumstances will taps to base fire hydrants be allowed for obtaining domestic water.

3.2.3 Meters and Temporary Connections

At the Contractors expense and in a manner satisfactory to the Contracting Officer, provide and maintain necessary temporary connections, distribution lines, and meter bases (Government will provide meters) required to measure the amount of each utility used for the purpose of determining charges. Notify the Contracting Officer, in writing, 5 working days before final electrical connection is desired so that a utilities contract can be established. The Government will provide a meter and make the final hot connection after inspection and approval of the Contractor's temporary wiring installation. The Contractor will not make the final electrical connection.

3.2.4 Advance Deposit

An advance deposit for utilities consisting of an estimated month's usage or a minimum of $50.00 will be required. The last monthly bills for the fiscal year will normally be offset by the deposit and adjustments will be billed or returned as appropriate. Services to be rendered for the next fiscal year, beginning 1 October, will require a new deposit. Notification of the due date for this deposit will be mailed to the Contractor prior to the end of the current fiscal year.

3.2.5 Final Meter Reading

Before completion of the work and final acceptance of the work by the Government, notify the Contracting Officer, in writing, 5 working days before termination is desired. The Government will take a final meter reading, disconnect service, and remove the meters. Then remove all the temporary distribution lines, meter bases, and associated paraphernalia. Pay all outstanding utility bills before final acceptance of the work by



the Government.

3.2.6 Sanitation

a. Provide and maintain within the construction area minimum field-type sanitary facilities approved by the Contracting Officer and periodically empty wastes into a municipal, district, or station sanitary sewage system, or remove waste to a commercial facility. Obtain approval from the system owner prior to discharge into any municipal, district, or commercial sanitary sewer system. Any penalties and / or fines associated with improper discharge will be the responsibility of the Contractor. Coordinate with the Contracting Officer and follow station regulations and procedures when discharging into the station sanitary sewer system. Maintain these conveniences at all times without nuisance. Include provisions for pest control and elimination of odors. Government toilet facilities will not be available to Contractor's personnel.

3.2.7 Telephone

Make arrangements and pay all costs for telephone facilities desired.

3.2.8 Fire Protection

Provide temporary fire protection equipment for the protection of personnel and property during construction. Remove debris and flammable materials daily to minimize potential hazards.

3.3 CONTRACTOR'S TEMPORARY FACILITIES

3.3.1 Security Provisions

Provide adequate outside security lighting at the Contractor's temporary facilities. The Contractor will be responsible for the security of its own equipment; in addition, the Contractor will notify the appropriate law enforcement agency requesting periodic security checks of the temporary project field office.

3.3.2 Storage Size and Location

The open site available for storage must be confined to the operations area as indicated.

3.3.3 Storage in Existing Buildings

The Contractor will be working in an existing building that will be occupied; the storage of material will not be allowed.

3.3.4 Weather Protection of Temporary Facilities and Stored Materials

Take necessary precautions to ensure that roof openings and other critical openings in the building are monitored carefully. Take immediate actions required to seal off such openings when rain or other detrimental weather is imminent, and at the end of each workday. Ensure that the openings are completely sealed off to protect materials and equipment in the building from damage.



3.3.4.1 Building and Site Storm Protection

When a warning of gale force winds is issued, take precautions to minimize danger to persons, and protect the work and nearby Government property. Precautions must include, but are not limited to, closing openings; removing loose materials, tools and equipment from exposed locations; and removing or securing scaffolding and other temporary work. Close openings in the work when storms of lesser intensity pose a threat to the work or any nearby Government property.

3.3.5 Quality Control Manager Records and Field Office

Provide on the jobsite an office with approximately 200 square feet of useful floor area for the exclusive use of the QC Manager. Provide a weathertight structure with adequate heating and cooling, toilet facilities, lighting, ventilation, a 4 by 8 foot plan table, a standard size office desk and chair, computer station, and working communications facilities. Provide a door with a cylinder lock and windows with locking hardware. Make utility connections. Locate where indicated. File quality control records in the office and make available at all times to the Government. After completion of the work, remove the entire structure from the site.

3.4 CONTRACACTOR FACILITIES

3.4.1 Field Office

The Contractor shall supply and maintain a lockable field office, with utilities noted below, for the exclusive use of the Government, separate and distinct from any facility used by the Contractor. It shall consist of space in a building, a trailer, or equivalent, a minimum of 45 square meters (500 sf), placed and leveled and provided with adequate steps at each exterior door. The facility and its associated equipment shall be new or recently renovated to like new condition.

The space shall be provided and equipped with the following as a minimum:

a) Lighting: Electric light, non-glare type, luminaries to provide minimum illumination level of fifty (50) foot-candles at desk height.

b) Heating and Cooling: Adequate equipment to maintain an ambient air temperature of approximately seventy-two (72) degrees F plus or minus 3 degrees F.

c) Fire Extinguisher: Non-toxic dry chemical, meeting Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. approved Class A, Class B, and Class C fires with minimum rating of 2A, 10B, and 10C.

d) Janitorial services shall be provided on a weekly basis.

e) Sufficient supply of electrical outlets (110 volts).

f) Two partitioned offices each having a minimum 9.3 square meters (100 sf) of floor area. Each office shall have at least one operable window (all windows shall be provided with mini-blinds), and each office shall be supplied with the following equipment:

1) Office desk approximately 0.8m wide by 1.5m long (30"Wx60"L) with lockable drawers, swivel five roller desk chair with arms, and a plan table approximately 0.8m wide by 1.5m long



(30"Wx60"L). Provide one five roller guest chair.2) Pre-wired for two telephone lines with jacks.3) A 5 drawer filing cabinet, lockable, standard size filing cabinet.4) Shelf set; three (3) shelves high by 0.3m (12") inches deep by 0.9m (3') feet long.5) Waste basket6) Pre-wired for telephone and computer high speed internet with RJ-45 jacks with minimum CAT 6 cabling. Minimum two data connections per office.

g) One meeting area having a minimum of 13.9 square meters (150 sf) of floor area. The meeting area shall contain the following:

1) One (1) meeting table 0.8m wide by 2.4m long (2.5'x8') with laminated top.2) Eight (8) five roller chairs.3) Bulletin board, 1.2m by 1.8m (4'x6'), attached to wall.4) White board, 1.2m by 1.8m (4'x6'), attached to wall.5) Waste basket.6) Vertical filing plan rack for five (5) sets of standard "C" size plans, and plan table large enough to accommodate full scale drawings.7) Bottled water dispenser with hot and cold taps. Water shall be furnished as needed.8) Pre-wired for telephone lines with jacks.9) Pre-wired for computer high speed internet with RJ-45 jacks with minimum CAT 6 cabling. Minimum of four data connection for meeting area.10) Two (2) 5 drawer filing cabinets, lockable, standard size filing cabinet.11) Table or counter to hold fax machine and printer

h) Contractor shall provide telephone and high speed internet access to this field office for the use of the Government. Minimum Business Class with download speed of at least 4 mbps. All IT connections shall be for the sole use of the Government; lines cannot be shared with the Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for all costs and monthly fees associated with Government use telephone and date connections.

i) Provide at least four adjacent parking spaces reserved for Government use.

j) Provide a mail slot in one door, or a lockable mailbox mounted on the surface of the door.

k) Provide toilet facilities equivalent to Contractor's on-site office toilet facilities.

The Contractor shall provide janitorial services and consumables, gas for heating, electricity, internet access, and bottled water all at no cost to the Government.

At completion of the project, the Contractor shall remove trailer from site and restore area as appropriate, or restore building space to condition prior to occupancy. Disconnect utilities in accordance with local codes and regulations, and to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer.



3.4.2 Trailer-Type Mobile Office

The Contractor may, at its option, furnish and maintain a trailer-type mobile office acceptable to the Contracting Officer and providing as a minimum the facilities specified above. Securely anchor the trailer to the ground at all four corners to guard against movement during high winds.

3.5 PLANT COMMUNICATION

Whenever the Contractor has the individual elements of its plant so located that operation by normal voice between these elements is not satisfactory, the Contractor must install a satisfactory means of communication, such as telephone or other suitable devices and made available for use by Government personnel.

3.6 TEMPORARY PROJECT SAFETY FENCING

As soon as practicable, but not later than 15 days after the date established for commencement of work, furnish and erect temporary project safety fencing at the work site. The safety fencing must be a high visibility orange colored, high density polyethylene grid or approved equal, a minimum of 42 inches high, supported and tightly secured to steel posts located on maximum 10 foot centers, constructed at the approved location. Maintain the safety fencing during the life of the contract and, upon completion and acceptance of the work, will become the property of the Contractor and be removed from the work site.

3.7 CLEANUP

Remove construction debris, waste materials, packaging material and the like from the work site daily. Any dirt or mud which is tracked onto paved or surfaced roadways must be cleaned away. Store within the fenced area described above or at the supplemental storage area any materials resulting from demolition activities which are salvageable. Neatly stacked stored materials not in trailers, whether new or salvaged.

3.8 RESTORATION OF STORAGE AREA

Upon completion of the project remove the bulletinboard, signs, barricades, haulroads, and any other temporary products from the site. After removal of trailers, materials, and equipment from within the fenced area, remove the fence that will become the property of the Contractor. Restore to the original or better condition, areas used by the Contractor for the storage of equipment or material, or other use. Gravel used to traverse grassed areas must be removed and the area restored to its original condition, including top soil and seeding as necessary.




SECTION 01 57 20.00 10

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



EM 385-1-1 (2008) Safety and Health Requirements Manual

WETLAND MANUAL Corps of Engineers Wetlands Delineation Manual Technical Report Y-87-1


33 CFR 328 Definitions of Waters of the United States

40 CFR 150 - 189 Pesticide Programs

40 CFR 260 Hazardous Waste Management System: General

40 CFR 261 Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste

40 CFR 262 Standards Applicable to Generators of Hazardous Waste

40 CFR 279 Standards for the Management of Used Oil

40 CFR 302 Designation, Reportable Quantities, and Notification

40 CFR 355 Emergency Planning and Notification

40 CFR 68 Chemical Accident Prevention Provisions

49 CFR 171 - 178 Hazardous Materials Regulations

1.2 DEFINITIONS

1.2.1 Environmental Pollution and Damage

Environmental pollution and damage is the presence of chemical, physical, or biological elements or agents which adversely affect human health or welfare; unfavorably alter ecological balances of importance to human life; affect other species of importance to humankind; or degrade the environment aesthetically, culturally and/or historically.

SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 1


1.2.2 Environmental Protection

Environmental protection is the prevention/control of pollution and habitat disruption that may occur to the environment during construction. The control of environmental pollution and damage requires consideration of land, water, and air; biological and cultural resources; and includes management of visual aesthetics; noise; solid, chemical, gaseous, and liquid waste; radiant energy and radioactive material as well as other pollutants.

1.2.3 Contractor Generated Hazardous Waste

Contractor generated hazardous waste means materials that, if abandoned or disposed of, may meet the definition of a hazardous waste. These waste streams would typically consist of material brought on site by the Contractor to execute work, but are not fully consumed during the course of construction. Examples include, but are not limited to, excess paint thinners (i.e. methyl ethyl ketone, toluene etc.), waste thinners,excess paints, excess solvents, waste solvents, and excess pesticides, and contaminated pesticide equipment rinse water.

1.2.4 Land Application for Discharge Water

The term "Land Application" for discharge water implies that the Contractor must discharge water at a rate which allows the water to percolate into the soil. No sheeting action, soil erosion, discharge into storm sewers, discharge into defined drainage areas, or discharge into the "waters of the United States" must occur. Land Application must be in compliance with all applicable Federal, State, and local laws and regulations.

1.2.5 Pesticide

Pesticide is defined as any substance or mixture of substances intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating any pest, or intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant or desiccant.

1.2.6 Pests

The term "pests" means arthropods, birds, rodents, nematodes, fungi, bacteria, viruses, algae, snails, marine borers, snakes, weeds and other organisms (except for human or animal disease-causing organisms) that adversely affect readiness, military operations, or the well-being of personnel and animals; attack or damage real property, supplies, equipment, or vegetation; or are otherwise undesirable.

1.2.7 Surface Discharge

The term "Surface Discharge" implies that the water is discharged with possible sheeting action and subsequent soil erosion may occur. Waters that are surface discharged may terminate in drainage ditches, storm sewers,creeks, and/or "waters of the United States" and would require a permit to discharge water from the governing agency.

1.2.8 Waters of the United States

All waters which are under the jurisdiction of the Clean Water Act, as defined in 33 CFR 328.

SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 2


1.2.9 Wetlands

Those areas that are inundated or saturated by surface or ground water at a frequency and duration sufficient to support, and that under normal circumstances do support, a prevalence of vegetation typically adapted for life in saturated soil conditions. Wetlands generally include swamps, marshes, and bogs. Official determination of whether or not an area is classified as a wetland must be done in accordance with WETLAND MANUAL.


Minimize environmental pollution and damage that may occur as the result of construction operations. The environmental resources within the project boundaries and those affected outside the limits of permanent work must be protected during the entire duration of this contract. Comply with all applicable environmental Federal, State, and local laws and regulations. Any delays resulting from failure to comply with environmental laws and regulations will be the Contractor's responsibility.

1.4 SUBCONTRACTORS

Ensure compliance with this section by subcontractors.

1.5 PAYMENT

No separate payment will be made for work covered under this section. Payment of fees associated with environmental permits, application, and/or notices obtained by the Contractor, and payment of all fines/fees for violation or non-compliance with Federal, State, Regional and local laws and regulations are the Contractor's responsibility. All costs associated with this section must be included in the contract price.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:


Environmental Protection Plan

The environmental protection plan.

1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLAN

Prior to commencing construction activities or delivery of materials to the site, submit an Environmental Protection Plan for review and approval by the Contracting Officer. The purpose of the Environmental Protection Plan is to present a comprehensive overview of known or potential environmental issues which the Contractor must address during construction. Issues of concern must be defined within the Environmental Protection Plan as outlined in this section. Address each topic at a level of detail commensurate with the environmental issue and required construction task(s). Topics or issues which are not identified in this section, but are considered necessary, must be identified and discussed after those items formally identified in this section. Prior to submittal of the

SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 3


Environmental Protection Plan, meet with the Contracting Officer for the purpose of discussing the implementation of the initial Environmental Protection Plan; possible subsequent additions and revisions to the plan including any reporting requirements; and methods for administration of the Contractor's Environmental Plans. The Environmental Protection Plan must be current and maintained onsite by the Contractor.

1.7.1 Compliance

No requirement in this Section will relieve the Contractor of any applicable Federal, State, and local environmental protection laws and regulations. During Construction, the Contractor will be responsible for identifying, implementing, and submitting for approval any additional requirements to be included in the Environmental Protection Plan.

1.7.2 Contents

Include in the environmental protection plan, but not limit it to, the following:

a. Name(s) of person(s) within the Contractor's organization who is(are) responsible for ensuring adherence to the Environmental Protection Plan.

b. Name(s) and qualifications of person(s) responsible for manifesting hazardous waste to be removed from the site, if applicable.

c. Name(s) and qualifications of person(s) responsible for training the Contractor's environmental protection personnel.

d. Description of the Contractor's environmental protection personnel training program.

e. An erosion and sediment control plan which identifies the type and location of the erosion and sediment controls to be provided. The plan must include monitoring and reporting requirements to assure that the control measures are in compliance with the erosion and sediment control plan, Federal, State, and local laws and regulations. A Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) may be substituted for this plan.

f. Drawings showing locations of proposed temporary excavations or embankments for haul roads, stream crossings, material storage areas, structures, sanitary facilities, and stockpiles of excess or spoil materials including methods to control runoff and to contain materials on the site.

g. Traffic control plans including measures to reduce erosion of temporary roadbeds by construction traffic, especially during wet weather. Plan shall include measures to minimize the amount of mud transported onto paved public roads by vehicles or runoff.

h. Work area plan showing the proposed activity in each portion of the area and identifying the areas of limited use or nonuse. Plan should include measures for marking the limits of use areas including methods for protection of features to be preserved within authorized work areas.

i. Drawing showing the location of borrow areas.

SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 4


j. Include in the Spill Control plan the procedures, instructions, and reports to be used in the event of an unforeseen spill of a substance regulated by 40 CFR 68, 40 CFR 302, 40 CFR 355, and/or regulated under State or Local laws and regulations. The Spill Control Plan supplements the requirements of EM 385-1-1 and the State of Illinois. Include in this plan, as a minimum:

1). The name of the individual who will report any spills or hazardous substance releases and who will follow up with complete documentation. This individual will immediately notify the Contracting Officer and the local Fire Department in addition to the legally required Federal, State, and local reporting channels (including the National Response Center 1-800-424-8802) if a reportable quantity is released to the environment. Include in the plan a list of the required reporting channels and telephone numbers.

2). The name and qualifications of the individual who will be responsible for implementing and supervising the containment and cleanup.

3). Training requirements for Contractor's personnel and methods of accomplishing the training.

4). A list of materials and equipment to be immediately available at the job site, tailored to cleanup work of the potential hazard(s) identified.

5). The names and locations of suppliers of containment materials and locations of additional fuel oil recovery, cleanup, restoration, and material-placement equipment available in case of an unforeseen spill emergency.

6). The methods and procedures to be used for expeditious contaminant cleanup.

k. A non-hazardous solid waste disposal plan identifying methods and locations for solid waste disposal including clearing debris and schedules for disposal.

1). Identify any subcontractors responsible for the transportation and disposal of solid waste. Submit licenses or permits for solid waste disposal sites that are not a commercial operating facility.

2). Evidence of the disposal facility's acceptance of the solid waste must be attached to this plan during the construction. Attach a copy of each of the Non-hazardous Solid Waste Diversion Reports to the disposal plan. Submit the report for the previous quarter on the first working day after the first quarter that non-hazardous solid waste has been disposed and/or diverted (e.g. the first working day of January, April, July, and October).

3). Indicate in the report the total amount of waste generated and total amount of waste diverted in cubic yards or tons along with the percent that was diverted.

4). A recycling and solid waste minimization plan with a list of measures to reduce consumption of energy and natural resources.

SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 5


Detail in the plan the Contractor's actions to comply with and to participate in Federal, State, Regional, and local government sponsored recycling programs to reduce the volume of solid waste at the source.

m. An air pollution control plan detailing provisions to assure that dust, debris, materials, trash, etc., do not become air borne and travel off the project site.

n. A contaminant prevention plan that: identifies potentially hazardous substances to be used on the job site; identifies the intended actions to prevent introduction of such materials into the air, water, or ground; and details provisions for compliance with Federal, State, and local laws and regulations for storage and handling of these materials. In accordance with EM 385-1-1, a copy of the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and the maximum quantity of each hazardous material to be onsite at any given time must be included in the contaminant prevention plan. Update the plan as new hazardous materials are brought onsite or removed from the site.

o. A waste water management plan that identifies the methods and procedures for management and/or discharge of waste waters which are directly derived from construction activities, such as concrete curing water, clean-up water, dewatering of ground water, disinfection water, hydrostatic test water, and water used in flushing of lines. If a settling/retention pond is required, the plan must include the design of the pond including drawings, removal plan, and testing requirements for possible pollutants. If land application will be the method of disposal for the waste water, the plan must include a sketch showing the location for land application along with a description of the pretreatment methods to be implemented. If surface discharge will be the method of disposal, include a copy of the permit and associated documents as an attachment prior to discharging the waste water. If disposal is to a sanitary sewer, the plan must include documentation that the Waste Water Treatment Plant Operator has approved the flow rate, volume, and type of discharge.

p. A historical, archaeological, cultural resources biological resources and wetlands plan that defines procedures for identifying and protecting historical, archaeological, cultural resources, biological resources and wetlands known to be on the project site: and/or identifies procedures to be followed if historical archaeological, cultural resources, biological resources and wetlands not previously known to be onsite or in the area are discovered during construction. Include in the plan methods to assure the protection of known or discovered resources, identifying lines of communication between Contractor personnel and the Contracting Officer.

1.7.3 Appendix

Attach to the Environmental Protection Plan, as an appendix, copies of all environmental permits, permit application packages, approvals to construct, notifications, certifications, reports, and termination documents.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT OF CONTRACT DEVIATIONS

Any deviations from the drawings,plans and specifications, requested by the Contractor and which may have an environmental impact, will be subject to approval by the Contracting Officer and may require an extended review,

SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 6


processing, and approval time. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to disapprove alternate methods, even if they are more cost effective, if the Contracting Officer determines that the proposed alternate method will have an adverse environmental impact.

1.9 NOTIFICATION

The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor in writing of any observed noncompliance with Federal, State or local environmental laws or regulations, permits, and other elements of the Contractor's Environmental Protection plan. After receipt of such notice, the Contractor will inform the Contracting Officer of the proposed corrective action and take such action when approved by the Contracting Officer. The Contracting Officer may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No time extensions will be granted or equitable adjustments allowed for any such suspensions. This is in addition to any other actions the Contracting Officer may take under the contract, or in accordance with the Federal Acquisition Regulation or Federal Law.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL PERMITS AND COMMITMENTS

Obtaining and complying with all environmental permits and commitments required by Federal, State, Regional, and local environmental laws and regulations is the Contractor's responsibility.

3.2 LAND RESOURCES

Confine all activities to areas defined by the drawings and specifications. Identify any land resources to be preserved within the work area prior to the beginning of any construction. Do not remove, cut, deface, injure, or destroy land resources including trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, topsoil, and land forms without approval, except in areas indicated on the drawings or specified to be cleared. Ropes, cables, or guys will not be fastened to or attached to any trees for anchorage unless specifically authorized. Provide effective protection for land and vegetation resources at all times, as defined in the following subparagraphs. Remove stone, soil, or other materials displaced into uncleared areas.

3.2.1 Work Area Limits

Mark the areas that need not be disturbed under this contract prior to commencing construction activities. Mark or fence isolated areas within the general work area which are not to be disturbed. Protect monuments and markers before construction operations commence. Where construction operations are to be conducted during darkness, any markers must be visible in the dark. The Contractor's personnel must be knowledgeable of the purpose for marking and/or protecting particular objects.

3.2.2 Landscape

Trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, land forms and other landscape features indicated and defined on the drawings to be preserved must be clearly identified by marking, fencing, or wrapping with boards, or any other

SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 7


approved techniques. Restore landscape features damaged or destroyed during construction operations outside the limits of the approved work area.

3.2.3 Erosion and Sediment Controls

Providing erosion and sediment control measures in accordance with Federal, State, and local laws and regulations is the Contractor's responsibility. The erosion and sediment controls selected and maintained by the Contractor shall be such that water quality standards are not violated as a result of construction activities. The area of bare soil exposed at any one time by construction operations should be kept to a minimum. Construct or install temporary and permanent erosion and sediment control best management practices (BMPs) as specified in Section 01 57 23 TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL. BMPs may include, but not be limited to, vegetation cover, stream bank stabilization, slope stabilization, silt fences, construction of terraces, interceptor channels, sediment traps, inlet and outfall protection, diversion channels, and sedimentation basins. Remove any temporary measures after the area has been stabilized.

3.3 WATER RESOURCES

Monitor all water areas affected by construction activities to prevent pollution of surface and ground waters. Do not apply toxic or hazardous chemicals to soil or vegetation unless otherwise indicated. For construction activities immediately adjacent to impaired surface waters, the Contractor must be capable of quantifying sediment or pollutant loading to that surface water when required by State or Federally issued Clean Water Act permits.

3.4 AIR RESOURCES

Equipment operation, activities, or processes will be in accordance with all Federal and State air emission and performance laws and standards.

3.4.1 Particulates

Dust particles; aerosols and gaseous by-products from construction activities; and processing and preparation of materials, such as from asphaltic batch plants; must be controlled at all times, including weekends, holidays and hours when work is not in progress. Maintain excavations, stockpiles, haul roads, permanent and temporary access roads, plant sites, spoil areas, borrow areas, and other work areas within or outside the project boundaries free from particulates which would cause the Federal, State, and local air pollution standards to be exceeded or which would cause a hazard or a nuisance. Sprinkling, chemical treatment of an approved type, baghouse, scrubbers, electrostatic precipitators or other methods will be permitted to control particulates in the work area. Sprinkling, to be efficient, must be repeated to keep the disturbed area damp at all times. Provide sufficient, competent equipment available to accomplish these tasks. Perform particulate control as the work proceeds and whenever a particulate nuisance or hazard occurs. Comply with all State and local visibility regulations.

3.4.2 Odors

Odors from construction activities must be controlled at all times. The odors must be in compliance with State regulations and/or local ordinances and may not constitute a health hazard.

SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 8


3.4.3 Sound Intrusions

Keep construction activities under surveillance and control to minimize environment damage by noise. Comply with the provisions of the State of Illinois and local municipal rules.

3.4.4 Burning

Burning is prohibited on the Government premises.

3.5 CHEMICAL MATERIALS MANAGEMENT AND WASTE DISPOSAL

Disposal of wastes will be as directed below, unless otherwise specified in other sections and/or shown on the drawings.

3.5.1 Solid Wastes

Place solid wastes (excluding clearing debris) in containers which are emptied on a regular schedule. Handling, storage, and disposal must be conducted to prevent contamination. Employ segregation measures so that no hazardous or toxic waste will become co-mingled with solid waste. Transport solid waste off Government property and dispose of it in compliance with Federal, State, and local requirements for solid waste disposal. A Subtitle D RCRA permitted landfill will be the minimum acceptable offsite solid waste disposal option. Verify that the selected transporters and disposal facilities have the necessary permits and licenses to operate.Comply with Federal, State, and local laws and regulations pertaining to the use of landfill areas.

3.5.2 Chemicals and Chemical Wastes

Dispense chemicals ensuring no spillage to the ground or water. Perform and document periodic inspections of dispensing areas to identify leakage and initiate corrective action. This documentation will be periodically reviewed by the Government. Collect chemical waste in corrosion resistant, compatible containers. Collection drums must be monitored and removed to a staging or storage area when contents are within 6 inches of the top. Wastes will be classified, managed, stored, and disposed of in accordance with Federal, State, and local laws and regulations.

3.5.3 Contractor Generated Hazardous Wastes/Excess Hazardous Materials

Hazardous wastes are defined in 40 CFR 261, or are as defined by applicable State and local regulations. Hazardous materials are defined in 49 CFR 171 - 178. At a minimum, manage and store hazardous waste in compliance with 40 CFR 262. Take sufficient measures to prevent spillage of hazardous and toxic materials during dispensing. Segregate hazardous waste from other materials and wastes, protect it from the weather by placing it in a safe covered location, and take precautionary measures such as berming or other appropriate measures against accidental spillage. Storage, describing, packaging, labeling, marking, and placarding of hazardous waste and hazardous material in accordance with 49 CFR 171 - 178, State, and local laws and regulations is the Contractor's responsibility. Transport Contractor generated hazardous waste off Government property within 60 days in accordance with the Environmental Protection Agency and the Department of Transportation laws and regulations. Dispose of hazardous waste in compliance with Federal, State and local laws and regulations. Spills of hazardous or toxic materials must be immediately reported to the Contracting Officer. Cleanup and cleanup costs due to

SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 9


spills are the Contractor's responsibility. The disposition of Contractor generated hazardous waste and excess hazardous materials are the Contractor's responsibility.

3.5.4 Fuel and Lubricants

Storage, fueling and lubrication of equipment and motor vehicles must be conducted in a manner that affords the maximum protection against spill and evaporation. Manage and store fuel, lubricants and oil in accordance with all Federal, State, Regional, and local laws and regulations. Used lubricants and used oil to be discarded must be stored in marked corrosion-resistant containers and recycled or disposed in accordance with 40 CFR 279, State, and local laws and regulations.

3.5.5 Waste Water

Disposal of waste water will be as specified below.a. Waste water from construction activities, such as onsite material processing, concrete curing, foundation and concrete clean-up, water used in concrete trucks, forms, etc. will not be allowed to enter water ways or to be discharged prior to being treated to remove pollutants. Dispose of the construction related waste water off-Government property in accordance with all Federal, State, Regional and Local laws and regulations.

a. Water generated from the flushing of lines after disinfection or disinfection in conjunction with hydrostatic testing will be discharged into the sanitary sewer with prior approval and/or notification to the Waste Water Treatment Plant's Operator.

3.6 HISTORICAL, ARCHAEOLOGICAL, AND CULTURAL RESOURCES

If during excavation or other construction activities any previously unidentified or unanticipated historical, archaeological, and cultural resources are discovered or found, all activities that may damage or alter such resources will be temporarily suspended. Resources covered by this paragraph include but are not limited to: any human skeletal remains or burials; artifacts; shell, midden, bone, charcoal, or other deposits; rock or coral alignments, pavings, wall, or other constructed features; and any indication of agricultural or other human activities. Upon such discovery or find, immediately notify the Contracting Officer so that the appropriate authorities may be notified and a determination made as to their significance and what, if any, special disposition of the finds should be made. Cease all activities that may result in impact to or the destruction of these resources. Secure the area and prevent employees or other persons from trespassing on, removing, or otherwise disturbing such resources.

3.7 BIOLOGICAL RESOURCES

Minimize interference with, disturbance to, and damage to fish, wildlife, and plants including their habitat. The protection of threatened and endangered animal and plant species, including their habitat, is the Contractor's responsibility in accordance with Federal, State, Regional, and local laws and regulations.

3.8 INTEGRATED PEST MANAGEMENT

The use and management of pesticides are regulated under 40 CFR 150 - 189.

SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 10


3.9 MILITARY MUNITIONS

In the event military munitions, as defined in 40 CFR 260, are discovered or uncovered, the Contractor will immediately stop work in that area and immediately inform the Contracting Officer.

3.10 TRAINING OF CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL

The Contractor's personnel must be trained in all phases of environmental protection and pollution control. Conduct environmental protection/pollution control meetings for all personnel prior to commencing construction activities. Additional meetings must be conducted for new personnel and when site conditions change. Include in the training and meeting agenda: methods of detecting and avoiding pollution; familiarization with statutory and contractual pollution standards; installation and care of devices, vegetative covers, and instruments required for monitoring purposes to ensure adequate and continuous environmental protection/pollution control; anticipated hazardous or toxic chemicals or wastes, and other regulated contaminants.

3.11 CONTAMINATED MEDIA MANAGEMENT

Manage contaminated environmental media consisting of, but not limited to, ground water, soils, and sediments in accordance with Section Federal, State, and Local regulations.

3.12 POST CONSTRUCTION CLEANUP

The Contractor will clean up all areas used for construction in accordance with Contract Clause: "Cleaning Up". Unless otherwise instructed in writing by the Contracting Officer, obliterate all signs of temporary construction facilities such as haul roads, work area, structures, foundations of temporary structures, stockpiles of excess or waste materials, and other vestiges of construction prior to final acceptance of the work. The disturbed area must be graded, filled and the entire area seeded unless otherwise indicated.


SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 11


SECTION 01 57 23

TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL04/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM D 4439 (2004) Geosynthetics

ASTM D 4491 (1999a; R 2004e1) Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity

ASTM D 4533 (2004) Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles

ASTM D 4632 (2008) Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles

ASTM D 4751 (2004) Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile

ASTM D 4873 (2002) Identification, Storage, and Handling of Geosynthetic Rolls and Samples

U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)

EPA 832-R-92-005 (1992) Storm Water Management for Construction Activities Developing Pollution Preventions and Plans and Best Management Practices


40 CFR 122.26 Storm Water Discharges (Applicable to State NPDES Programs, see section 123.25)

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The Contractor is responsible for all aspects of compliance with Federal, State and Local storm water pollution control requirements, including but not limited to development of the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP), execution of the SWPPP, obtaining and paying for all associated permits/fees, notifications, monitoring and reporting. The work consists of implementing the storm water pollution prevention measures to prevent sediment from entering streams or water bodies as specified in this Section in conformance with the requirements of Section 01 57 20.00 10 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION, and the requirements of the National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES).



Complete NPDES permit requirements can be found at the follwing Illinois EPA website: www.epa.state.il.us/water/permits/storm-water/construction.htmlA completed NOI must be submitted in sufficient time to allow a 30 day review period after the receipt of the NOI by the Illinois EPA. Electronic NOI can be submitted to the following email address: [email protected].

1.3 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS

Practices that may be utilized by the contractor are described below. The governing authority for the area in which the project is located may have practices and associated requirements different from those described below. In these cases the Contractor shall utilize local practices and associated requirements allowed by the governing authority.

1.3.1 Stabilization Practices

The stabilization practices to be implemented include temporary seeding, mulching, geotextiles, sod stabilization, vegetative buffer strips, erosion control matts, protection of trees, preservation of mature vegetation, etc. On the daily CQC Report, record the dates when the major grading activities occur, (e.g., clearing and grubbing, excavation, embankment, and grading); when construction activities temporarily or permanently cease on a portion of the site; and when stabilization practices are initiated. Except as provided in paragraphs UNSUITABLE CONDITIONS and NO ACTIVITY FOR LESS THAN 21 DAYS, initiate stabilization practices as soon as practicable, but no more than 14 days, in any portion of the site where construction activities have temporarily or permanently ceased.

1.3.1.1 Unsuitable Conditions

Where the initiation of stabilization measures by the fourteenth day after construction activity temporarily or permanently ceases or is precluded by unsuitable conditions caused by the weather, initiate stabilization practices as soon as practicable after conditions become suitable.

1.3.1.2 No Activity for Less Than 21 Days

When the total time period in which construction activity is temporarily ceased on a portion of the site is 21 days minimum, stabilization practices do not have to be initiated on that portion of the site until 14 days have elapsed after construction activity temporarily ceased.

1.3.1.3 Burnoff

Burnoff of the ground cover is not permitted.

1.3.1.4 Protection of Erodible Soils

Immediately finish the earthwork brought to a final grade, as indicated or specified, and protect the side slopes and back slopes upon completion of rough grading. Plan and conduct earthwork to minimize the duration of exposure of unprotected soils.

1.3.2 Erosion, Sediment and Stormwater Control

a. Comply with the governing agency monitoring and reporting requirements and provide a copy of field reports and forms to the Government.



b. Storm Water Notice of Intent for Construction Activities

c. Submit a Storm Water Notice of Intent for NPDES coverage under the general permit for construction activities and a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) for the project to the Contracting Officer prior to the commencement of work. The SWPPP shall meet the requirements of the State of Illinois general permit for storm water discharges from construction sites. Submit the SWPPP along with any required Notice of Intents, Notice of Termination, and appropriate permit fees, via the Contracting Officer, to the appropriate State agency for approval, a minimum of 14 calendar days prior to the start of any land disturbing activities. Maintain an approved copy of the SWPPP at the construction on-site office, and continually update as regulations require, to reflect current site conditions. Include within the SWPPP:

(1) Identify potential sources of pollution which may be reasonably expected to affect the quality of storm water discharge from the site.

(2) Describe and ensure implementation of practices which will be used to reduce the pollutants in storm water discharge from the site.

(3) Ensure compliance with terms of the State of Illinois general permit for storm water discharge.

(4) Select applicable best management practices from EPA 832-R-92-005.

(5) Include a completed copy of the Registration Statement, BMP Inspection Report Template and Notice of Termination except for the effective date.

(6) Storm Water Pollution Prevention Measures and Notice of Intent 40 CFR 122.26, EPA 832-R-92-005. Provide a "Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan" (SWPPP) for the project. The SWPPP will meet the requirements of the State of Illinois general permit for storm water discharges from construction sites. Submit the SWPPP along with any required Notice of Intents, Notice of Termination, and appropriate permit fees, via the Contracting Officer, to the appropriate State agency for approval, a minimum of 14 calendar days prior to the start of construction. A copy of the approved SWPPP will be kept at the construction on-site office, and continually updated as regulations require to reflect current site conditions.

1.3.3 Structural Practices

Implement structural practices to divert flows from exposed soils, temporarily store flows, or otherwise limit runoff and the discharge of pollutants from exposed areas of the site. Implement structural practices in a timely manner, during the construction process, to minimize erosion and sediment runoff.

1.3.3.1 Silt Fences

Provide silt fences as a temporary structural practice to minimize erosion



and sediment runoff. Properly install silt fences to effectively retain sediment immediately after completing each phase of work where erosion would occur in the form of sheet and rill erosion (e.g. clearing and grubbing, excavation, embankment, and grading). Install silt fences in the locations indicated on the drawings. Obtain approval from the Contracting Officer prior to final removal of silt fence barriers.

1.3.4 Sediment Basins

Trap sediment in temporary sediment basins. Select a basin size to accommodate the runoff as required by State and Local regulations. Pump dry and remove the accumulated sediment, after each storm. Use a paved weir or vertical overflow pipe for overflow. Remove collected sediment from the site. Institute effluent quality monitoring programs. Install, inspect, and maintain best management practices (BMPs) as required by the general permit. Prepare BMP Inspection Reports as required by the general permit. If required by the permit, include those inspection reports.

1.3.5 Vegetation and Mulch

a. Provide temporary protection on sides and back slopes as soon as rough grading is completed or sufficient soil is exposed to require erosion protection. Protect slopes by accelerated growth of permanent vegetation, temporary vegetation, mulching, or netting. Stabilize slopes by hydroseeding, anchoring mulch in place, covering with anchored netting, sodding, or such combination of these and other methods necessary for effective erosion control.

b. Seeding: Provide new seeding where ground is disturbed. Include topsoil or nutriment during the seeding operation necessary to establish or reestablish a suitable stand of grass.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:


Storm Water Pollution Prevention PlanStorm Water Notice of Intent

Pollution prevention plan and Notice of intent for NPDES coverage under the general permit for construction activities

SD-06 Test Reports

Storm Water Inspection Reports for General PermitErosion and Sediment Controls

SD-07 Certificates

Mill Certificate or Affidavit

Certificate attesting that the Contractor has met all specified requirements.



1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Identify, store and handle filter fabric in accordance with ASTM D 4873.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPONENTS FOR SILT FENCES

2.1.1 Filter Fabric

Provide geotextile that complies with the requirements of ASTM D 4439, and consists of polymeric filaments which are formed into a stable network such that filaments retain their relative positions. The filament shall consist of a long-chain synthetic polymer composed of at least 85 percent by weight of ester, propylene, or amide, and contains stabilizers and/or inhibitors added to the base plastic to make the filaments resistent to deterioration due to ultraviolet and heat exposure. Provide synthetic filter fabric that contains ultraviolet ray inhibitors and stabilizers to assure a minimum of six months of expected usable construction life at a temperature range of 0 to 120 degrees F. The filter fabric shall meet the following requirements:

FILTER FABRIC FOR SILT SCREEN FENCE

PHYSICAL PROPERTY TEST PROCEDURE STRENGTH REQUIREMENT

Grab Tensile ASTM D 4632 100 lbs. min.Elongation (percent) 30 percent max.

Trapezoid Tear ASTM D 4533 55 lbs. min.

Permittivity ASTM D 4491 0.2 sec-1

AOS (U.S. Std Sieve) ASTM D 4751 20-100

2.1.2 Silt Fence Stakes and Posts

Use steel posts for fence construction. Steel posts (standard "U" or "T" section) utilized for silt fence construction, shall have a minimum weight of 1.33 pounds/linear foot and a minimum length of 5 feet.

2.1.3 Mill Certificate or Affidavit

Provide a mill certificate or affidavit attesting that the fabric and factory seams meet chemical, physical, and manufacturing requirements specified above. Specify in the mill certificate or affidavit the actual Minimum Average Roll Values and identify the fabric supplied by roll identification numbers. Submit a mill certificate or affidavit signed by a legally authorized official from the company manufacturing the filter fabric.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 General3.2 INSTALLATION OF SILT FENCES

Extend silt fences a minimum of 16 inches above the ground surface without exceeding 34 inches above the ground surface. Provide filter fabric from a continuous roll cut to the length of the barrier to avoid the use of



joints. When joints are unavoidable, splice together filter fabric at a support post, with a minimum 6 inch overlap, and securely sealed. Excavate trench approximately 4 inches wide and 4 inches deep on the upslope side of the location of the silt fence. The 4 by 4 inch trench shall be backfilled and the soil compacted over the filter fabric. Remove silt fences upon approval by the Contracting Officer.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Maintain the temporary and permanent vegetation, erosion and sediment control measures, and other protective measures in good and effective operating condition by performing routine inspections to determine condition and effectiveness, by restoration of destroyed vegetative cover, and by repair of erosion and sediment control measures and other protective measures. Use the following procedures to maintain the protective measures.

3.3.1 Silt Fence Maintenance

Inspect the silt fences in accordance with paragraph, titled "Inspections," of this section. Any required repairs shall be made promptly. Pay close attention to the repair of damaged silt fence resulting from end runs and undercutting. Should the fabric on a silt fence decompose or become ineffective, and the barrier is still necessary, replace the fabric promptly. Remove sediment deposits when deposits reach one-third of the height of the barrier. Remove a silt fence when it is no longer required. The immediate area occupied by the fence and any sediment deposits shall be shaped to an acceptable grade. The areas disturbed by this shaping shallreceive erosion control or be seeded.

3.4 INSPECTIONS

3.4.1 General

Comply with the regulatory agency requirements for inspections or as determined herein. The more stringent requirements will apply

Inspect disturbed areas of the construction site, areas that have not been finally stabilized used for storage of materials exposed to precipitation, stabilization practices, structural practices, other controls, and area where vehicles exit the site at least once every seven (7) calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of any storm that produces 0.5 inches or more rainfall at the site. Conduct inspections at least once every month where sites have been finally stabilized.

3.4.2 Inspections Details

Inspect disturbed areas and areas used for material storage that are exposed to precipitation for evidence of, or the potential for, pollutants entering the drainage system. Observe erosion and sediment control measures identified in the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan to ensure that they are operating correctly. Inspect discharge locations or points to ascertain whether erosion control measures are effective in preventing significant impacts to receiving waters. Inspect locations where vehicles exit the site for evidence of offsite sediment tracking.

3.4.3 Inspection Reports

For each inspection conducted, prepare a report summarizing the scope of the inspection, name(s) and qualifications of personnel making the



inspection, the date(s) of the inspection, major observations relating to the implementation of the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan, maintenance performed, and actions taken. Furnish the report to the Contracting Officer within 24 hours of the inspection as a part of the Contractor's daily CQC REPORT. A copy of the inspection report shall be maintained on the job site. Also file the required form as stipulated by the governing agency.




SECTION 01 62 35

RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS

07/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



40 CFR 247 Comprehensive Procurement Guideline for Products Containing Recovered Materials

1.2 OBJECTIVES

Government procurement policy is to acquire, in a cost effective manner, items containing the highest percentage of recycled and recovered materials practicable consistent with maintaining a satisfactory level of competition without adversely affecting performance requirements or exposing suppliers' employees to undue hazards from the recovered materials. The Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) has designated certain items which must contain a specified percent range of recovered or recycled materials. EPA designated products specified in this contract comply with the stated policy and with the EPA guidelines. Make all reasonable efforts to use recycled and recovered materials in providing the EPA designated products and in otherwise utilizing recycled and recovered materials in the execution of the work.

1.3 EPA DESIGNATED ITEMS INCORPORATED IN THE WORK

Various sections of the specifications contain requirements for materials that have been designated by EPA as being products which are or can be made with recovered or recycled materials. These items, when incorporated into the work under this contract, shall contain at least the specified percentage of recycled or recovered materials unless adequate justification (non-availability) for non-use is provided. When a designated item is specified as an option to a non-designated item, the designated item requirements apply only if the designated item is used in the work.

1.4 EPA PROPOSED ITEMS INCORPORATED IN THE WORK

Products other than those designated by EPA are still being researched and are being considered for future Comprehensive Procurement Guideline (CPG) designation. Contractor may recommend such products for inclusion in the project. If accepted by the Government, such products should contain the highest practicable percentage of recycled or recovered materials, provided all other specified requirements are still met.



1.5 EPA LISTED ITEMS USED IN CONDUCT OF THE WORK BUT NOT INCORPORATED IN THE WORK

There are many products listed in 40 CFR 247 which have been designated or proposed by EPA to include recycled or recovered materials that may be used by the Contractor in performing the work but will not be incorporated into the work. These products include office products, temporary traffic control products, and pallets. It is recommended that these non-construction products, when used in the conduct of the work, contain the highest practicable percentage of recycled or recovered materials and that these products be recycled when no longer needed.

PART 2 TITLE

Not Used

PART 3 TITLE

Not Used




SECTION 01 74 19

CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT01/07

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM E 1609 (2001) Development and Implementation of a Pollution Prevention Program

U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)

LEED (2002; R 2005) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design(tm) Green Building Rating System for New Construction (LEED-NC)

1.2 GOVERNMENT POLICY

Government policy is to apply sound environmental principles in the design, construction and use of facilities. As part of the implementation of that policy: (1) practice efficient waste management when sizing, cutting, and installing products and materials and (2) use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators and to facilitate their recycling or reuse. A minimum of 50 percent by weight of total project solid waste shall be diverted from the landfill.

1.3 MANAGEMENT

Develop and implement a waste management program in accordance with ASTM E 1609 and as specified. Take a pro-active, responsible role in the management of construction and demolition waste and require all subcontractors, vendors, and suppliers to participate in the effort. The Environmental Manager, shall be responsible for instructing workers and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan for the project. Construction and demolition waste includes products of demolition or removal, excess or unusable construction materials, packaging materials for construction products, and other materials generated during the construction process but not incorporated into the work. In the management of waste consideration shall be given to the availability of viable markets, the condition of the material, the ability to provide the material in suitable condition and in a quantity acceptable to available markets, and time constraints imposed by internal project completion mandates. The Contractor is responsible for implementation of any special programs involving rebates or similar incentives related to recycling of waste. Revenues or other savings obtained for salvage, or recycling accrue to the Contractor. Appropriately permit firms and facilities used for recycling, reuse, and disposal for the intended use to the extent required by federal, state, and local regulations. Also, provide on-site instruction of



appropriate separation, handling, recycling, salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:


Waste Management Plan; G; (LEED)


Records; (LEED)

1.5 MEETINGS

Conduct Construction Waste Management meetings. After award of the Contract and prior to commencement of work, schedule and conduct a meeting with the Contracting Officer to discuss the proposed Waste Management Plan and to develop a mutual understanding relative to the details of waste management. The requirements for this meeting may be fulfilled during the coordination and mutual understanding meeting outlined in Section 01 45 04.10 06 - CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL. At a minimum, environmental and waste management goals and issues shall be discussed at the following additional meetings:

a. Pre-bid meeting.

b. Preconstruction meeting.

c. Regular QC meetings.

1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

A waste management plan shall be submitted within 30 days after notice to proceed with construction and not less than 10 days before the preconstruction meeting. The plan shall demonstrate how the project waste diversion goal shall be met and shall include the following:

a. Name of individuals on the Contractor's staff responsible for waste prevention and management.

b. Actions that will be taken to reduce solid waste generation, including coordination with subcontractors to ensure awareness and participation.

c. Description of the regular meetings to be held to address waste management.

d. Description of the specific approaches to be used in recycling/reuse of the various materials generated, including the areas on site and equipment to be used for processing, sorting, and temporary storage of wastes.

e. Characterization, including estimated types and quantities, of the



waste to be generated.

f. Name of landfill and/or incinerator to be used and the estimated costs for use, assuming that there would be no salvage or recycling on the project.

g. Identification of local and regional reuse programs, including non-profit organizations such as schools, local housing agencies, and organizations that accept used materials such as materials exchange networks and Habitat for Humanity. Include the name, location, and phone number for each reuse facility to be used, and provide a copy of the permit or license for each facility.

h. List of specific waste materials that will be salvaged for resale, salvaged and reused on the current project, salvaged and stored for reuse on a future project, or recycled. Recycling facilities that will be used shall be identified by name, location, and phone number, including a copy of the permit or license for each facility.

i. Identification of materials that cannot be recycled/reused with an explanation or justification, to be approved by the Contracting Officer.

j. Description of the means by which any waste materials identified in item (h) above will be protected from contamination.

k. Description of the means of transportation of the recyclable materials (whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to designated centers, or whether mixed materials will be collected by a waste hauler and removed from the site).

l. Anticipated net cost savings determined by subtracting Contractor program management costs and the cost of disposal from the revenue generated by sale of the materials and the incineration and/or landfill cost avoidance.

Revise and resubmit Plan as required by the Contracting Officer. Approval of Contractor's Plan will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with applicable environmental regulations or meeting project cumulative waste diversion requirement. Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to each subcontractor, the Quality Control Manager, and the Contracting Officer.

1.7 RECORDS

Records shall be maintained to document the quantity of waste generated; the quantity of waste diverted through sale, reuse, or recycling; and the quantity of waste disposed by landfill or incineration. Records shall be kept in accordance with the LEED Reference Guide and using the LEED Letter Template. Quantities may be measured by weight or by volume, but must be consistent throughout. List each type of waste separately noting the disposal or diversion date. Identify the landfill, recycling center, waste processor, or other organization used to process or receive the solid waste. Provide explanations for any waste not recycled or reused. With each application for payment, submit updated documentation for solid waste disposal and diversion, and submit manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices specifically identifying the project and waste material. The records shall be made available to the Contracting Officer during construction, and a copy of the records shall be included in the LEED Documentation Notebook.



1.8 REPORTS

Provide once copy each of quarterly reports and a final report to the Contracting Officer and to the 88th RSC. Quarterly and final reports shall include project name, information for waste generated this quarter, and cumulative totals for the project. Each report shall include supporting documentation to include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices specifically identifying the project and waste material. Include timber harvest and demolition information, if any.

1.9 COLLECTION

Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable and salvageable waste products in a manner that maximizes recyclability and salvagability of identified materials. Provide the necessary containers, bins and storage areas to facilitate effective waste management and clearly and appropriately identify them. Provide materials for barriers and enclosures around recyclable material storage areas which are nonhazardous and recyclable or reusable. Locate out of the way of construction traffic. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors. Recycling and waste bin areas are to be kept neat and clean, and recyclable materials shall be handled to prevent contamination of materials from incompatible products and materials. Clean contaminated materials prior to placing in collection containers. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous and biodegradable. Handle hazardous waste and hazardous materials in accordance with applicable regulations. Separate materials by one of the following methods:

1.9.1 Source Separated Method.

Waste products and materials that are recyclable shall be separated from trash and sorted as described below into appropriately marked separate containers and then transported to the respective recycling facility for further processing. Deliver materials in accordance with recycling or reuse facility requirements (e.g., free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process). Separate materials into the following category types as appropriate to the project waste and to the available recycling and reuse programs in the project area:

a. Land clearing debris.

b. Asphalt.

c. Concrete and masonry.

d. Metal (e.g. banding, stud trim, ductwork, piping, rebar, roofing, other trim, steel, iron, galvanized, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead brass, bronze).

(1) Ferrous.

(2) Non-ferrous.

e. Wood (nails and staples allowed).

f. Debris.



g. Glass (colored glass allowed).

h. Paper.

(1) Bond.

(2) Newsprint.

(3) Cardboard and paper packaging materials.

i. Plastic.

(1) Type 1: Polyethylene Terephthalate (PET, PETE).

(2) Type 2: High Density Polyethylene (HDPE).

(3) Type 3: Vinyl (Polyvinyl Chloride or PVC).

(4) Type 4: Low Density Polyethylene (LDPE).

(5) Type 5: Polypropylene (PP).

(6) Type 6: Polystyrene (PS).

(7) Type 7: Other. Use of this code indicates that the package in question is made with a resin other than the six listed above, or is made of more than one resin listed above, and used in a multi-layer combination.

j. Gypsum.

k. Non-hazardous paint and paint cans.

l. Carpet.

m. Ceiling tiles.

n. Insulation.

o. Beverage containers.

p. Spent batteries.

q. Mercury-containing thermostats.

r. Unused pesticides.

1.9.2 Co-Mingled Method.

Waste products and recyclable materials shall be placed into a single container and then transported to a recycling facility where the recyclable materials are sorted and processed.

1.9.3 Other Methods.

Other methods proposed by the Contractor may be used when approved by the Contracting Officer.



1.10 DISPOSAL

Control accumulation of waste materials and trash. Recycle or dispose of collected materials off-site at intervals approved by the Contracting Officer and in compliance with waste management procedures. Except as otherwise specified in other sections of the specifications, disposal shall be in accordance with the following:

1.10.1 Reuse.

First consideration shall be given to salvage for reuse since little or no re-processing is necessary for this method, and less pollution is created when items are reused in their original form. Coordinate reuse with the Contracting Officer. Sale or donation of waste suitable for reuse shall be considered.

1.10.2 Recycle.

Waste materials not suitable for reuse, but having value as being recyclable, shall be made available for recycling. All fluorescent lamps, HID lamps, and mercury-containing thermostats removed from the site shall be recycled. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facilities in order to prevent contamination of recyclable materials.

1.10.3 Waste.

Materials with no practical use or economic benefit shall be disposed at a landfill or incinerator.

1.10.4 Return

Set aside and protect misdelivered and substandard products and materials and return to supplier for credit.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used. -- End of Section --



SECTION 01 78 23

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA07/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM E 1971 (2005) Stewardship for the Cleaning of Commercial and Institutional Buildings

1.2 SUBMISSION OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

Submit Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data specifically applicable to this contract and a complete and concise depiction of the provided equipment, product, or system, stressing and enhancing the importance of system interactions, troubleshooting, and long-term preventative maintenance and operation. The subcontractors shall compile and prepare data and deliver to the Contractor prior to the training of Government personnel. The Contractor shall compile and prepare aggregate O&M data including clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions. Organize and present information in sufficient detail to clearly explain O&M requirements at the system, equipment, component, and subassembly level. Include an index preceding each submittal. Submit in accordance with this section and Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.

1.2.1 Package Quality

Documents must be fully legible. Poor quality copies and material with hole punches obliterating the text or drawings will not be accepted.

1.2.2 Package Content

Data package content shall be as shown in the paragraph titled "Schedule of Operation and Maintenance Data Packages." Comply with the data package requirements specified in the individual technical sections, including the content of the packages and addressing each product, component, and system designated for data package submission, except as follows. Commissioned items without a specified data package requirement in the individual technical sections shall use Data Package 4. Commissioned items with a Data Package 1 or 2 requirement shall use instead Data Package 5.

1.2.3 Changes to Submittals

Manufacturer-originated changes or revisions to submitted data shall be furnished by the Contractor if a component of an item is so affected subsequent to acceptance of the O&M Data. Changes, additions, or revisions required by the Contracting Officer for final acceptance of submitted data, shall be submitted by the Contractor within 30 calendar days of the notification of this change requirement.



1.2.4 Review and Approval

The Contractor's Commissioning Authority (CA) shall review the commissioned systems and equipment submittals for completeness and applicability. The CA shall verify that the systems and equipment provided meet the requirements of the Contract documents and design intent, particularly as they relate to functionality, energy performance, water performance, maintainability, sustainability, system cost, indoor environmental quality, and local environmental impacts. This work shall be in addition to the normal review procedures for O&M data.

1.3 TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED IN O&M DATA PACKAGES

1.3.1 Operating Instructions

Include specific instructions, procedures, and illustrations for the following phases of operation for the installed model and features of each system:

1.3.1.1 Safety Precautions

List personnel hazards and equipment or product safety precautions for all operating conditions.

1.3.1.2 Operator Prestart

Include procedures required to install, set up, and prepare each system for use.

1.3.1.3 Startup, Shutdown, and Post-Shutdown Procedures

Provide narrative description for Startup, Shutdown and Post-shutdown operating procedures including the control sequence for each procedure.

1.3.1.4 Normal Operations

Provide narrative description of Normal Operating Procedures. Include Control Diagrams with data to explain operation and control of systems and specific equipment.

1.3.1.5 Emergency Operations

Include Emergency Procedures for equipment malfunctions to permit a short period of continued operation or to shut down the equipment to prevent further damage to systems and equipment. Include Emergency Shutdown Instructions for fire, explosion, spills, or other foreseeable contingencies. Provide guidance and procedures for emergency operation of all utility systems including required valve positions, valve locations and zones or portions of systems controlled.

1.3.1.6 Operator Service Requirements

Include instructions for services to be performed by the operator such as lubrication, adjustment, inspection, and recording gage readings.

1.3.1.7 Environmental Conditions

Include a list of Environmental Conditions (temperature, humidity, and other relevant data) that are best suited for the operation of each



product, component or system. Describe conditions under which the item equipment should not be allowed to run.

1.3.2 Preventive Maintenance

Include the following information for preventive and scheduled maintenance to minimize corrective maintenance and repair for the installed model and features of each system. Include potential environmental and indoor air quality impacts of recommended maintenance procedures and materials.

1.3.2.1 Lubrication Data

Include preventative maintenance lubrication data, in addition to instructions for lubrication provided under paragraph titled "Operator Service Requirements":

a. A table showing recommended lubricants for specific temperature ranges and applications.

b. Charts with a schematic diagram of the equipment showing lubrication points, recommended types and grades of lubricants, and capacities.

c. A Lubrication Schedule showing service interval frequency.

1.3.2.2 Preventive Maintenance Plan and Schedule

Include manufacturer's schedule for routine preventive maintenance, inspections, tests and adjustments required to ensure proper and economical operation and to minimize corrective maintenance. Provide manufacturer's projection of preventive maintenance work-hours on a daily, weekly, monthly, and annual basis including craft requirements by type of craft. For periodic calibrations, provide manufacturer's specified frequency and procedures for each separate operation.

1.3.2.3 Cleaning Recommendations

Provide environmentally preferable cleaning recommendations in accordance with ASTM E 1971.

1.3.3 Corrective Maintenance (Repair)

Include manufacturer's recommended procedures and instructions for correcting problems and making repairs for the installed model and features of each system. Include potential environmental and indoor air quality impacts of recommended maintenance procedures and materials.

1.3.3.1 Troubleshooting Guides and Diagnostic Techniques

Include step-by-step procedures to promptly isolate the cause of typical malfunctions. Describe clearly why the checkout is performed and what conditions are to be sought. Identify tests or inspections and test equipment required to determine whether parts and equipment may be reused or require replacement.

1.3.3.2 Wiring Diagrams and Control Diagrams

Wiring diagrams and control diagrams shall be point-to-point drawings of wiring and control circuits including factory-field interfaces. Provide a complete and accurate depiction of the actual job specific wiring and



control work. On diagrams, number electrical and electronic wiring and pneumatic control tubing and the terminals for each type, identically to actual installation configuration and numbering.

1.3.3.3 Maintenance and Repair Procedures

Include instructions and a list of tools required to repair or restore the product or equipment to proper condition or operating standards.

1.3.3.4 Removal and Replacement Instructions

Include step-by-step procedures and a list required tools and supplies for removal, replacement, disassembly, and assembly of components, assemblies, subassemblies, accessories, and attachments. Provide tolerances, dimensions, settings and adjustments required. Instructions shall include a combination of text and illustrations.

1.3.3.5 Spare Parts and Supply Lists

Include lists of spare parts and supplies required for maintenance and repair to ensure continued service or operation without unreasonable delays. Special consideration is required for facilities at remote locations. List spare parts and supplies that have a long lead-time to obtain.

1.3.4 Corrective Maintenance Work-Hours

Include manufacturer's projection of corrective maintenance work-hours including requirements by type of craft. Corrective maintenance that requires completion or participation of the equipment manufacturer shall be identified and tabulated separately.

1.3.5 Appendices

Provide information required below and information not specified in the preceding paragraphs but pertinent to the maintenance or operation of the product or equipment. Include the following:

1.3.5.1 Product Submittal Data

Provide a copy of all SD-03 Product Data submittals required in the applicable technical sections.

1.3.5.2 Manufacturer's Instructions

Provide a copy of all SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions submittals required in the applicable technical sections.

1.3.5.3 O&M Submittal Data

Provide a copy of all SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data submittals required in the applicable technical sections.

1.3.5.4 Parts Identification

Provide identification and coverage for all parts of each component, assembly, subassembly, and accessory of the end items subject to replacement. Include special hardware requirements, such as requirement to use high-strength bolts and nuts. Identify parts by make, model, serial



number, and source of supply to allow reordering without further identification. Provide clear and legible illustrations, drawings, and exploded views to enable easy identification of the items. When illustrations omit the part numbers and description, both the illustrations and separate listing shall show the index, reference, or key number that will cross-reference the illustrated part to the listed part. Parts shown in the listings shall be grouped by components, assemblies, and subassemblies in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice. Parts data may cover more than one model or series of equipment, components, assemblies, subassemblies, attachments, or accessories, such as typically shown in a master parts catalog

1.3.5.5 Warranty Information

List and explain the various warranties and clearly identify the servicing and technical precautions prescribed by the manufacturers or contract documents in order to keep warranties in force. Include warranty information for primary components such as the compressor of air conditioning system.

1.3.5.6 Personnel Training Requirements

Provide information available from the manufacturers that is needed for use in training designated personnel to properly operate and maintain the equipment and systems.

1.3.5.7 Testing Equipment and Special Tool Information

Include information on test equipment required to perform specified tests and on special tools needed for the operation, maintenance, and repair of components.

1.3.5.8 Testing and Performance Data

Include completed prefunctional checklists, functional performance test forms, and monitoring reports. Include recommended schedule for retesting and blank test forms.

1.3.5.9 Contractor Information

Provide a list that includes the name, address, and telephone number of the General Contractor and each Subcontractor who installed the product or equipment, or system. For each item, also provide the name address and telephone number of the manufacturer's representative and service organization that can provide replacements most convenient to the project site. Provide the name, address, and telephone number of the product, equipment, and system manufacturers.

1.4 TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED IN CONTROLS O&M DATA PACKAGES

Include Data Package 5 and the following for control systems:

a. Narrative description on how to perform and apply all functions, features, modes, and other operations, including unoccupied operation, seasonal changeover, manual operation, and alarms. Include detailed technical manual for programming and customizing control loops and algorithms.

b. Full as-built sequence of operations.



c. Copies of all checkout tests and calibrations performed by the Contractor (not Cx tests).

1.5 SCHEDULE OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PACKAGES

Furnish the O&M data packages specified in individual technical sections. The required information for each O&M data package is as follows:

1.5.1 Data Package 1

a. Safety precautions

b. Cleaning recommendations

c. Maintenance and repair procedures

d. Warranty information

e. Contractor information

f. Spare parts and supply list



b. Normal operations

c. Environmental conditions

d. Lubrication data

e. Preventive maintenance plan and schedule

f. Cleaning recommendations

g. Maintenance and repair procedures

h. Removal and replacement instructions

i. Spare parts and supply list

j. Parts identification

k. Warranty information

l. Contractor information



b. Operator prestart

c. Startup, shutdown, and post-shutdown procedures

d. Normal operations



e. Emergency operations

f. Environmental conditions

g. Lubrication data

h. Preventive maintenance plan and schedule

i. Cleaning recommendations

j. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques

k. Wiring diagrams and control diagrams

l. Maintenance and repair procedures

m. Removal and replacement instructions

n. Spare parts and supply list

o. Product submittal data

p. O&M submittal data

q. Parts identification

r. Warranty information

s. Testing equipment and special tool information

t. Testing and performance data

u. Contractor information




c. Startup, shutdown, and post-shutdown procedures


e. Emergency operations

f. Operator service requirements

g. Environmental conditions

h. Lubrication data

i. Preventive maintenance plan and schedule

j. Cleaning recommendations

k. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques

l. Wiring diagrams and control diagrams



m. Maintenance and repair procedures

n. Removal and replacement instructions

o. Spare parts and supply list

p. Corrective maintenance man-hours

q. Product submittal data

r. O&M submittal data

s. Parts identification

t. Warranty information

u. Personnel training requirements

v. Testing equipment and special tool information

w. Testing and performance data

x. Contractor information




c. Start-up, shutdown, and post-shutdown procedures


e. Environmental conditions

f. Preventive maintenance plan and schedule

g. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques

h. Wiring and control diagrams

i. Maintenance and repair procedures

j. Removal and replacement instructions

k. Spare parts and supply list

l. Product submittal data

m. Manufacturer's instructions

n. O&M submittal data

o. Parts identification

p. Testing equipment and special tool information



q. Warranty information

r. Testing and performance data

s. Contractor information

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

